Commit graph

13899 commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
Tom Lane
d371bebd3d Remove redundant CREATEUSER/NOCREATEUSER options in CREATE ROLE et al.
Once upon a time we did not have a separate CREATEROLE privilege, and
CREATEUSER effectively meant SUPERUSER.  When we invented CREATEROLE
(in 8.1) we also added SUPERUSER so as to have a less confusing keyword
for this role property.  However, we left CREATEUSER in place as a
deprecated synonym for SUPERUSER, because of backwards-compatibility
concerns.  It's still there and is still confusing people, as for example
in bug #13694 from Justin Catterson.  9.6 will be ten years or so later,
which surely ought to be long enough to end the deprecation and just
remove these old keywords.  Hence, do so.
2015-10-22 09:34:03 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut
e4a618aa1e doc: Improve markup and fine-tune replication protocol documentation 2015-10-21 22:31:56 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
984ae04a2c doc: Move documentation of max_wal_size to better position 2015-10-20 13:33:39 -04:00
Robert Haas
5fc4c26db5 Allow FDWs to push down quals without breaking EvalPlanQual rechecks.
This fixes a long-standing bug which was discovered while investigating
the interaction between the new join pushdown code and the EvalPlanQual
machinery: if a ForeignScan appears on the inner side of a paramaterized
nestloop, an EPQ recheck would re-return the original tuple even if
it no longer satisfied the pushed-down quals due to changed parameter
values.

This fix adds a new member to ForeignScan and ForeignScanState and a
new argument to make_foreignscan, and requires changes to FDWs which
push down quals to populate that new argument with a list of quals they
have chosen to push down.  Therefore, I'm only back-patching to 9.5,
even though the bug is not new in 9.5.

Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by me and by Kyotaro Horiguchi.
2015-10-15 13:00:40 -04:00
Robert Haas
41562b14bb Fix typo in docs.
Pallavi Sontakke
2015-10-08 13:21:16 -04:00
Robert Haas
1e35319861 Hyphenate variable-length for consistency.
We hyphenate "fixed-length" earlier in the same sentence, and overall we
more often use "variable-length" rather than "variable length".

Nikolay Shaplov
2015-10-08 12:29:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
1ea0c73c2b Improve documentation of the role-dropping process.
In general one may have to run both REASSIGN OWNED and DROP OWNED to get
rid of all the dependencies of a role to be dropped.  This was alluded to
in the REASSIGN OWNED man page, but not really spelled out in full; and in
any case the procedure ought to be documented in a more prominent place
than that.  Add a section to the "Database Roles" chapter explaining this,
and do a bit of wordsmithing in the relevant commands' man pages.
2015-10-07 16:12:05 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b292ee79a6 docs: add JSONB containment example of a key and empty object
Backpatch through 9.5
2015-10-07 10:30:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
23d29cef93 docs: Map operator @> to the proper SGML escape for '>'
Backpatch through 9.5
2015-10-07 09:42:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b852dc4cbd docs: clarify JSONB operator descriptions
No catalog bump as the catalog changes are for SQL operator comments.

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-10-07 09:06:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
28b3a3d41a to_number(): allow 'V' to divide by 10^(the number of digits)
to_char('V') already multiplied in a similar manner.

Report by Jeremy Lowery
2015-10-05 21:03:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2145a76604 psql: allow \pset C in setting the title, matches \C
Report by David G. Johnston
2015-10-05 20:56:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6d8b2aa83a docs: update guidelines on when to use GIN and GiST indexes
Report by Tomas Vondra

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-10-05 13:38:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
f8a5e579d1 Docs: explain contrib/pg_stat_statements' handling of GC failure.
Failure to perform garbage collection now has a user-visible effect, so
explain that and explain that reducing pgss_max is the way to prevent it.
Per gripe from Andrew Dunstan.
2015-10-05 12:44:12 -04:00
Tom Lane
272ede71a6 Last-minute updates for release notes.
Add entries for security and not-quite-security issues.

Security: CVE-2015-5288, CVE-2015-5289
2015-10-05 10:57:43 -04:00
Andres Freund
10cfd6f854 Remove outdated comment about relation level autovacuum freeze limits.
The documentation for the autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age and
autovacuum_freeze_max_age relation level parameters contained:
"Note that while you can set autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age very
small, or even zero, this is usually unwise since it will force frequent
vacuuming."
which hasn't been true since these options were made relation options,
instead of residing in the pg_autovacuum table (834a6da4f7).

Remove the outdated sentence. Even the lowered limits from 2596d70 are
high enough that this doesn't warrant calling out the risk in the CREATE
TABLE docs.

Per discussion with Tom Lane and Alvaro Herrera

Discussion: 26377.1443105453@sss.pgh.pa.us
Backpatch: 9.0- (in parts)
2015-10-05 16:51:03 +02:00
Stephen Frost
088c83363a ALTER TABLE .. FORCE ROW LEVEL SECURITY
To allow users to force RLS to always be applied, even for table owners,
add ALTER TABLE .. FORCE ROW LEVEL SECURITY.

row_security=off overrides FORCE ROW LEVEL SECURITY, to ensure pg_dump
output is complete (by default).

Also add SECURITY_NOFORCE_RLS context to avoid data corruption when
ALTER TABLE .. FORCE ROW SECURITY is being used. The
SECURITY_NOFORCE_RLS security context is used only during referential
integrity checks and is only considered in check_enable_rls() after we
have already checked that the current user is the owner of the relation
(which should always be the case during referential integrity checks).

Back-patch to 9.5 where RLS was added.
2015-10-04 21:05:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
16a70e3059 Release notes for 9.5beta1, 9.4.5, 9.3.10, 9.2.14, 9.1.19, 9.0.23. 2015-10-04 19:38:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6390c8c654 Group cluster_name and update_process_title settings together 2015-10-04 12:29:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
cf007a4bca Update 9.5 release notes through today. 2015-10-03 22:27:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
01ef33701b First-draft release notes for 9.4.5, 9.3.10, 9.2.14, 9.1.19, 9.0.23. 2015-10-03 21:21:49 -04:00
Noah Misch
f78ae3747d Document that row_security is a boolean GUC.
Oversight in commit 537bd178c7.
Back-patch to 9.5, like that commit.
2015-10-03 20:20:22 -04:00
Noah Misch
3cb0a7e75a Make BYPASSRLS behave like superuser RLS bypass.
Specifically, make its effect independent from the row_security GUC, and
make it affect permission checks pertinent to views the BYPASSRLS role
owns.  The row_security GUC thereby ceases to change successful-query
behavior; it can only make a query fail with an error.  Back-patch to
9.5, where BYPASSRLS was introduced.
2015-10-03 20:19:57 -04:00
Andres Freund
b67aaf21e8 Add CASCADE support for CREATE EXTENSION.
Without CASCADE, if an extension has an unfullfilled dependency on
another extension, CREATE EXTENSION ERRORs out with "required extension
... is not installed". That is annoying, especially when that dependency
is an implementation detail of the extension, rather than something the
extension's user can make sense of.

In addition to CASCADE this also includes a small set of regression
tests around CREATE EXTENSION.

Author: Petr Jelinek, editorialized by Michael Paquier, Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Jeff Janes
Discussion: 557E0520.3040800@2ndquadrant.com
2015-10-03 18:23:40 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
1023194b7a doc: Update URLs of external projects 2015-10-02 21:50:59 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
eff091cc19 doc: Make some index terms and terminology more consistent 2015-10-02 21:22:44 -04:00
Robert Haas
01bc589a46 Clarify FDW documentation about ON CONFLICT.
Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by Peter Geoghegan
2015-10-02 16:55:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
558d4ada18 Docs: add disclaimer about hazards of using regexps from untrusted sources.
It's not terribly hard to devise regular expressions that take large
amounts of time and/or memory to process.  Recent testing by Greg Stark has
also shown that machines with small stack limits can be driven to stack
overflow by suitably crafted regexps.  While we intend to fix these things
as much as possible, it's probably impossible to eliminate slow-execution
cases altogether.  In any case we don't want to treat such things as
security issues.  The history of that code should already discourage
prudent DBAs from allowing execution of regexp patterns coming from
possibly-hostile sources, but it seems like a good idea to warn about the
hazard explicitly.

Currently, similar_escape() allows access to enough of the underlying
regexp behavior that the warning has to apply to SIMILAR TO as well.
We might be able to make it safer if we tightened things up to allow only
SQL-mandated capabilities in SIMILAR TO; but that would be a subtly
non-backwards-compatible change, so it requires discussion and probably
could not be back-patched.

Per discussion among pgsql-security list.
2015-10-02 13:30:42 -04:00
Tom Lane
27fddec197 Docs: add another example of creating a range type.
The "floatrange" example is a bit too simple because float8mi can be
used without any additional type conversion.  Add an example that does
have to account for that, and do some minor other wordsmithing.
2015-10-02 12:20:01 -04:00
Fujii Masao
3123ee0db2 Fix mention of htup.h in storage.sgml
Previously it was documented that the details on HeapTupleHeaderData
struct could be found in htup.h. This is not correct because it's now
defined in htup_details.h.

Back-patch to 9.3 where the definition of HeapTupleHeaderData struct
was moved from htup.h to htup_details.h.

Michael Paquier
2015-10-01 23:00:52 +09:00
Robert Haas
3bd909b220 Add a Gather executor node.
A Gather executor node runs any number of copies of a plan in an equal
number of workers and merges all of the results into a single tuple
stream.  It can also run the plan itself, if the workers are
unavailable or haven't started up yet.  It is intended to work with
the Partial Seq Scan node which will be added in future commits.

It could also be used to implement parallel query of a different sort
by itself, without help from Partial Seq Scan, if the single_copy mode
is used.  In that mode, a worker executes the plan, and the parallel
leader does not, merely collecting the worker's results.  So, a Gather
node could be inserted into a plan to split the execution of that plan
across two processes.  Nested Gather nodes aren't currently supported,
but we might want to add support for that in the future.

There's nothing in the planner to actually generate Gather nodes yet,
so it's not quite time to break out the champagne.  But we're getting
close.

Amit Kapila.  Some designs suggestions were provided by me, and I also
reviewed the patch.  Single-copy mode, documentation, and other minor
changes also by me.
2015-09-30 19:23:36 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
ac7cbf4fb0 doc: Tweak "cube" index entry
With the arrival of the CUBE key word/feature, the index entries for the
cube extension and the CUBE feature were collapsed into one.  Tweak the
entry for the cube extension so they are separate entries.
2015-09-26 21:00:59 -04:00
Tom Lane
b1d5cc375b Docs: fix typo in to_char() example.
Per bug #13631 from KOIZUMI Satoru.
2015-09-22 10:40:25 -04:00
Andres Freund
d9cb34abb4 Add some notes about coding conventions do the docs.
This deserves to be greatly expanded and improved, but it's a start.

Discussion: 20150827145219.GI2435@awork2.anarazel.de
2015-09-22 11:13:28 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
84ae1af8f4 doc: Tweak synopsis indentation for consistency 2015-09-21 23:31:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
741ccd5015 Use gender-neutral language in documentation
Based on patch by Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@enterprisedb.com>, although
I rephrased most of the initial work.
2015-09-21 22:57:29 -04:00
Noah Misch
537bd178c7 Remove the row_security=force GUC value.
Every query of a single ENABLE ROW SECURITY table has two meanings, with
the row_security GUC selecting between them.  With row_security=force
available, every function author would have been advised to either set
the GUC locally or test both meanings.  Non-compliance would have
threatened reliability and, for SECURITY DEFINER functions, security.
Authors already face an obligation to account for search_path, and we
should not mimic that example.  With this change, only BYPASSRLS roles
need exercise the aforementioned care.  Back-patch to 9.5, where the
row_security GUC was introduced.

Since this narrows the domain of pg_db_role_setting.setconfig and
pg_proc.proconfig, one might bump catversion.  A row_security=force
setting in one of those columns will elicit a clear message, so don't.
2015-09-20 20:45:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
213335c145 Order some new options on man pages more sensibly, minor improvements 2015-09-17 20:57:47 -04:00
Robert Haas
7aea8e4f2d Determine whether it's safe to attempt a parallel plan for a query.
Commit 924bcf4f16 introduced a framework
for parallel computation in PostgreSQL that makes most but not all
built-in functions safe to execute in parallel mode.  In order to have
parallel query, we'll need to be able to determine whether that query
contains functions (either built-in or user-defined) that cannot be
safely executed in parallel mode.  This requires those functions to be
labeled, so this patch introduces an infrastructure for that.  Some
functions currently labeled as safe may need to be revised depending on
how pending issues related to heavyweight locking under paralllelism
are resolved.

Parallel plans can't be used except for the case where the query will
run to completion.  If portal execution were suspended, the parallel
mode restrictions would need to remain in effect during that time, but
that might make other queries fail.  Therefore, this patch introduces
a framework that enables consideration of parallel plans only when it
is known that the plan will be run to completion.  This probably needs
some refinement; for example, at bind time, we do not know whether a
query run via the extended protocol will be execution to completion or
run with a limited fetch count.  Having the client indicate its
intentions at bind time would constitute a wire protocol break.  Some
contexts in which parallel mode would be safe are not adjusted by this
patch; the default is not to try parallel plans except from call sites
that have been updated to say that such plans are OK.

This commit doesn't introduce any parallel paths or plans; it just
provides a way to determine whether they could potentially be used.
I'm committing it on the theory that the remaining parallel sequential
scan patches will also get committed to this release, hopefully in the
not-too-distant future.

Robert Haas and Amit Kapila.  Reviewed (in earlier versions) by Noah
Misch.
2015-09-16 15:38:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
d0f18cde7e Fix documentation of regular expression character-entry escapes.
The docs claimed that \uhhhh would be interpreted as a Unicode value
regardless of the database encoding, but it's never been implemented
that way: \uhhhh and \xhhhh actually mean exactly the same thing, namely
the character that pg_mb2wchar translates to 0xhhhh.  Moreover we were
falsely dismissive of the usefulness of Unicode code points above FFFF.
Fix that.

It's been like this for ages, so back-patch to all supported branches.
2015-09-16 14:50:12 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev
1def9063ca pgbench progress with timestamp
This patch adds an option to replace the "time since pgbench run
started" with a Unix epoch timestamp in the progress report so that,
for instance, it is easier to compare timelines with pgsql log

Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2015-09-16 17:24:53 +03:00
Stephen Frost
6820094d1a Add POLICY to COMMENT documentation
COMMENT supports POLICY but the documentation hadn't caught up with
that fact.

Patch by Charles Clavadetscher

Back-patch to 9.5 where POLICY was added.
2015-09-15 10:56:29 -04:00
Teodor Sigaev
d02426029b Check existency of table/schema for -t/-n option (pg_dump/pg_restore)
Patch provides command line option --strict-names which requires that at
least one table/schema should present for each -t/-n option.

Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
2015-09-14 16:19:49 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
c193b8ca9d doc: Remove dead links
The web pages of Andy Dong at Berkeley don't exist anymore, and he is no
longer there.
2015-09-12 23:49:11 -04:00
Stephen Frost
e7bf508e6b Fix typo in create_policy.sgml
WTIH -> WITH

Pointed out by Dmitriy Olshevskiy

Backpatch to 9.5 where create_policy.sgml was added.
2015-09-12 17:17:00 -04:00
Fujii Masao
a1b2888517 Correct description of PageHeaderData layout in documentation
Back-patch to 9.3 where PageHeaderData layout was changed.

Michael Paquier
2015-09-11 13:02:15 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
103ef20211 doc: Spell checking 2015-09-10 21:35:06 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
1aba62ec63 Allow per-tablespace effective_io_concurrency
Per discussion, nowadays it is possible to have tablespaces that have
wildly different I/O characteristics from others.  Setting different
effective_io_concurrency parameters for those has been measured to
improve performance.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed by: Andres Freund
2015-09-08 12:51:42 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
49124613f1 contrib/sslinfo: add ssl_extension_info SRF
This new function provides information about SSL extensions present in
the X509 certificate used for the current connection.

Extension version updated to version 1.1.

Author: Дмитрий Воронин (Dmitry Voronin)
Reviewed by: Michael Paquier, Heikki Linnakangas, Álvaro Herrera
2015-09-07 21:24:17 -03:00
Jeff Davis
f828654e10 Add log_line_prefix option 'n' for Unix epoch.
Prints time as Unix epoch with milliseconds.

Tomas Vondra, reviewed by Fabien Coelho.
2015-09-07 13:46:31 -07:00
Teodor Sigaev
a1c44e1af6 Update site address of Snowball project 2015-09-07 15:20:45 +03:00
Andres Freund
c314ead5be Add ability to reserve WAL upon slot creation via replication protocol.
Since 6fcd885 it is possible to immediately reserve WAL when creating a
slot via pg_create_physical_replication_slot(). Extend the replication
protocol to allow that as well.

Although, in contrast to the SQL interface, it is possible to update the
reserved location via the replication interface, it is still useful
being able to reserve upon creation there. Otherwise the logic in
ReplicationSlotReserveWal() has to be repeated in slot employing
clients.

Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: CAB7nPqT0Wc1W5mdYGeJ_wbutbwNN+3qgrFR64avXaQCiJMGaYA@mail.gmail.com
2015-09-06 13:30:57 +02:00
Tom Lane
0426f349ef Rearrange the handling of error context reports.
Remove the code in plpgsql that suppressed the innermost line of CONTEXT
for messages emitted by RAISE commands.  That was never more than a quick
backwards-compatibility hack, and it's pretty silly in cases where the
RAISE is nested in several levels of function.  What's more, it violated
our design theory that verbosity of error reports should be controlled
on the client side not the server side.

To alleviate the resulting noise increase, introduce a feature in libpq
and psql whereby the CONTEXT field of messages can be suppressed, either
always or only for non-error messages.  Printing CONTEXT for errors only
is now their default behavior.

The actual code changes here are pretty small, but the effects on the
regression test outputs are widespread.  I had to edit some of the
alternative expected outputs by hand; hopefully the buildfarm will soon
find anything I fat-fingered.

In passing, fix up (again) the output line counts in psql's various
help displays.  Add some commentary about how to verify them.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Petr Jelínek, Jeevan Chalke, and others
2015-09-05 11:58:33 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
c80b5f66c6 Fix misc typos.
Oskari Saarenmaa. Backpatch to stable branches where applicable.
2015-09-05 11:35:49 +03:00
Fujii Masao
1ea5ce5c5f Document that max_worker_processes must be high enough in standby.
The setting values of some parameters including max_worker_processes
must be equal to or higher than the values on the master. However,
previously max_worker_processes was not listed as such parameter
in the document. So this commit adds it to that list.

Back-patch to 9.4 where max_worker_processes was added.
2015-09-03 22:30:16 +09:00
Tom Lane
075ab425bd Document that PL/Python now returns floats using repr() not str().
Commit 1ce7a57ca neglected to update the user-facing documentation,
which described the old behavior precisely.
2015-09-01 19:25:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
46bd95e2a8 pg_upgrade docs: clarify rsync and move verification step
These are adjustments based on someone using the new standby upgrade
steps.

Report by Andy Colson

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-09-01 16:42:43 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
9646d2fd62 Use <substeps> in pg_upgrade's procedure
For clarity, so that the substeps are not numbered identically to the
outer procedure's steps.

Per report from Andy Colson in
http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/55D789B5.7040308@squeakycode.net
2015-09-01 14:58:28 -03:00
Bruce Momjian
049a7799df docs: remove outdated note about unique indexes
Patch by Josh Kupershmidt

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-31 17:05:23 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
93370076c4 Small grammar fix
Josh Kupershmidt
2015-08-31 14:07:17 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
119cf760d0 dblink docs: fix typo to use "connname" (3 n's), not "conname"
This makes the parameter names match the documented prototype names.

Report by Erwin Brandstetter

Backpatch through 9.0
2015-08-27 13:43:10 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
16d4f94e67 release notes: abbreviated key speedup only for varchar/text
Report by Peter Geoghegan

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-26 14:46:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8190f2dfef 9.5 release notes: mention lack of char() sort improvements
Report by Peter Geoghegan

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-26 10:33:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
94324abfb9 Docs: be explicit about datatype matching for lead/lag functions.
The default argument, if given, has to be of exactly the same datatype
as the first argument; but this was not stated in so many words, and
the error message you get about it might not lead your thought in the
right direction.  Per bug #13587 from Robert McGehee.

A quick scan says that these are the only two built-in functions with two
anyelement arguments and no other polymorphic arguments.  There are plenty
of cases of, eg, anyarray and anyelement, but those seem less likely to
confuse.  For instance this doesn't seem terribly hard to figure out:
"function array_remove(integer[], numeric) does not exist".  So I've
contented myself with fixing these two cases.
2015-08-25 19:11:17 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
90a1d0aa76 doc: Whitespace and formatting fixes 2015-08-20 22:47:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
a93545e13f Remove xpath namespace-handling change from 9.5 release notes.
Although commit 79af9a1d2 was initially applied to HEAD only, we later
back-patched the change into all branches (commits 6bbf75192 et al).
So it's not a new behavior in 9.5 and should not be release-noted here.
2015-08-20 12:28:15 -04:00
Andres Freund
47ebbdcee7 docs: Fix "typo" introduced in 3f811c2d.
Reported-By: Michael Paquier
Discussion: CAB7nPqSco+RFw9C-VgbCpyurQB3OocS-fuTOa_gFnUy1EE-pyQ@mail.gmail.com
2015-08-17 11:51:52 +02:00
Tom Lane
522400a519 Add docs about postgres_fdw's setting of search_path and other GUCs.
This behavior wasn't documented, but it should be because it's user-visible
in triggers and other functions executed on the remote server.
Per question from Adam Fuchs.

Back-patch to 9.3 where postgres_fdw was added.
2015-08-15 14:31:04 -04:00
Tom Lane
5869cbfef4 Improve documentation about MVCC-unsafe utility commands.
The table-rewriting forms of ALTER TABLE are MVCC-unsafe, in much the same
way as TRUNCATE, because they replace all rows of the table with newly-made
rows with a new xmin.  (Ideally, concurrent transactions with old snapshots
would continue to see the old table contents, but the data is not there
anymore --- and if it were there, it would be inconsistent with the table's
updated rowtype, so there would be serious implementation problems to fix.)
This was nowhere documented though, and the problem was only documented for
TRUNCATE in a note in the TRUNCATE reference page.  Create a new "Caveats"
section in the MVCC chapter that can be home to this and other limitations
on serializable consistency.

In passing, fix a mistaken statement that VACUUM and CLUSTER would reclaim
space occupied by a dropped column.  They don't reconstruct existing tuples
so they couldn't do that.

Back-patch to all supported branches.
2015-08-15 13:30:16 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
845405a7d8 Update key words table for 9.5 2015-08-14 12:11:05 -04:00
Simon Riggs
47167b7907 Reduce lock levels for ALTER TABLE SET autovacuum storage options
Reduce lock levels down to ShareUpdateExclusiveLock for all autovacuum-related
relation options when setting them using ALTER TABLE.

Add infrastructure to allow varying lock levels for relation options in later
patches. Setting multiple options together uses the highest lock level required
for any option. Works for both main and toast tables.

Fabrízio Mello, reviewed by Michael Paquier, mild edit and additional regression
tests from myself
2015-08-14 14:19:28 +01:00
Tom Lane
750fc78bca Fix broken markup, and copy-edit a bit.
Fix docs build failure introduced by commit 6fcd88511f.
I failed to resist the temptation to rearrange the description of
pg_create_physical_replication_slot(), too.
2015-08-11 10:46:51 -04:00
Andres Freund
6fcd88511f Allow pg_create_physical_replication_slot() to reserve WAL.
When creating a physical slot it's often useful to immediately reserve
the current WAL position instead of only doing after the first feedback
message arrives. That e.g. allows slots to guarantee that all the WAL
for a base backup will be available afterwards.

Logical slots already have to reserve WAL during creation, so generalize
that logic into being usable for both physical and logical slots.

Catversion bump because of the new parameter.

Author: Gurjeet Singh
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund
Discussion: CABwTF4Wh_dBCzTU=49pFXR6coR4NW1ynb+vBqT+Po=7fuq5iCw@mail.gmail.com
2015-08-11 12:34:31 +02:00
Andres Freund
3f811c2d6f Add confirmed_flush column to pg_replication_slots.
There's no reason not to expose both restart_lsn and confirmed_flush
since they have rather distinct meanings. The former is the oldest WAL
still required and valid for both physical and logical slots, whereas
the latter is the location up to which a logical slot's consumer has
confirmed receiving data. Most of the time a slot will require older
WAL (i.e. restart_lsn) than the confirmed
position (i.e. confirmed_flush_lsn).

Author: Marko Tiikkaja, editorialized by me
Discussion: 559D110B.1020109@joh.to
2015-08-10 13:28:18 +02:00
Andres Freund
70fd0e14e8 Don't start to stream after pg_receivexlog --create-slot.
Immediately starting to stream after --create-slot is inconvenient in a
number of situations (e.g. when configuring a slot for use in
recovery.conf) and it's easy to just call pg_receivexlog twice in the
rest of the cases.

Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: CAB7nPqQ9qEtuDiKY3OpNzHcz5iUA+DUX9FcN9K8GUkCZvG7+Ew@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 9.5, where the option was introduced
2015-08-10 13:28:18 +02:00
Tom Lane
1e3e1ae266 Remove gram.y's precedence declaration for OVERLAPS.
The allowed syntax for OVERLAPS, viz "row OVERLAPS row", is sufficiently
constrained that we don't actually need a precedence declaration for
OVERLAPS; indeed removing this declaration does not change the generated
gram.c file at all.  Let's remove it to avoid confusion about whether
OVERLAPS has precedence or not.  If we ever generalize what we allow for
OVERLAPS, we might need to put back a precedence declaration for it,
but we might want some other level than what it has today --- and leaving
the declaration there would just risk confusion about whether that would
be an incompatible change.

Likewise, remove OVERLAPS from the documentation's precedence table.

Per discussion with Noah Misch.  Back-patch to 9.5 where we hacked up some
nearby precedence decisions.
2015-08-09 19:01:04 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
2a330d551c Fix typo in LDAP example
Reported by William Meitzen
2015-08-09 14:49:47 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
08c6178aa4 docs: fix typo in rules.sgml
Report by Dean Rasheed

Patch by Dean Rasheed

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-08 20:40:53 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
03249fe2c1 9.5 release notes: add increase buffer mapping partitions item
Report by Robert Haas, Andres Freund

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-08 13:38:31 -04:00
Andres Freund
18e8613564 Address points made in post-commit review of replication origins.
Amit reviewed the replication origins patch and made some good
points. Address them. This fixes typos in error messages, docs and
comments and adds a missing error check (although in a
should-never-happen scenario).

Discussion: CAA4eK1JqUBVeWWKwUmBPryFaje4190ug0y-OAUHWQ6tD83V4xg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 9.5, where replication origins were introduced.
2015-08-07 15:09:05 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
d6a8c943ab 9.5 release notes: updates from Andres Freund and Jeff Janes
Report by Andres Freund and Jeff Janes

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-06 22:33:44 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
58e09b9024 9.5 release notes: mention ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING for FDWs
Report by Peter Geoghegan

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-06 21:08:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c9351f03f3 9.5 release notes: mention change to CRC-32C
Report by Andres Freund

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-06 18:03:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c4318c4065 9.5 release notes: adjustments suggested by Andres Freund
Report by Andres Freund

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-06 17:34:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
68b5163b45 9.5 release notes: add non-LEAKPROOF view pushdown mention
Report by Dean Rasheed

Backpatch through 9.5
2015-08-06 16:07:33 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e641d7b22f docs: HTML-escape '>' in '=>' using HTML entities 2015-08-05 23:03:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
1b5d34ca62 Docs: add an explicit example about controlling overall greediness of REs.
Per discussion of bug #13538.
2015-08-04 21:09:12 -04:00
Tom Lane
ecc2d16bc9 Update 9.5 release notes through today. 2015-08-03 12:29:23 -04:00
Joe Conway
d6314b20cd Improve CREATE FUNCTION doc WRT to LEAKPROOF RLS interaction.
Patch by Dean Rasheed. Back-patched to 9.5 where RLS was introduced.
2015-07-30 10:16:36 -07:00
Andrew Dunstan
2cd40adb85 Add IF NOT EXISTS processing to ALTER TABLE ADD COLUMN
Fabrízio de Royes Mello, reviewed by Payal Singh, Alvaro Herrera and
Michael Paquier.
2015-07-29 21:30:00 -04:00
Robert Haas
38d4ce6b05 Flesh out the background worker documentation.
Make it more clear that bgw_main is usually not what you want.  Put the
background worker flags in a variablelist rather than having them as
part of a paragraph.  Explain important limits on how bgw_main_arg can
be used.

Craig Ringer, substantially revised by me.
2015-07-29 14:41:07 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
13d856e177 Make TAP tests work on Windows.
On Windows, use listen_address=127.0.0.1 to allow TCP connections. We were
already using "pg_regress --config-auth" to set up HBA appropriately. The
standard_initdb helper function now sets up the server's
unix_socket_directories or listen_addresses in the config file, so that
they don't need to be specified in the pg_ctl command line anymore. That
way, the pg_ctl invocations in test programs don't need to differ between
Windows and Unix.

Add another helper function to configure the server's pg_hba.conf to allow
replication connections. The configuration is done similarly to "pg_regress
--config-auth": trust on domain sockets on Unix, and SSPI authentication on
Windows.

Replace calls to "cat" and "touch" programs with built-in perl code, as
those programs don't normally exist on Windows.

Add instructions in the docs on how to install IPC::Run on Windows. Adjust
vcregress.pl to not replace PERL5LIB completely in vcregress.pl, because
otherwise cannot install IPC::Run in a non-standard location easily.

Michael Paquier, reviewed by Noah Misch, some additional tweaking by me.
2015-07-29 19:17:02 +03:00
Robert Haas
5f1066074c Document how to build the docs using the website style.
Craig Ringer
2015-07-29 11:18:32 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0dc848b031 pg_basebackup: Add --slot option
This option specifies a replication slot for WAL streaming (-X stream),
so that there can be continuous replication slot use between WAL
streaming during the base backup and the start of regular streaming
replication.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-07-28 20:31:35 -04:00
Joe Conway
f781a0f1d8 Create a pg_shdepend entry for each role in TO clause of policies.
CreatePolicy() and AlterPolicy() omit to create a pg_shdepend entry for
each role in the TO clause. Fix this by creating a new shared dependency
type called SHARED_DEPENDENCY_POLICY and assigning it to each role.

Reported by Noah Misch. Patch by me, reviewed by Alvaro Herrera.
Back-patch to 9.5 where RLS was introduced.
2015-07-28 16:01:53 -07:00
Tom Lane
8c72a7fab4 Update our documentation concerning where to create data directories.
Although initdb has long discouraged use of a filesystem mount-point
directory as a PG data directory, this point was covered nowhere in the
user-facing documentation.  Also, with the popularity of pg_upgrade,
we really need to recommend that the PG user own not only the data
directory but its parent directory too.  (Without a writable parent
directory, operations such as "mv data data.old" fail immediately.
pg_upgrade itself doesn't do that, but wrapper scripts for it often do.)

Hence, adjust the "Creating a Database Cluster" section to address
these points.  I also took the liberty of wordsmithing the discussion
of NFS a bit.

These considerations aren't by any means new, so back-patch to all
supported branches.
2015-07-28 18:43:30 -04:00
Joe Conway
7b4bfc87d5 Plug RLS related information leak in pg_stats view.
The pg_stats view is supposed to be restricted to only show rows
about tables the user can read. However, it sometimes can leak
information which could not otherwise be seen when row level security
is enabled. Fix that by not showing pg_stats rows to users that would
be subject to RLS on the table the row is related to. This is done
by creating/using the newly introduced SQL visible function,
row_security_active().

Along the way, clean up three call sites of check_enable_rls(). The second
argument of that function should only be specified as other than
InvalidOid when we are checking as a different user than the current one,
as in when querying through a view. These sites were passing GetUserId()
instead of InvalidOid, which can cause the function to return incorrect
results if the current user has the BYPASSRLS privilege and row_security
has been set to OFF.

Additionally fix a bug causing RI Trigger error messages to unintentionally
leak information when RLS is enabled, and other minor cleanup and
improvements. Also add WITH (security_barrier) to the definition of pg_stats.

Bumped CATVERSION due to new SQL functions and pg_stats view definition.

Back-patch to 9.5 where RLS was introduced. Reported by Yaroslav.
Patch by Joe Conway and Dean Rasheed with review and input by
Michael Paquier and Stephen Frost.
2015-07-28 13:21:22 -07:00
Andres Freund
426746b930 Remove ssl renegotiation support.
While postgres' use of SSL renegotiation is a good idea in theory, it
turned out to not work well in practice. The specification and openssl's
implementation of it have lead to several security issues. Postgres' use
of renegotiation also had its share of bugs.

Additionally OpenSSL has a bunch of bugs around renegotiation, reported
and open for years, that regularly lead to connections breaking with
obscure error messages. We tried increasingly complex workarounds to get
around these bugs, but we didn't find anything complete.

Since these connection breakages often lead to hard to debug problems,
e.g. spuriously failing base backups and significant latency spikes when
synchronous replication is used, we have decided to change the default
setting for ssl renegotiation to 0 (disabled) in the released
backbranches and remove it entirely in 9.5 and master.

Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: 20150624144148.GQ4797@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: 9.5 and master, 9.0-9.4 get a different patch
2015-07-28 22:06:31 +02:00
Joe Conway
cf80ddee57 Improve markup for row_security.
Wrap the literals on, off, force, and BYPASSRLS with appropriate
markup. Per Kevin Grittner.
2015-07-25 17:46:04 -07:00
Tom Lane
dd7a8f66ed Redesign tablesample method API, and do extensive code review.
The original implementation of TABLESAMPLE modeled the tablesample method
API on index access methods, which wasn't a good choice because, without
specialized DDL commands, there's no way to build an extension that can
implement a TSM.  (Raw inserts into system catalogs are not an acceptable
thing to do, because we can't undo them during DROP EXTENSION, nor will
pg_upgrade behave sanely.)  Instead adopt an API more like procedural
language handlers or foreign data wrappers, wherein the only SQL-level
support object needed is a single handler function identified by having
a special return type.  This lets us get rid of the supporting catalog
altogether, so that no custom DDL support is needed for the feature.

Adjust the API so that it can support non-constant tablesample arguments
(the original coding assumed we could evaluate the argument expressions at
ExecInitSampleScan time, which is undesirable even if it weren't outright
unsafe), and discourage sampling methods from looking at invisible tuples.
Make sure that the BERNOULLI and SYSTEM methods are genuinely repeatable
within and across queries, as required by the SQL standard, and deal more
honestly with methods that can't support that requirement.

Make a full code-review pass over the tablesample additions, and fix
assorted bugs, omissions, infelicities, and cosmetic issues (such as
failure to put the added code stanzas in a consistent ordering).
Improve EXPLAIN's output of tablesample plans, too.

Back-patch to 9.5 so that we don't have to support the original API
in production.
2015-07-25 14:39:00 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
8d90736924 Improve BRIN documentation somewhat
This removes some info about support procedures being used, which was
obsoleted by commit db5f98ab4f, as well as add some more documentation
on how to create new opclasses using the Minmax infrastructure.
(Hopefully we can get something similar for Inclusion as well.)

In passing, fix some obsolete mentions of "mmtuples" in source code
comments.

Backpatch to 9.5, where BRIN was introduced.
2015-07-20 12:16:40 +02:00
Andrew Dunstan
4738650485 Release note compatibility item
Note that json and jsonb extraction operators no longer consider a
negative subscript to be invalid.
2015-07-17 21:14:14 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
e02d44b8a7 Support JSON negative array subscripts everywhere
Previously, there was an inconsistency across json/jsonb operators that
operate on datums containing JSON arrays -- only some operators
supported negative array count-from-the-end subscripting.  Specifically,
only a new-to-9.5 jsonb deletion operator had support (the new "jsonb -
integer" operator).  This inconsistency seemed likely to be
counter-intuitive to users.  To fix, allow all places where the user can
supply an integer subscript to accept a negative subscript value,
including path-orientated operators and functions, as well as other
extraction operators.  This will need to be called out as an
incompatibility in the 9.5 release notes, since it's possible that users
are relying on certain established extraction operators changed here
yielding NULL in the event of a negative subscript.

For the json type, this requires adding a way of cheaply getting the
total JSON array element count ahead of time when parsing arrays with a
negative subscript involved, necessitating an ad-hoc lex and parse.
This is followed by a "conversion" from a negative subscript to its
equivalent positive-wise value using the count.  From there on, it's as
if a positive-wise value was originally provided.

Note that there is still a minor inconsistency here across jsonb
deletion operators.  Unlike the aforementioned new "-" deletion operator
that accepts an integer on its right hand side, the new "#-" path
orientated deletion variant does not throw an error when it appears like
an array subscript (input that could be recognized by as an integer
literal) is being used on an object, which is wrong-headed.  The reason
for not being stricter is that it could be the case that an object pair
happens to have a key value that looks like an integer; in general,
these two possibilities are impossible to differentiate with rhs path
text[] argument elements.  However, we still don't allow the "#-"
path-orientated deletion operator to perform array-style subscripting.
Rather, we just return the original left operand value in the event of a
negative subscript (which seems analogous to how the established
"jsonb/json #> text[]" path-orientated operator may yield NULL in the
event of an invalid subscript).

In passing, make SetArrayPath() stricter about not accepting cases where
there is trailing non-numeric garbage bytes rather than a clean NUL
byte.  This means, for example, that strings like "10e10" are now not
accepted as an array subscript of 10 by some new-to-9.5 path-orientated
jsonb operators (e.g. the new #- operator).  Finally, remove dead code
for jsonb subscript deletion; arguably, this should have been done in
commit b81c7b409.

Peter Geoghegan and Andrew Dunstan
2015-07-17 21:13:47 -04:00
Robert Haas
a04bb65f70 Add new function pg_notification_queue_usage.
This tells you what fraction of NOTIFY's queue is currently filled.

Brendan Jurd, reviewed by Merlin Moncure and Gurjeet Singh.  A few
further tweaks by me.
2015-07-17 09:12:03 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
b1b6671722 Mention table_rewrite as valid event trigger tag
This was forgotten in 618c9430a8.
2015-07-15 17:10:54 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
321eed5f0f Add ALTER OPERATOR command, for changing selectivity estimator functions.
Other options cannot be changed, as it's not totally clear if cached plans
would need to be invalidated if one of the other options change. Selectivity
estimator functions only change plan costs, not correctness of plans, so
those should be safe.

Original patch by Uriy Zhuravlev, heavily edited by me.
2015-07-14 18:17:55 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
716f97f966 release notes: markup: vacuumdb is an application, not command 2015-07-12 17:42:04 -04:00
Andres Freund
ff27db5dd2 Optionally don't error out due to preexisting slots in commandline utilities.
pg_receivexlog and pg_recvlogical error out when --create-slot is
specified and a slot with the same name already exists. In some cases,
especially with pg_receivexlog, that's rather annoying and requires
additional scripting.

Backpatch to 9.5 as slot control functions have newly been added to
pg_receivexlog, and there doesn't seem much point leaving it in a less
useful state.

Discussion: 20150619144755.GG29350@alap3.anarazel.de
2015-07-12 22:15:20 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
57057e2124 doc: fix typo in CREATE POLICY manual page
Backpatch through 9.5
2015-07-11 22:46:28 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
cba045b0bd Copy-edit the docs changes of OWNER TO CURRENT/SESSION_USER additions.
Commit 31eae602 added new syntax to many DDL commands to use CURRENT_USER
or SESSION_USER instead of role name in ALTER ... OWNER TO, but because
of a misplaced '{', the syntax in the docs implied that the syntax was
"ALTER ... CURRENT_USER", instead of "ALTER ... OWNER TO CURRENT_USER".
Fix that, and also the funny indentation in some of the modified syntax
blurps.
2015-07-10 14:39:29 +03:00
Tom Lane
e4f29ce323 Improve documentation about array concat operator vs. underlying functions.
The documentation implied that there was seldom any reason to use the
array_append, array_prepend, and array_cat functions directly.  But that's
not really true, because they can help make it clear which case is meant,
which the || operator can't do since it's overloaded to represent all three
cases.  Add some discussion and examples illustrating the potentially
confusing behavior that can ensue if the parser misinterprets what was
meant.

Per a complaint from Michael Herold.  Back-patch to 9.2, which is where ||
started to behave this way.
2015-07-09 18:50:31 -04:00
Fujii Masao
c2e5f4d1c1 Make wal_compression PGC_SUSET rather than PGC_USERSET.
When enabling wal_compression, there is a risk to leak data similarly to
the BREACH and CRIME attacks on SSL where the compression ratio of
a full page image gives a hint of what is the existing data of this page.
This vulnerability is quite cumbersome to exploit in practice, but doable.

So this patch makes wal_compression PGC_SUSET in order to prevent
non-superusers from enabling it and exploiting the vulnerability while
DBA thinks the risk very seriously and disables it in postgresql.conf.

Back-patch to 9.5 where wal_compression was introduced.
2015-07-09 22:30:52 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
aaec6a6d37 Fix another broken link in documentation.
Tom fixed another one of these in commit 7f32dbcd, but there was another
almost identical one in libpq docs. Per his comment:

HP's web server has apparently become case-sensitive sometime recently.
Per bug #13479 from Daniel Abraham.  Corrected link identified by Alvaro.
2015-07-09 16:03:06 +03:00
Andres Freund
4af04f96bc Refer to %p in the psql docs as 'process ID' not 'pid'.
Per Tom.
2015-07-07 16:23:55 +02:00
Andres Freund
275f05c990 Add psql PROMPT variable showing the pid of the connected to backend.
The substitution for the pid is %p.

Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: 116262CF971C844FB6E793F8809B51C6E99D48@BPXM02GP.gisp.nec.co.jp
2015-07-07 13:40:44 +02:00
Fujii Masao
906e924949 Remove incorrect warning from pg_archivecleanup document.
The .backup file name can be passed to pg_archivecleanup even if
it includes the extension which is specified in -x option.
However, previously the document incorrectly warned a user
not to do that.

Back-patch to 9.2 where pg_archivecleanup's -x option and
the warning were added.
2015-07-06 20:58:58 +09:00
Tom Lane
252404625a Fix bad grammar in brin.sgml.
Christoph Berg
2015-07-05 12:08:15 -04:00
Tom Lane
5e7c3d91bf Add documentation and regression tests concerning rounding of numerics.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
2015-07-03 17:04:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
8eb6407aae Add psql \ev and \sv commands for editing and showing view definitions.
These are basically just like the \ef and \sf commands for functions.

Petr Korobeinikov, reviewed by Jeevan Chalke, some changes by me
2015-07-03 15:48:18 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ba3deeefb0 Lift the limitation that # of clients must be a multiple of # of threads
Fabien Coelho
2015-07-03 10:45:40 +03:00
Fujii Masao
8650d161ae Make WAL-related utilities handle .partial WAL files properly.
Commit de76884 changed an archive recovery so that the last WAL
segment with old timeline was renamed with suffix .partial. It should
have updated WAL-related utilities so that they can handle such
.paritial WAL files, but we forgot that.

This patch changes pg_archivecleanup so that it can clean up even
archived WAL files with .partial suffix. Also it allows us to specify
.partial WAL file name as the command-line argument "oldestkeptwalfile".

This patch also changes pg_resetxlog so that it can remove .partial
WAL files in pg_xlog directory.

pg_xlogdump cannot handle .partial WAL files. Per discussion,
we decided only to document that limitation instead of adding the fix.
Because a user can easily work around the limitation (i.e., just remove
.partial suffix from the file name) and the fix seems complicated for
very narrow use case.

Back-patch to 9.5 where the problem existed.

Review by Michael Paquier.
Discussion: http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAHGQGwGxMKnVHGgTfiig2Bt_2djec0in3-DLJmtg7+nEiidFdQ@mail.gmail.com
2015-07-03 11:53:58 +09:00
Tom Lane
5671aaca87 Improve pg_restore's -t switch to match all types of relations.
-t will now match views, foreign tables, materialized views, and sequences,
not only plain tables.  This is more useful, and also more consistent with
the behavior of pg_dump's -t switch, which has always matched all relation
types.

We're still not there on matching pg_dump's behavior entirely, so mention
that in the docs.

Craig Ringer, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2015-07-02 18:13:34 -04:00
Tom Lane
10fb48d66d Add an optional missing_ok argument to SQL function current_setting().
This allows convenient checking for existence of a GUC from SQL, which is
particularly useful when dealing with custom variables.

David Christensen, reviewed by Jeevan Chalke
2015-07-02 16:41:07 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
5b1b6bf49b Use American spelling for "behavior".
For consistency with the rest of the docs.

Michael Paquier
2015-07-02 12:15:09 +03:00
Tom Lane
7f32dbcd73 Fix broken link in documentation.
HP's web server has apparently become case-sensitive sometime recently.
Per bug #13479 from Daniel Abraham.  Corrected link identified by Alvaro.
2015-06-30 18:47:32 -04:00
Andres Freund
1561b541fd Fix typo and omission in my earlier 9.5 release notes commit. 2015-06-30 21:09:51 +02:00
Andres Freund
c0b0501925 Improve 9.5 release notes.
1) Add sgml comments referencing commits. This is useful to search for
   missing items etc.

   The comments containing the commit notes are an excerpt from:
   git log --date=short \
       --pretty='format:%cd [%h] %<(8,trunc)%cN: %<(48,trunc)%s%n%n%w(,4,4)%b%n' \
       $(git merge-base origin/master upstream/REL9_4_STABLE)..origin/master
2) Improve a handful of existing notes
3) Add missing entries about a couple features.
4) Add a bunch of straight-forward FIXMEs
2015-06-30 21:00:12 +02:00
Tom Lane
cf8d65de10 Stamp HEAD as 9.6devel.
Let the hacking begin ...
2015-06-30 14:01:15 -04:00
Tom Lane
f78329d594 Stamp 9.5alpha1. 2015-06-29 15:42:18 -04:00
Tom Lane
85c25fdbd7 Desultory review of 9.5 release notes.
Minor corrections and clarifications.  Notably, for stuff that got moved
out of contrib, make sure it's documented somewhere other than "Additional
Modules".

I'm sure these need more work, but that's all I have time for today.
2015-06-29 15:38:46 -04:00
Tom Lane
cbc8d65639 Code + docs review for escaping of option values (commit 11a020eb6).
Avoid memory leak from incorrect choice of how to free a StringInfo
(resetStringInfo doesn't do it).  Now that pg_split_opts doesn't scribble
on the optstr, mark that as "const" for clarity.  Attach the commentary in
protocol.sgml to the right place, and add documentation about the
user-visible effects of this change on postgres' -o option and libpq's
PGOPTIONS option.
2015-06-29 12:42:52 -04:00
Tom Lane
62d16c7fc5 Improve design and implementation of pg_file_settings view.
As first committed, this view reported on the file contents as they were
at the last SIGHUP event.  That's not as useful as reporting on the current
contents, and what's more, it didn't work right on Windows unless the
current session had serviced at least one SIGHUP.  Therefore, arrange to
re-read the files when pg_show_all_settings() is called.  This requires
only minor refactoring so that we can pass changeVal = false to
set_config_option() so that it won't actually apply any changes locally.

In addition, add error reporting so that errors that would prevent the
configuration files from being loaded, or would prevent individual settings
from being applied, are visible directly in the view.  This makes the view
usable for pre-testing whether edits made in the config files will have the
desired effect, before one actually issues a SIGHUP.

I also added an "applied" column so that it's easy to identify entries that
are superseded by later entries; this was the main use-case for the original
design, but it seemed unnecessarily hard to use for that.

Also fix a 9.4.1 regression that allowed multiple entries for a
PGC_POSTMASTER variable to cause bogus complaints in the postmaster log.
(The issue here was that commit bf007a27ac unintentionally reverted
3e3f65973a, which suppressed any duplicate entries within
ParseConfigFp.  However, since the original coding of the pg_file_settings
view depended on such suppression *not* happening, we couldn't have fixed
this issue now without first doing something with pg_file_settings.
Now we suppress duplicates by marking them "ignored" within
ProcessConfigFileInternal, which doesn't hide them in the view.)

Lesser changes include:

Drive the view directly off the ConfigVariable list, instead of making a
basically-equivalent second copy of the data.  There's no longer any need
to hang onto the data permanently, anyway.

Convert show_all_file_settings() to do its work in one call and return a
tuplestore; this avoids risks associated with assuming that the GUC state
will hold still over the course of query execution.  (I think there were
probably latent bugs here, though you might need something like a cursor
on the view to expose them.)

Arrange to run SIGHUP processing in a short-lived memory context, to
forestall process-lifespan memory leaks.  (There is one known leak in this
code, in ProcessConfigDirectory; it seems minor enough to not be worth
back-patching a specific fix for.)

Remove mistaken assignment to ConfigFileLineno that caused line counting
after an include_dir directive to be completely wrong.

Add missed failure check in AlterSystemSetConfigFile().  We don't really
expect ParseConfigFp() to fail, but that's not an excuse for not checking.
2015-06-28 18:06:14 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
d661532e27 Also trigger restartpoints based on max_wal_size on standby.
When archive recovery and restartpoints were initially introduced,
checkpoint_segments was ignored on the grounds that the files restored from
archive don't consume any space in the recovery server. That was changed in
later releases, but even then it was arguably a feature rather than a bug,
as performing restartpoints as often as checkpoints during normal operation
might be excessive, but you might nevertheless not want to waste a lot of
space for pre-allocated WAL by setting checkpoint_segments to a high value.
But now that we have separate min_wal_size and max_wal_size settings, you
can bound WAL usage with max_wal_size, and still avoid consuming excessive
space usage by setting min_wal_size to a lower value, so that argument is
moot.

There are still some issues with actually limiting the space usage to
max_wal_size: restartpoints in recovery can only start after seeing the
checkpoint record, while a checkpoint starts flushing buffers as soon as
the redo-pointer is set. Restartpoint is paced to happen at the same
leisurily speed, determined by checkpoint_completion_target, as checkpoints,
but because they are started later, max_wal_size can be exceeded by upto
one checkpoint cycle's worth of WAL, depending on
checkpoint_completion_target. But that seems better than not trying at all,
and max_wal_size is a soft limit anyway.

The documentation already claimed that max_wal_size is obeyed in recovery,
so this just fixes the behaviour to match the docs. However, add some
weasel-words there to mention that max_wal_size may well be exceeded by
some amount in recovery.
2015-06-29 00:09:10 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
6ab4d38ab0 Fix markup in docs.
Oops. I could swear I built the docs before pushing, but I guess not..
2015-06-29 00:01:26 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
cb2acb1081 Add missing_ok option to the SQL functions for reading files.
This makes it possible to use the functions without getting errors, if there
is a chance that the file might be removed or renamed concurrently.
pg_rewind needs to do just that, although this could be useful for other
purposes too. (The changes to pg_rewind to use these functions will come in
a separate commit.)

The read_binary_file() function isn't very well-suited for extensions.c's
purposes anymore, if it ever was. So bite the bullet and make a copy of it
in extension.c, tailored for that use case. This seems better than the
accidental code reuse, even if it's a some more lines of code.

Michael Paquier, with plenty of kibitzing by me.
2015-06-28 21:35:46 +03:00
Robert Haas
7c02d48e69 Fix grammar.
Reported by Peter Geoghegan.
2015-06-26 16:04:46 -04:00
Robert Haas
c66bc72e8a release notes: Add entry for commit 5ea86e6e6.
Peter Geoghegan and Robert Haas
2015-06-26 14:49:37 -04:00
Robert Haas
31c018ecda release notes: Combine items for pg_upgrade and pg_upgrade_support moves.
Per suggestions from Amit Langote and Álvaro Herrera.
2015-06-26 14:20:29 -04:00
Robert Haas
5ca611841b Improve handling of CustomPath/CustomPlan(State) children.
Allow CustomPath to have a list of paths, CustomPlan a list of plans,
and CustomPlanState a list of planstates known to the core system, so
that custom path/plan providers can more reasonably use this
infrastructure for nodes with multiple children.

KaiGai Kohei, per a design suggestion from Tom Lane, with some
further kibitzing by me.
2015-06-26 09:40:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
d759b7eb6a Docs: fix claim that to_char('FM') removes trailing zeroes.
Of course, what it removes is leading zeroes.  Seems to have been a thinko
in commit ffe92d15d5.  Noted by Hubert Depesz
Lubaczewski.
2015-06-25 10:44:03 -04:00
Fujii Masao
0b157a0dad Add index terms for functions jsonb_set and jsonb_pretty. 2015-06-24 22:30:19 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
1443a165db Fix BRIN supported operators table
Some of the entries in the inclusion opclasses where missing operators,
and we had an entry for inet_inclusion_ops instead of
network_inclusion_ops.  Sort the operators within each opclass by
strategy number, just to make it easier to spot mistakes.

Also sort the rows by data type name, rather than OID.
2015-06-20 12:26:36 -03:00
Tom Lane
48913db887 In immediate shutdown, postmaster should not exit till children are gone.
This adjusts commit 82233ce7ea so that the
postmaster does not exit until all its child processes have exited, even
if the 5-second timeout elapses and we have to send SIGKILL.  There is no
great value in having the postmaster process quit sooner, and doing so can
mislead onlookers into thinking that the cluster is fully terminated when
actually some child processes still survive.

This effect might explain recent test failures on buildfarm member hamster,
wherein we failed to restart a cluster just after shutting it down with
"pg_ctl stop -m immediate".

I also did a bit of code review/beautification, including fixing a faulty
use of the Max() macro on a volatile expression.

Back-patch to 9.4.  In older branches, the postmaster never waited for
children to exit during immediate shutdowns, and changing that would be
too much of a behavioral change.
2015-06-19 14:23:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2bed1cd751 release notes: fix Petr's name typos
Report by Alvaro Herrera
2015-06-14 13:41:37 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a85054181b doc: Add note to pg_dump man page about pg_dumpall
suggested by Joshua Drake
2015-06-13 21:45:56 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
340c74dfdf Remove stray character 2015-06-13 21:41:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
74cb688525 release notes: consistently name "Alexander Shulgin"
Report by Alvaro Herrera
2015-06-13 21:10:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
62331ef3f6 release notes: move/remove/adjust items
Report by Alvaro Herrera
2015-06-13 21:07:24 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
305f815ccd release notes: add accent to Petr Jelínek last name
Report by Alvaro Herrera
2015-06-13 21:00:30 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
31cda8bf3c release notes: remove mention of pg_basebackup non-compat
Report by Amit Kapila
2015-06-13 20:56:30 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
29d80d5fa8 release notes: add Petr Jelinek to JSON function item
Report by Petr Jelinek
2015-06-12 22:34:31 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
230ff9383c release notes: fixes from Fujii Masao
Report by Fujii Masao
2015-06-12 22:31:17 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
644ac3e678 release notes: reorder hash performance authors, again
Report by Robert Haas
2015-06-12 22:25:30 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
51b47c5c09 release notes: reorder sort performance authors
Report by Peter Geoghegan
2015-06-12 22:23:40 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8bf51ad0cc release notes: split apart hash items
Report by Tom Lane, Robert Haas
2015-06-12 22:16:08 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
89fe9bfc4e release notes: add two optimizer items
Report by Tom Lane
2015-06-12 21:47:49 -04:00
Fujii Masao
091c02a958 Fix alphabetization in catalogs.sgml.
System catalogs and views should be listed alphabetically
in catalog.sgml, but only pg_file_settings view not.

This patch also fixes typos in pg_file_settings comments.
2015-06-12 12:59:29 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
66447916f7 release notes: add links to doc sections 2015-06-11 23:04:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
778fed04cd release notes: update hash item
Report by Tomas Vondra
2015-06-11 11:32:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7b7be78a12 release notes: move pg_buffercache item to the right section
Report by Amit Langote
2015-06-11 11:13:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
bab74070b3 release notes: implement suggestions
Report by Michael Paquier
2015-06-11 11:11:43 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1cc9f8ccd9 release notes: explain meaning of pg_stat_get_snapshot_timestamp()
Report by Michael Paquier
2015-06-11 10:58:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5a4ea8e200 release notes: update for pg_basebackup in tar format
Report by Amit Kapila
2015-06-11 10:51:39 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
908e234733 Rename jsonb - text[] operator to #- to avoid ambiguity.
Following recent discussion  on -hackers. The underlying function is
also renamed to jsonb_delete_path. The regression tests now don't need
ugly type casts to avoid the ambiguity, so they are also removed.

Catalog version bumped.
2015-06-11 10:06:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
aacb8b9277 First draft of 9.5 release notes 2015-06-11 00:09:32 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e80f619acf doc: Use "connections" instead of "slots" to avoid confusion
The text was written before replication slots existed, but now "slot" is
best not used for anything else in the space of replication.
2015-06-10 21:34:03 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
28d17269a1 doc: Fix typo 2015-06-10 21:33:35 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
75a49ba550 doc: Call xmllint for validity also in the fop build
This was somehow missed in commit
5d93ce2d0c.
2015-06-10 19:54:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1e87d4d068 docs: update release note regex suggestions 2015-06-10 16:34:01 -04:00
Tom Lane
b94085920b Release notes for 9.4.4, 9.3.9, 9.2.13, 9.1.18, 9.0.22. 2015-06-09 14:33:43 -04:00
Tom Lane
21187cfc7d First-draft release notes for 9.4.4, 9.3.9, 9.2.13, 9.1.18, 9.0.22. 2015-06-09 13:07:15 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
94232c909d Fix typos
tablesapce -> tablespace
there -> their

These were introduced in 72d422a52, so no need to backpatch.
2015-06-08 15:37:42 -03:00
Andrew Dunstan
94d6727dbe Clarify documentation of jsonb - text
Peter Geoghegan
2015-06-07 21:31:52 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
b81c7b4098 Desupport jsonb subscript deletion on objects
Supporting deletion of JSON pairs within jsonb objects using an
array-style integer subscript allowed for surprising outcomes.  This was
mostly due to the implementation-defined ordering of pairs within
objects for jsonb.

It also seems desirable to make jsonb integer subscript deletion
consistent with the 9.4 era general purpose integer subscripting
operator for jsonb (although that operator returns NULL when an object
is encountered, while we prefer here to throw an error).

Peter Geoghegan, following discussion on -hackers.
2015-06-07 20:46:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
d23a3a603b doc: Fix broken links in FOP build
FOP doesn't handle links to table rows, so put the link to a cell
instead.
2015-06-07 20:27:27 -04:00
Robert Haas
99cfd5e136 doc: Session identifiers truncate, not round, the backend start time.
Joel Jacobson
2015-06-04 17:57:39 -04:00
Robert Haas
1c645da8eb docs: Fix list of object types pg_table_is_visible() can handle.
Materialized views and foreign tables were missing from the list,
probably because they are newer than the other object types that were
mentioned.

Etsuro Fujita
2015-06-04 17:48:00 -04:00
Fujii Masao
232cd63b1f Remove -i/--ignore-version option from pg_dump, pg_dumpall and pg_restore.
The commit c22ed3d523 turned
the -i/--ignore-version options into no-ops and marked as deprecated.
Considering we shipped that in 8.4, it's time to remove all trace of
those switches, per discussion. We'd still have to wait a couple releases
before it'd be safe to use -i for something else, but it'd be a start.
2015-06-04 19:54:43 +09:00
Fujii Masao
38d500ac2e Fix some issues in pg_class.relminmxid and pg_database.datminmxid documentation.
- Correct the name of directory which those catalog columns allow to be shrunk.
- Correct the name of symbol which is used as the value of pg_class.relminmxid
  when the relation is not a table.
- Fix "ID ID" typo.

Backpatch to 9.3 where those cataog columns were introduced.
2015-06-04 13:22:49 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
afae1f7854 doc: Fix PDF build with FOP
Because of a bug in the DocBook XSL FO style sheet, an xref to a
varlistentry whose term includes an indexterm fails to build.  One such
instance was introduced in commit
5086dfceba.  Fix by adding the upstream
bug fix to our customization layer.
2015-06-03 20:19:47 -04:00
Fujii Masao
37013621f3 Minor improvement to txid_current() documentation.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Christoph Berg and Naoya Anzai
2015-06-03 12:12:48 +09:00
Tom Lane
82ec7d2821 Release notes for 9.4.3, 9.3.8, 9.2.12, 9.1.17, 9.0.21.
Also sneak entries for commits 97ff2a564 et al into the sections for
the previous releases in the relevant branches.  Those fixes did go out
in the previous releases, but missed getting documented.
2015-06-01 13:27:43 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
37def42245 Rename jsonb_replace to jsonb_set and allow it to add new values
The function is given a fourth parameter, which defaults to true. When
this parameter is true, if the last element of the path is missing
in the original json, jsonb_set creates it in the result and assigns it
the new value. If it is false then the function does nothing unless all
elements of the path are present, including the last.

Based on some original code from Dmitry Dolgov, heavily modified by me.

Catalog version bumped.
2015-05-31 20:34:10 -04:00
Stephen Frost
d5442cb243 Remove *pgaudit* references also.
Fixes the docs build.
2015-05-28 13:02:09 -04:00
Stephen Frost
cde9cf170c Finish removing pg_audit 2015-05-28 12:48:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
e70ec8230a Explain CHECK constraint handling in postgres_fdw's IMPORT FOREIGN SCHEMA.
The existing documentation could easily be misinterpreted, and it failed to
explain the inconsistent-evaluation hazard that deterred us from supporting
automatic importing of check constraints.  Revise it.

Etsuro Fujita, further expanded by me
2015-05-25 14:13:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
91e79260f6 Remove no-longer-required function declarations.
Remove a bunch of "extern Datum foo(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);" declarations that
are no longer needed now that PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(foo) provides that.

Some of these were evidently missed in commit e7128e8dbb, but others
were cargo-culted in in code added since then.  Possibly that can be blamed
in part on the fact that we'd not fixed relevant documentation examples,
which I've now done.
2015-05-24 12:20:23 -04:00
Tom Lane
821b821a24 Still more fixes for lossy-GiST-distance-functions patch.
Fix confusion in documentation, substantial memory leakage if float8 or
float4 are pass-by-reference, and assorted comments that were obsoleted
by commit 98edd617f3.
2015-05-23 15:22:25 -04:00
Andres Freund
631d749007 Remove the new UPSERT command tag and use INSERT instead.
Previously, INSERT with ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE specified used a new
command tag -- UPSERT.  It was introduced out of concern that INSERT as
a command tag would be a misrepresentation for ON CONFLICT DO UPDATE, as
some affected rows may actually have been updated.

Alvaro Herrera noticed that the implementation of that new command tag
was incomplete; in subsequent discussion we concluded that having it
doesn't provide benefits that are in line with the compatibility breaks
it requires.

Catversion bump due to the removal of PlannedStmt->isUpsert.

Author: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: 20150520215816.GI5885@postgresql.org
2015-05-23 00:58:45 +02:00
Fujii Masao
6d1733fa90 Minor enhancement of readability of ALTER TABLE syntax in the doc.
Fabrízio Mello
2015-05-22 21:42:15 +09:00
Robert Haas
160a9aaabf Correct two mistakes in the ALTER FOREIGN TABLE reference page.
Etsuro Fujita
2015-05-21 11:16:33 -04:00
Fujii Masao
cad3708960 Correct the names of pgstattuple_approx output columns in the doc. 2015-05-21 20:51:52 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
4fc72cc7bb Collection of typo fixes.
Use "a" and "an" correctly, mostly in comments. Two error messages were
also fixed (they were just elogs, so no translation work required). Two
function comments in pg_proc.h were also fixed. Etsuro Fujita reported one
of these, but I found a lot more with grep.

Also fix a few other typos spotted while grepping for the a/an typos.
For example, "consists out of ..." -> "consists of ...". Plus a "though"/
"through" mixup reported by Euler Taveira.

Many of these typos were in old code, which would be nice to backpatch to
make future backpatching easier. But much of the code was new, and I didn't
feel like crafting separate patches for each branch. So no backpatching.
2015-05-20 16:56:22 +03:00
Tom Lane
5cb8519ceb Last-minute updates for release notes.
Revise description of CVE-2015-3166, in line with scaled-back patch.
Change release date.

Security: CVE-2015-3166
2015-05-19 18:33:58 -04:00
Tom Lane
afee04352b Revert "Change pg_seclabel.provider and pg_shseclabel.provider to type "name"."
This reverts commit b82a7be603.  There
is a better (less invasive) way to fix it, which I will commit next.
2015-05-19 10:40:04 -04:00
Tom Lane
b82a7be603 Change pg_seclabel.provider and pg_shseclabel.provider to type "name".
These were "text", but that's a bad idea because it has collation-dependent
ordering.  No index in template0 should have collation-dependent ordering,
especially not indexes on shared catalogs.  There was general agreement
that provider names don't need to be longer than other identifiers, so we
can fix this at a small waste of table space by changing from text to name.

There's no way to fix the problem in the back branches, but we can hope
that security labels don't yet have widespread-enough usage to make it
urgent to fix.

There needs to be a regression sanity test to prevent us from making this
same mistake again; but before putting that in, we'll need to get rid of
similar brain fade in the recently-added pg_replication_origin catalog.

Note: for lack of a suitable testing environment, I've not really exercised
this change.  I trust the buildfarm will show up any mistakes.
2015-05-18 20:07:53 -04:00
Tom Lane
19d47ed2da Last-minute updates for release notes.
Add entries for security issues.

Security: CVE-2015-3165 through CVE-2015-3167
2015-05-18 12:09:02 -04:00
Noah Misch
85270ac7a2 pgcrypto: Report errant decryption as "Wrong key or corrupt data".
This has been the predominant outcome.  When the output of decrypting
with a wrong key coincidentally resembled an OpenPGP packet header,
pgcrypto could instead report "Corrupt data", "Not text data" or
"Unsupported compression algorithm".  The distinct "Corrupt data"
message added no value.  The latter two error messages misled when the
decrypted payload also exhibited fundamental integrity problems.  Worse,
error message variance in other systems has enabled cryptologic attacks;
see RFC 4880 section "14. Security Considerations".  Whether these
pgcrypto behaviors are likewise exploitable is unknown.

In passing, document that pgcrypto does not resist side-channel attacks.
Back-patch to 9.0 (all supported versions).

Security: CVE-2015-3167
2015-05-18 10:02:31 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
4df1328950 Put back stats-collector restarting code, removed accidentally.
Removed that code snippet accidentally in the archive_mode='always' patch.

Also, use varname-tags for archive_command in the docs.

Fujii Masao
2015-05-18 10:20:30 +03:00
Fujii Masao
d773b55713 Don't classify REINDEX command as DDL in the pg_audit doc.
The commit a936743 changed the class of REINDEX but forgot to update the doc.
2015-05-18 14:55:07 +09:00
Tom Lane
a0891d2d01 Release notes for 9.4.2, 9.3.7, 9.2.11, 9.1.16, 9.0.20. 2015-05-17 15:54:20 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
de6109b8cc Fix wording error caused by recent typo fixes
It wasn't just a typo, but bad wording. This should make it
more clear. Pointed out by Tom Lane.
2015-05-17 19:07:36 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
3b075e9d7b Fix typos in comments
Dmitriy Olshevskiy
2015-05-17 14:58:04 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
6b665454e3 Minor docs fixes for pg_audit
Peter Geoghegan
2015-05-17 11:07:19 +02:00
Tom Lane
0563b4c0c3 First-draft release notes for 9.4.2 et al.
As usual, the release notes for older branches will be made by cutting
these down, but put them up for community review first.
2015-05-16 18:09:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
c65aa7a87e Fix docs typo
I don't think "respectfully" is what was meant here ...
2015-05-16 13:28:26 -04:00
Simon Riggs
f941d03329 Add docs for tablesample system_time() 2015-05-15 21:54:18 -04:00
Andres Freund
f3d3118532 Support GROUPING SETS, CUBE and ROLLUP.
This SQL standard functionality allows to aggregate data by different
GROUP BY clauses at once. Each grouping set returns rows with columns
grouped by in other sets set to NULL.

This could previously be achieved by doing each grouping as a separate
query, conjoined by UNION ALLs. Besides being considerably more concise,
grouping sets will in many cases be faster, requiring only one scan over
the underlying data.

The current implementation of grouping sets only supports using sorting
for input. Individual sets that share a sort order are computed in one
pass. If there are sets that don't share a sort order, additional sort &
aggregation steps are performed. These additional passes are sourced by
the previous sort step; thus avoiding repeated scans of the source data.

The code is structured in a way that adding support for purely using
hash aggregation or a mix of hashing and sorting is possible. Sorting
was chosen to be supported first, as it is the most generic method of
implementation.

Instead of, as in an earlier versions of the patch, representing the
chain of sort and aggregation steps as full blown planner and executor
nodes, all but the first sort are performed inside the aggregation node
itself. This avoids the need to do some unusual gymnastics to handle
having to return aggregated and non-aggregated tuples from underlying
nodes, as well as having to shut down underlying nodes early to limit
memory usage.  The optimizer still builds Sort/Agg node to describe each
phase, but they're not part of the plan tree, but instead additional
data for the aggregation node. They're a convenient and preexisting way
to describe aggregation and sorting.  The first (and possibly only) sort
step is still performed as a separate execution step. That retains
similarity with existing group by plans, makes rescans fairly simple,
avoids very deep plans (leading to slow explains) and easily allows to
avoid the sorting step if the underlying data is sorted by other means.

A somewhat ugly side of this patch is having to deal with a grammar
ambiguity between the new CUBE keyword and the cube extension/functions
named cube (and rollup). To avoid breaking existing deployments of the
cube extension it has not been renamed, neither has cube been made a
reserved keyword. Instead precedence hacking is used to make GROUP BY
cube(..) refer to the CUBE grouping sets feature, and not the function
cube(). To actually group by a function cube(), unlikely as that might
be, the function name has to be quoted.

Needs a catversion bump because stored rules may change.

Author: Andrew Gierth and Atri Sharma, with contributions from Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Noah Misch, Tom Lane, Svenne Krap, Tomas
    Vondra, Erik Rijkers, Marti Raudsepp, Pavel Stehule
Discussion: CAOeZVidmVRe2jU6aMk_5qkxnB7dfmPROzM7Ur8JPW5j8Y5X-Lw@mail.gmail.com
2015-05-16 03:46:31 +02:00
Simon Riggs
6e4415c6aa Add docs for tablesample system_rows() 2015-05-15 21:44:53 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
b0b7be6133 Add BRIN infrastructure for "inclusion" opclasses
This lets BRIN be used with R-Tree-like indexing strategies.

Also provided are operator classes for range types, box and inet/cidr.
The infrastructure provided here should be sufficient to create operator
classes for similar datatypes; for instance, opclasses for PostGIS
geometries should be doable, though we didn't try to implement one.

(A box/point opclass was also submitted, but we ripped it out before
commit because the handling of floating point comparisons in existing
code is inconsistent and would generate corrupt indexes.)

Author: Emre Hasegeli.  Cosmetic changes by me
Review: Andreas Karlsson
2015-05-15 18:05:22 -03:00
Simon Riggs
910baf0a96 Tablesample method API docs
Petr Jelinek
2015-05-15 15:40:52 -04:00
Simon Riggs
149f6f1576 TABLESAMPLE system_time(limit)
Contrib module implementing a tablesample method
that allows you to limit the sample by a hard time
limit.

Petr Jelinek

Reviewed by Michael Paquier, Amit Kapila and
Simon Riggs
2015-05-15 15:18:57 -04:00
Simon Riggs
9689290ff0 TABLESAMPLE system_rows(limit)
Contrib module implementing a tablesample method
that allows you to limit the sample by a hard row
limit.

Petr Jelinek

Reviewed by Michael Paquier, Amit Kapila and
Simon Riggs
2015-05-15 15:14:22 -04:00
Robert Haas
92edba2665 doc: CREATE FOREIGN TABLE now allows CHECK ( ... ) NO INHERIT
Etsuro Fujita
2015-05-15 14:42:15 -04:00
Simon Riggs
f6d208d6e5 TABLESAMPLE, SQL Standard and extensible
Add a TABLESAMPLE clause to SELECT statements that allows
user to specify random BERNOULLI sampling or block level
SYSTEM sampling. Implementation allows for extensible
sampling functions to be written, using a standard API.
Basic version follows SQLStandard exactly. Usable
concrete use cases for the sampling API follow in later
commits.

Petr Jelinek

Reviewed by Michael Paquier and Simon Riggs
2015-05-15 14:37:10 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
8b0f105d2d Fix docs build. Oops. 2015-05-15 19:58:56 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ffd37740ee Add archive_mode='always' option.
In 'always' mode, the standby independently archives all files it receives
from the primary.

Original patch by Fujii Masao, docs and review by me.
2015-05-15 18:55:24 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
f6d65f0c70 docs: consistently uppercase index method and add spacing
Consistently uppercase index method names, e.g. GIN, and add space after
the index method name and the parentheses enclosing the column names.
2015-05-15 11:42:34 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
98edd617f3 Fix datatype confusion with the new lossy GiST distance functions.
We can only support a lossy distance function when the distance function's
datatype is comparable with the original ordering operator's datatype.
The distance function always returns a float8, so we are limited to float8,
and float4 (by a hard-coded cast of the float8 to float4).

In light of this limitation, it seems like a good idea to have a separate
'recheck' flag for the ORDER BY expressions, so that if you have a non-lossy
distance function, it still works with lossy quals. There are cases like
that with the build-in or contrib opclasses, but it's plausible.

There was a hidden assumption that the ORDER BY values returned by GiST
match the original ordering operator's return type, but there are plenty
of examples where that's not true, e.g. in btree_gist and pg_trgm. As long
as the distance function is not lossy, we can tolerate that and just not
return the distance to the executor (or rather, always return NULL). The
executor doesn't need the distances if there are no lossy results.

There was another little bug: the recheck variable was not initialized
before calling the distance function. That revealed the bigger issue,
as the executor tried to reorder tuples that didn't need reordering, and
that failed because of the datatype mismatch.
2015-05-15 18:09:31 +03:00
Fujii Masao
458a07701e Support --verbose option in reindexdb.
Sawada Masahiko, reviewed by Fabrízio Mello
2015-05-15 21:45:55 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
35fcb1b3d0 Allow GiST distance function to return merely a lower-bound.
The distance function can now set *recheck = false, like index quals. The
executor will then re-check the ORDER BY expressions, and use a queue to
reorder the results on the fly.

This makes it possible to do kNN-searches on polygons and circles, which
don't store the exact value in the index, but just a bounding box.

Alexander Korotkov and me
2015-05-15 14:26:51 +03:00
Fujii Masao
ecd222e770 Support VERBOSE option in REINDEX command.
When this option is specified, a progress report is printed as each index
is reindexed.

Per discussion, we agreed on the following syntax for the extensibility of
the options.

    REINDEX (flexible options) { INDEX | ... } name

Sawada Masahiko.
Reviewed by Robert Haas, Fabrízio Mello, Alvaro Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi,
Jim Nasby and me.

Discussion: CAD21AoA0pK3YcOZAFzMae+2fcc3oGp5zoRggDyMNg5zoaWDhdQ@mail.gmail.com
2015-05-15 20:09:57 +09:00
Tom Lane
4b8f797f67 Honor traditional SGML NAMELEN limit.
We've conformed to this limit in the past, so might as well continue to.

Aaron Swenson
2015-05-14 22:34:28 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a486e35706 Add pg_settings.pending_restart column
with input from David G. Johnston, Robert Haas, Michael Paquier
2015-05-14 20:08:51 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
333a870f94 doc: list bigint as mapping to int8 and int64
Report by Paul Jungwirth
2015-05-14 17:37:59 -04:00
Tom Lane
333d077962 Docs: fix erroneous claim about max byte length of GB18030.
This encoding has characters up to 4 bytes long, not 2.
2015-05-14 14:59:00 -04:00
Tom Lane
1dc5ebc907 Support "expanded" objects, particularly arrays, for better performance.
This patch introduces the ability for complex datatypes to have an
in-memory representation that is different from their on-disk format.
On-disk formats are typically optimized for minimal size, and in any case
they can't contain pointers, so they are often not well-suited for
computation.  Now a datatype can invent an "expanded" in-memory format
that is better suited for its operations, and then pass that around among
the C functions that operate on the datatype.  There are also provisions
(rudimentary as yet) to allow an expanded object to be modified in-place
under suitable conditions, so that operations like assignment to an element
of an array need not involve copying the entire array.

The initial application for this feature is arrays, but it is not hard
to foresee using it for other container types like JSON, XML and hstore.
I have hopes that it will be useful to PostGIS as well.

In this initial implementation, a few heuristics have been hard-wired
into plpgsql to improve performance for arrays that are stored in
plpgsql variables.  We would like to generalize those hacks so that
other datatypes can obtain similar improvements, but figuring out some
appropriate APIs is left as a task for future work.  (The heuristics
themselves are probably not optimal yet, either, as they sometimes
force expansion of arrays that would be better left alone.)

Preliminary performance testing shows impressive speed gains for plpgsql
functions that do element-by-element access or update of large arrays.
There are other cases that get a little slower, as a result of added array
format conversions; but we can hope to improve anything that's annoyingly
bad.  In any case most applications should see a net win.

Tom Lane, reviewed by Andres Freund
2015-05-14 12:08:49 -04:00
Stephen Frost
ac52bb0442 Add pg_audit, an auditing extension
This extension provides detailed logging classes, ability to control
logging at a per-object level, and includes fully-qualified object
names for logged statements (DML and DDL) in independent fields of the
log output.

Authors: Ian Barwick, Abhijit Menon-Sen, David Steele
Reviews by: Robert Haas, Tatsuo Ishii, Sawada Masahiko, Fujii Masao,
Simon Riggs

Discussion with: Josh Berkus, Jaime Casanova, Peter Eisentraut,
David Fetter, Yeb Havinga, Alvaro Herrera, Petr Jelinek, Tom Lane,
MauMau, Bruce Momjian, Jim Nasby, Michael Paquier,
Fabrízio de Royes Mello, Neil Tiffin
2015-05-14 10:36:16 -04:00
Andres Freund
5850b20f58 Add pgstattuple_approx() to the pgstattuple extension.
The new function allows to estimate bloat and other table level statics
in a faster, but approximate, way. It does so by using information from
the free space map for pages marked as all visible in the visibility
map. The rest of the table is actually read and free space/bloat is
measured accurately.  In many cases that allows to get bloat information
much quicker, causing less IO.

Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Amit Kapila and Tomas Vondra
Discussion: 20140402214144.GA28681@kea.toroid.org
2015-05-13 07:35:06 +02:00
Andrew Dunstan
c6947010ce Additional functions and operators for jsonb
jsonb_pretty(jsonb) produces nicely indented json output.
jsonb || jsonb concatenates two jsonb values.
jsonb - text removes a key and its associated value from the json
jsonb - int removes the designated array element
jsonb - text[] removes a key and associated value or array element at
the designated path
jsonb_replace(jsonb,text[],jsonb) replaces the array element designated
by the path or the value associated with the key designated by the path
with the given value.

Original work by Dmitry Dolgov, adapted and reworked for PostgreSQL core
by Andrew Dunstan, reviewed and tidied up by Petr Jelinek.
2015-05-12 15:52:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
afb9249d06 Add support for doing late row locking in FDWs.
Previously, FDWs could only do "early row locking", that is lock a row as
soon as it's fetched, even though local restriction/join conditions might
discard the row later.  This patch adds callbacks that allow FDWs to do
late locking in the same way that it's done for regular tables.

To make use of this feature, an FDW must support the "ctid" column as a
unique row identifier.  Currently, since ctid has to be of type TID,
the feature is of limited use, though in principle it could be used by
postgres_fdw.  We may eventually allow FDWs to specify another data type
for ctid, which would make it possible for more FDWs to use this feature.

This commit does not modify postgres_fdw to use late locking.  We've
tested some prototype code for that, but it's not in committable shape,
and besides it's quite unclear whether it actually makes sense to do late
locking against a remote server.  The extra round trips required are likely
to outweigh any benefit from improved concurrency.

Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by Ashutosh Bapat, and hacked up a lot by me
2015-05-12 14:10:17 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ea12b3ca8c doc build: use unique Makefile variable to control temp install 2015-05-12 12:30:50 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
72d422a522 Map basebackup tablespaces using a tablespace_map file
Windows can't reliably restore symbolic links from a tar format, so
instead during backup start we create a tablespace_map file, which is
used by the restoring postgres to create the correct links in pg_tblspc.
The backup protocol also now has an option to request this file to be
included in the backup stream, and this is used by pg_basebackup when
operating in tar mode.

This is done on all platforms, not just Windows.

This means that pg_basebackup will not not work in tar mode against 9.4
and older servers, as this protocol option isn't implemented there.

Amit Kapila, reviewed by Dilip Kumar, with a little editing from me.
2015-05-12 09:29:10 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
b488c580ae Allow on-the-fly capture of DDL event details
This feature lets user code inspect and take action on DDL events.
Whenever a ddl_command_end event trigger is installed, DDL actions
executed are saved to a list which can be inspected during execution of
a function attached to ddl_command_end.

The set-returning function pg_event_trigger_ddl_commands can be used to
list actions so captured; it returns data about the type of command
executed, as well as the affected object.  This is sufficient for many
uses of this feature.  For the cases where it is not, we also provide a
"command" column of a new pseudo-type pg_ddl_command, which is a
pointer to a C structure that can be accessed by C code.  The struct
contains all the info necessary to completely inspect and even
reconstruct the executed command.

There is no actual deparse code here; that's expected to come later.
What we have is enough infrastructure that the deparsing can be done in
an external extension.  The intention is that we will add some deparsing
code in a later release, as an in-core extension.

A new test module is included.  It's probably insufficient as is, but it
should be sufficient as a starting point for a more complete and
future-proof approach.

Authors: Álvaro Herrera, with some help from Andres Freund, Ian Barwick,
Abhijit Menon-Sen.

Reviews by Andres Freund, Robert Haas, Amit Kapila, Michael Paquier,
Craig Ringer, David Steele.
Additional input from Chris Browne, Dimitri Fontaine, Stephen Frost,
Petr Jelínek, Tom Lane, Jim Nasby, Steven Singer, Pavel Stěhule.

Based on original work by Dimitri Fontaine, though I didn't use his
code.

Discussion:
  https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/m2txrsdzxa.fsf@2ndQuadrant.fr
  https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20131108153322.GU5809@eldon.alvh.no-ip.org
  https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20150215044814.GL3391@alvh.no-ip.org
2015-05-11 19:14:31 -03:00
Stephen Frost
fa2642438f Allow LOCK TABLE .. ROW EXCLUSIVE MODE with INSERT
INSERT acquires RowExclusiveLock during normal operation and therefore
it makes sense to allow LOCK TABLE .. ROW EXCLUSIVE MODE to be executed
by users who have INSERT rights on a table (even if they don't have
UPDATE or DELETE).

Not back-patching this as it's a behavior change which, strictly
speaking, loosens security restrictions.

Per discussion with Tom and Robert (circa 2013).
2015-05-11 15:44:12 -04:00
Robert Haas
b4d4ce1d50 Increase threshold for multixact member emergency autovac to 50%.
Analysis by Noah Misch shows that the 25% threshold set by commit
53bb309d2d is lower than any other,
similar autovac threshold.  While we don't know exactly what value
will be optimal for all users, it is better to err a little on the
high side than on the low side.  A higher value increases the risk
that users might exhaust the available space and start seeing errors
before autovacuum can clean things up sufficiently, but a user who
hits that problem can compensate for it by reducing
autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age to a value dependent on their
average multixact size.  On the flip side, if the emergency cap
imposed by that patch kicks in too early, the user will experience
excessive wraparound scanning and will be unable to mitigate that
problem by configuration.  The new value will hopefully reduce the
risk of such bad experiences while still providing enough headroom
to avoid multixact member exhaustion for most users.

Along the way, adjust the documentation to reflect the effects of
commit 04e6d3b877, which taught
autovacuum to run for multixact wraparound even when autovacuum
is configured off.
2015-05-11 12:15:50 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
23c33198b9 docs: add "serialization anomaly" to transaction isolation table
Also distinguish between SQL-standard and Postgres behavior.

Report by David G. Johnston
2015-05-11 12:02:10 -04:00
Tom Lane
1a8a4e5cde Code review for foreign/custom join pushdown patch.
Commit e7cb7ee145 included some design
decisions that seem pretty questionable to me, and there was quite a lot
of stuff not to like about the documentation and comments.  Clean up
as follows:

* Consider foreign joins only between foreign tables on the same server,
rather than between any two foreign tables with the same underlying FDW
handler function.  In most if not all cases, the FDW would simply have had
to apply the same-server restriction itself (far more expensively, both for
lack of caching and because it would be repeated for each combination of
input sub-joins), or else risk nasty bugs.  Anyone who's really intent on
doing something outside this restriction can always use the
set_join_pathlist_hook.

* Rename fdw_ps_tlist/custom_ps_tlist to fdw_scan_tlist/custom_scan_tlist
to better reflect what they're for, and allow these custom scan tlists
to be used even for base relations.

* Change make_foreignscan() API to include passing the fdw_scan_tlist
value, since the FDW is required to set that.  Backwards compatibility
doesn't seem like an adequate reason to expect FDWs to set it in some
ad-hoc extra step, and anyway existing FDWs can just pass NIL.

* Change the API of path-generating subroutines of add_paths_to_joinrel,
and in particular that of GetForeignJoinPaths and set_join_pathlist_hook,
so that various less-used parameters are passed in a struct rather than
as separate parameter-list entries.  The objective here is to reduce the
probability that future additions to those parameter lists will result in
source-level API breaks for users of these hooks.  It's possible that this
is even a small win for the core code, since most CPU architectures can't
pass more than half a dozen parameters efficiently anyway.  I kept root,
joinrel, outerrel, innerrel, and jointype as separate parameters to reduce
code churn in joinpath.c --- in particular, putting jointype into the
struct would have been problematic because of the subroutines' habit of
changing their local copies of that variable.

* Avoid ad-hocery in ExecAssignScanProjectionInfo.  It was probably all
right for it to know about IndexOnlyScan, but if the list is to grow
we should refactor the knowledge out to the callers.

* Restore nodeForeignscan.c's previous use of the relcache to avoid
extra GetFdwRoutine lookups for base-relation scans.

* Lots of cleanup of documentation and missed comments.  Re-order some
code additions into more logical places.
2015-05-10 14:36:36 -04:00
Stephen Frost
f0a4b20bb9 Correct reindexdb documentation
--schema takes a schema, not a table.

Author: Sawada Masahiko
2015-05-09 14:45:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
da31c5ed79 doc: adjust ordering of pg_stat_statement paragraphs
Clarify installation instructions

Patch by Ian Barwick
2015-05-09 14:11:31 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
cb9fa802b3 Add new OID alias type regnamespace
Catalog version bumped

Kyotaro HORIGUCHI
2015-05-09 13:36:52 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
0c90f6769d Add new OID alias type regrole
The new type has the scope of whole the database cluster so it doesn't
behave the same as the existing OID alias types which have database
scope,
concerning object dependency. To avoid confusion constants of the new
type are prohibited from appearing where dependencies are made involving
it.

Also, add a note to the docs about possible MVCC violation and
optimization issues, which are general over the all reg* types.

Kyotaro Horiguchi
2015-05-09 13:06:49 -04:00
Stephen Frost
9a0884176f Change default for include_realm to 1
The default behavior for GSS and SSPI authentication methods has long
been to strip the realm off of the principal, however, this is not a
secure approach in multi-realm environments and the use-case for the
parameter at all has been superseded by the regex-based mapping support
available in pg_ident.conf.

Change the default for include_realm to be '1', meaning that we do
NOT remove the realm from the principal by default.  Any installations
which depend on the existing behavior will need to update their
configurations (ideally by leaving include_realm set to 1 and adding a
mapping in pg_ident.conf, but alternatively by explicitly setting
include_realm=0 prior to upgrading).  Note that the mapping capability
exists in all currently supported versions of PostgreSQL and so this
change can be done today.  Barring that, existing users can update their
configurations today to explicitly set include_realm=0 to ensure that
the prior behavior is maintained when they upgrade.

This needs to be noted in the release notes.

Per discussion with Magnus and Peter.
2015-05-08 19:39:42 -04:00
Stephen Frost
a97e0c3354 Add pg_file_settings view and function
The function and view added here provide a way to look at all settings
in postgresql.conf, any #include'd files, and postgresql.auto.conf
(which is what backs the ALTER SYSTEM command).

The information returned includes the configuration file name, line
number in that file, sequence number indicating when the parameter is
loaded (useful to see if it is later masked by another definition of the
same parameter), parameter name, and what it is set to at that point.
This information is updated on reload of the server.

This is unfiltered, privileged, information and therefore access is
restricted to superusers through the GRANT system.

Author: Sawada Masahiko, various improvements by me.
Reviewers: David Steele
2015-05-08 19:09:26 -04:00
Andres Freund
e8898e9169 Minor ON CONFLICT related comments and doc fixes.
Geoff Winkless, Stephen Frost, Peter Geoghegan and me.
2015-05-08 19:24:14 +02:00
Robert Haas
53bb309d2d Teach autovacuum about multixact member wraparound.
The logic introduced in commit b69bf30b9b
and repaired in commits 669c7d20e6 and
7be47c56af helps to ensure that we don't
overwrite old multixact member information while it is still needed,
but a user who creates many large multixacts can still exhaust the
member space (and thus start getting errors) while autovacuum stands
idly by.

To fix this, progressively ramp down the effective value (but not the
actual contents) of autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age as member space
utilization increases.  This makes autovacuum more aggressive and also
reduces the threshold for a manual VACUUM to perform a full-table scan.

This patch leaves unsolved the problem of ensuring that emergency
autovacuums are triggered even when autovacuum=off.  We'll need to fix
that via a separate patch.

Thomas Munro and Robert Haas
2015-05-08 12:53:00 -04:00
Andres Freund
168d5805e4 Add support for INSERT ... ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING/UPDATE.
The newly added ON CONFLICT clause allows to specify an alternative to
raising a unique or exclusion constraint violation error when inserting.
ON CONFLICT refers to constraints that can either be specified using a
inference clause (by specifying the columns of a unique constraint) or
by naming a unique or exclusion constraint.  DO NOTHING avoids the
constraint violation, without touching the pre-existing row.  DO UPDATE
SET ... [WHERE ...] updates the pre-existing tuple, and has access to
both the tuple proposed for insertion and the existing tuple; the
optional WHERE clause can be used to prevent an update from being
executed.  The UPDATE SET and WHERE clauses have access to the tuple
proposed for insertion using the "magic" EXCLUDED alias, and to the
pre-existing tuple using the table name or its alias.

This feature is often referred to as upsert.

This is implemented using a new infrastructure called "speculative
insertion". It is an optimistic variant of regular insertion that first
does a pre-check for existing tuples and then attempts an insert.  If a
violating tuple was inserted concurrently, the speculatively inserted
tuple is deleted and a new attempt is made.  If the pre-check finds a
matching tuple the alternative DO NOTHING or DO UPDATE action is taken.
If the insertion succeeds without detecting a conflict, the tuple is
deemed inserted.

To handle the possible ambiguity between the excluded alias and a table
named excluded, and for convenience with long relation names, INSERT
INTO now can alias its target table.

Bumps catversion as stored rules change.

Author: Peter Geoghegan, with significant contributions from Heikki
    Linnakangas and Andres Freund. Testing infrastructure by Jeff Janes.
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas, Andres Freund, Robert Haas, Simon Riggs,
    Dean Rasheed, Stephen Frost and many others.
2015-05-08 05:43:10 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
db5f98ab4f Improve BRIN infra, minmax opclass and regression test
The minmax opclass was using the wrong support functions when
cross-datatypes queries were run.  Instead of trying to fix the
pg_amproc definitions (which apparently is not possible), use the
already correct pg_amop entries instead.  This requires jumping through
more hoops (read: extra syscache lookups) to obtain the underlying
functions to execute, but it is necessary for correctness.

Author: Emre Hasegeli, tweaked by Álvaro
Review: Andreas Karlsson

Also change BrinOpcInfo to record each stored type's typecache entry
instead of just the OID.  Turns out that the full type cache is
necessary in brin_deform_tuple: the original code used the indexed
type's byval and typlen properties to extract the stored tuple, which is
correct in Minmax; but in other implementations that want to store
something different, that's wrong.  The realization that this is a bug
comes from Emre also, but I did not use his patch.

I also adopted Emre's regression test code (with smallish changes),
which is more complete.
2015-05-07 13:02:22 -03:00
Bruce Momjian
82ec7c95b7 Makefile: Add comment that doc uninstall clears man directories
Report by Mario Valdez
2015-05-07 10:26:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
929ca96584 citext's regexp_matches() functions weren't documented, either. 2015-05-05 16:11:01 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
53f0965767 doc: Update installation instructions for new shared libperl/libpython handling 2015-05-05 14:41:39 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
3b6db1f445 Add geometry/range functions to support BRIN inclusion
This commit adds the following functions:
    box(point) -> box
    bound_box(box, box) -> box
    inet_same_family(inet, inet) -> bool
    inet_merge(inet, inet) -> cidr
    range_merge(anyrange, anyrange) -> anyrange

The first of these is also used to implement a new assignment cast from
point to box.

These functions are the first part of a base to implement an "inclusion"
operator class for BRIN, for multidimensional data types.

Author: Emre Hasegeli
Reviewed by: Andreas Karlsson
2015-05-05 15:22:24 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
ad8d6d064c Fix typos
Author: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
2015-05-04 20:40:19 -04:00
Robert Haas
e7cb7ee145 Allow FDWs and custom scan providers to replace joins with scans.
Foreign data wrappers can use this capability for so-called "join
pushdown"; that is, instead of executing two separate foreign scans
and then joining the results locally, they can generate a path which
performs the join on the remote server and then is scanned locally.
This commit does not extend postgres_fdw to take advantage of this
capability; it just provides the infrastructure.

Custom scan providers can use this in a similar way.  Previously,
it was only possible for a custom scan provider to scan a single
relation.  Now, it can scan an entire join tree, provided of course
that it knows how to produce the same results that the join would
have produced if executed normally.

KaiGai Kohei, reviewed by Shigeru Hanada, Ashutosh Bapat, and me.
2015-05-01 08:50:35 -04:00
Andres Freund
2b22795b32 Copy editing of the replication origins patch.
Michael Paquier and myself.
2015-05-01 12:22:13 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
9d396af463 Fix up some loose ends for CURRENT_USER as RoleSpec
In commit 31eae6028e, some documents were not updated to show the new
capability; fix that.  Also, the error message you get when CURRENT_USER
and SESSION_USER are used in a context that doesn't accept them could be
clearer about it being a problem only in those contexts; so add the
word "here".

Author: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI

His patch submission also included changes to GRANT/REVOKE, but those
seemed more controversial, so I left them out.  We can reconsider these
changes later.
2015-04-30 16:57:05 -03:00
Magnus Hagander
da114099af Fix typo
Amit Langote
2015-04-30 09:52:34 +02:00
Robert Haas
49601ab1a6 Add <literal> markup, for consistency.
This file isn't entirely consistent about whether "on" and "off"
should be marked up with <literal>, but it doesn't make much sense
to be inconsistent within a single sentence.

Etsuro Fujita
2015-04-29 18:03:18 -04:00
Andres Freund
5aa2350426 Introduce replication progress tracking infrastructure.
When implementing a replication solution ontop of logical decoding, two
related problems exist:
* How to safely keep track of replication progress
* How to change replication behavior, based on the origin of a row;
  e.g. to avoid loops in bi-directional replication setups

The solution to these problems, as implemented here, consist out of
three parts:

1) 'replication origins', which identify nodes in a replication setup.
2) 'replication progress tracking', which remembers, for each
   replication origin, how far replay has progressed in a efficient and
   crash safe manner.
3) The ability to filter out changes performed on the behest of a
   replication origin during logical decoding; this allows complex
   replication topologies. E.g. by filtering all replayed changes out.

Most of this could also be implemented in "userspace", e.g. by inserting
additional rows contain origin information, but that ends up being much
less efficient and more complicated.  We don't want to require various
replication solutions to reimplement logic for this independently. The
infrastructure is intended to be generic enough to be reusable.

This infrastructure also replaces the 'nodeid' infrastructure of commit
timestamps. It is intended to provide all the former capabilities,
except that there's only 2^16 different origins; but now they integrate
with logical decoding. Additionally more functionality is accessible via
SQL.  Since the commit timestamp infrastructure has also been introduced
in 9.5 (commit 73c986add) changing the API is not a problem.

For now the number of origins for which the replication progress can be
tracked simultaneously is determined by the max_replication_slots
GUC. That GUC is not a perfect match to configure this, but there
doesn't seem to be sufficient reason to introduce a separate new one.

Bumps both catversion and wal page magic.

Author: Andres Freund, with contributions from Petr Jelinek and Craig Ringer
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas, Petr Jelinek, Robert Haas, Steve Singer
Discussion: 20150216002155.GI15326@awork2.anarazel.de,
    20140923182422.GA15776@alap3.anarazel.de,
    20131114172632.GE7522@alap2.anarazel.de
2015-04-29 19:30:53 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
5086dfceba doc: recommend use of GUC server_version_num for version checks
Patch by Craig Ringer
2015-04-28 20:31:08 -04:00
Stephen Frost
dcbf5948e1 Improve qual pushdown for RLS and SB views
The original security barrier view implementation, on which RLS is
built, prevented all non-leakproof functions from being pushed down to
below the view, even when the function was not receiving any data from
the view.  This optimization improves on that situation by, instead of
checking strictly for non-leakproof functions, it checks for Vars being
passed to non-leakproof functions and allows functions which do not
accept arguments or whose arguments are not from the current query level
(eg: constants can be particularly useful) to be pushed down.

As discussed, this does mean that a function which is pushed down might
gain some idea that there are rows meeting a certain criteria based on
the number of times the function is called, but this isn't a
particularly new issue and the documentation in rules.sgml already
addressed similar covert-channel risks.  That documentation is updated
to reflect that non-leakproof functions may be pushed down now, if
they meet the above-described criteria.

Author: Dean Rasheed, with a bit of rework to make things clearer,
along with comment and documentation updates from me.
2015-04-27 12:29:42 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
cac7658205 Add transforms feature
This provides a mechanism for specifying conversions between SQL data
types and procedural languages.  As examples, there are transforms
for hstore and ltree for PL/Perl and PL/Python.

reviews by Pavel Stěhule and Andres Freund
2015-04-26 10:33:14 -04:00
Stephen Frost
e89bd02f58 Perform RLS WITH CHECK before constraints, etc
The RLS capability is built on top of the WITH CHECK OPTION
system which was added for auto-updatable views, however, unlike
WCOs on views (which are mandated by the SQL spec to not fire until
after all other constraints and checks are done), it makes much more
sense for RLS checks to happen earlier than constraint and uniqueness
checks.

This patch reworks the structure which holds the WCOs a bit to be
explicitly either VIEW or RLS checks and the RLS-related checks are
done prior to the constraint and uniqueness checks.  This also allows
better error reporting as we are now reporting when a violation is due
to a WITH CHECK OPTION and when it's due to an RLS policy violation,
which was independently noted by Craig Ringer as being confusing.

The documentation is also updated to include a paragraph about when RLS
WITH CHECK handling is performed, as there have been a number of
questions regarding that and the documentation was previously silent on
the matter.

Author: Dean Rasheed, with some kabitzing and comment changes by me.
2015-04-24 20:34:26 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
d64a9c8c83 doc: Move ALTER TABLE IF EXISTS description to better place
It was previously mixed in with the description of ALTER TABLE
subcommands.  Move it to the Parameters section, which is where it is on
other reference pages.

pointed out by Amit Langote
2015-04-24 13:22:18 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9ba978c8cc Fix misspellings
Amit Langote and Thom Brown
2015-04-24 12:00:49 -04:00
Andres Freund
cef939c347 Rename pg_replication_slot's new active_in to active_pid.
In d811c037ce active_in was added but discussion since showed that
active_pid is preferred as a name.

Discussion: CAMsr+YFKgZca5_7_ouaMWxA5PneJC9LNViPzpDHusaPhU9pA7g@mail.gmail.com
2015-04-22 09:43:40 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
b0a738f428 Move pg_xlogdump from contrib/ to src/bin/
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-21 19:03:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
0275ecf31c Update FDW docs to reflect existence of CHECK constraints.
Generalize the remarks previously made about NOT NULL constraints to
CHECK constraints.

Etsuro Fujita
2015-04-21 17:46:47 -04:00
Andres Freund
d811c037ce Add 'active_in' column to pg_replication_slots.
Right now it is visible whether a replication slot is active in any
session, but not in which.  Adding the active_in column, containing the
pid of the backend having acquired the slot, makes it much easier to
associate pg_replication_slots entries with the corresponding
pg_stat_replication/pg_stat_activity row.

This should have been done from the start, but I (Andres) dropped the
ball there somehow.

Author: Craig Ringer, revised by me Discussion:
CAMsr+YFKgZca5_7_ouaMWxA5PneJC9LNViPzpDHusaPhU9pA7g@mail.gmail.com
2015-04-21 11:51:06 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
528c2e44ab Move pg_test_timing from contrib/ to src/bin/
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-20 21:30:12 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
00882d9e5c Move pg_test_fsync from contrib/ to src/bin/
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-19 22:20:49 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
4cb7d671fd Add new target modulescheck in vcregress.pl
This allows an MSVC build to run regression tests related to modules in
src/test/modules.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed by: Andrew Dunstan
2015-04-16 23:39:52 -03:00
Bruce Momjian
2e5d52a644 pg_upgrade: document need for text search files to be copied
Report by CJ Estel

Backpatch through 9.4
2015-04-16 19:51:24 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9fa8b0ee90 Move pg_upgrade from contrib/ to src/bin/
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-14 19:26:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
30982be4e5 Integrate pg_upgrade_support module into backend
Previously, these functions were created in a schema "binary_upgrade",
which was deleted after pg_upgrade was finished.  Because we don't want
to keep that schema around permanently, move them to pg_catalog but
rename them with a binary_upgrade_... prefix.

The provided functions are only small wrappers around global variables
that were added specifically for pg_upgrade use, so keeping the module
separate does not create any modularity.

The functions still check that they are only called in binary upgrade
mode, so it is not possible to call these during normal operation.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-14 19:26:37 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
81134af3ec Move pgbench from contrib/ to src/bin/
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-13 13:07:16 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
9029f4b374 Add system view pg_stat_ssl
This view shows information about all connections, such as if the
connection is using SSL, which cipher is used, and which client
certificate (if any) is used.

Reviews by Alex Shulgin, Heikki Linnakangas, Andres Freund & Michael Paquier
2015-04-12 19:07:46 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
83aca89f7c Move pg_archivecleanup from contrib/ to src/bin/
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael.paquier@gmail.com>
2015-04-11 23:29:18 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
8ae4600cd9 Fix incorrect punctuation
Amit Langote
2015-04-09 13:35:30 +02:00
Fujii Masao
17d436d2e8 Remove obsolete FORCE option from REINDEX.
FORCE option has been marked "obsolete" since very old version 7.4
but existed for backwards compatibility. Per discussion on pgsql-hackers,
we concluded that it's no longer worth keeping supporting the option.
2015-04-09 11:31:42 +09:00
Simon Riggs
1cdf4d0b6a Fix spelling of author's name 2015-04-07 14:04:29 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
e9a077cad3 pg_event_trigger_dropped_objects: add is_temp column
It now also reports temporary objects dropped that are local to the
backend.  Previously we weren't reporting any temp objects because it
was deemed unnecessary; but as it turns out, it is necessary if we want
to keep close track of DDL command execution inside one session.  Temp
objects are reported as living in schema pg_temp, which works because
such a schema-qualification always refers to the temp objects of the
current session.
2015-04-06 11:40:55 -03:00
Fujii Masao
5f6a9d056a Fix typo in libpq.sgml.
Back-patch to all supported versions.

Michael Paquier
2015-04-06 12:15:20 +09:00
Simon Riggs
e8fde1f6a0 Remove extraneous > 2015-04-05 12:35:24 -04:00
Simon Riggs
0ef0396ae1 Reduce lock levels of some trigger DDL and add FKs
Reduce lock levels to ShareRowExclusive for the following SQL
 CREATE TRIGGER (but not DROP or ALTER)
 ALTER TABLE ENABLE TRIGGER
 ALTER TABLE DISABLE TRIGGER
 ALTER TABLE … ADD CONSTRAINT FOREIGN KEY

Original work by Simon Riggs, extracted and refreshed by Andreas Karlsson
New test cases added by Andreas Karlsson
Reviewed by Noah Misch, Andres Freund, Michael Paquier and Simon Riggs
2015-04-05 11:37:08 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
4ff695b17d Add log_min_autovacuum_duration per-table option
This is useful to control autovacuum log volume, for situations where
monitoring only a set of tables is necessary.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed by: A team led by Naoya Anzai (also including Akira Kurosawa,
Taiki Kondo, Huong Dangminh), Fujii Masao.
2015-04-03 11:55:50 -03:00
Fujii Masao
5e3d289f9b Add markup for replaceable parameters to pg_rewind doc. 2015-04-03 12:21:16 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
e146ca6820 psql: fix \connect with URIs and conninfo strings
This is the second try at this, after fcef161729 failed miserably and
had to be reverted: as it turns out, libpq cannot depend on libpgcommon
after all. Instead of shuffling code in the master branch, make that one
just like 9.4 and accept the duplication.  (This was all my own mistake,
not the patch submitter's).

psql was already accepting conninfo strings as the first parameter in
\connect, but the way it worked wasn't sane; some of the other
parameters would get the previous connection's values, causing it to
connect to a completely unexpected server or, more likely, not finding
any server at all because of completely wrong combinations of
parameters.

Fix by explicitely checking for a conninfo-looking parameter in the
dbname position; if one is found, use its complete specification rather
than mix with the other arguments.  Also, change tab-completion to not
try to complete conninfo/URI-looking "dbnames" and document that
conninfos are accepted as first argument.

There was a weak consensus to backpatch this, because while the behavior
of using the dbname as a conninfo is nowhere documented for \connect, it
is reasonable to expect that it works because it does work in many other
contexts.  Therefore this is backpatched all the way back to 9.0.

Author: David Fetter, Andrew Dunstan.  Some editorialization by me
(probably earning a Gierth's "Sloppy" badge in the process.)
Reviewers: Andrew Gierth, Erik Rijkers, Pavel Stěhule, Stephen Frost,
Robert Haas, Andrew Dunstan.
2015-04-02 12:30:57 -03:00
Robert Haas
4cd639baf4 Revert "psql: fix \connect with URIs and conninfo strings"
This reverts commit fcef161729, about
which both the buildfarm and my local machine are very unhappy.
2015-04-02 10:10:22 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
fcef161729 psql: fix \connect with URIs and conninfo strings
psql was already accepting conninfo strings as the first parameter in
\connect, but the way it worked wasn't sane; some of the other
parameters would get the previous connection's values, causing it to
connect to a completely unexpected server or, more likely, not finding
any server at all because of completely wrong combinations of
parameters.

Fix by explicitely checking for a conninfo-looking parameter in the
dbname position; if one is found, use its complete specification rather
than mix with the other arguments.  Also, change tab-completion to not
try to complete conninfo/URI-looking "dbnames" and document that
conninfos are accepted as first argument.

There was a weak consensus to backpatch this, because while the behavior
of using the dbname as a conninfo is nowhere documented for \connect, it
is reasonable to expect that it works because it does work in many other
contexts.  Therefore this is backpatched all the way back to 9.0.

To implement this, routines previously private to libpq have been
duplicated so that psql can decide what looks like a conninfo/URI
string.  In back branches, just duplicate the same code all the way back
to 9.2, where URIs where introduced; 9.0 and 9.1 have a simpler version.
In master, the routines are moved to src/common and renamed.

Author: David Fetter, Andrew Dunstan.  Some editorialization by me
(probably earning a Gierth's "Sloppy" badge in the process.)
Reviewers: Andrew Gierth, Erik Rijkers, Pavel Stěhule, Stephen Frost,
Robert Haas, Andrew Dunstan.
2015-04-01 20:00:07 -03:00
Tom Lane
f6caf5acf1 Fix incorrect markup in documentation of window frame clauses.
You're required to write either RANGE or ROWS to start a frame clause,
but the documentation incorrectly implied this is optional.  Noted by
David Johnston.
2015-03-31 20:02:40 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0badb069bc pg_ctl: change default shutdown mode from 'smart' to 'fast'
Retain the order of the options in the documentation.
2015-03-31 11:46:27 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9d9991c84e psql: add asciidoc output format
Patch by Szymon Guz, adjustments by me

Testing by Michael Paquier, Pavel Stehule
2015-03-31 11:33:25 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
97690ea6e8 Change array_offset to return subscripts, not offsets
... and rename it and its sibling array_offsets to array_position and
array_positions, to account for the changed behavior.

Having the functions return subscripts better matches existing practice,
and is better suited to using the result value as a subscript into the
array directly.  For one-based arrays, the new definition is identical
to what was originally committed.

(We use the term "subscript" in the documentation, which is what we use
whenever we talk about arrays; but the functions themselves are named
using the word "position" to match the standard-defined POSITION()
functions.)

Author: Pavel Stěhule
Behavioral problem noted by Dean Rasheed.
2015-03-30 16:13:21 -03:00
Andrew Dunstan
7655f4ccea Add a pager_min_lines setting to psql
If set, the pager will not be used unless this many lines are to be
displayed, even if that is more than the screen depth. Default is zero,
meaning it's disabled.

There is probably more work to be done in giving the user control over
when the pager is used, particularly when wide output forces use of the
pager regardless of how many lines there are, but this is a start.
2015-03-28 11:07:41 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
717f709532 Add stats for min, max, mean, stddev times to pg_stat_statements.
The new fields are min_time, max_time, mean_time and stddev_time.

Based on an original patch from Mitsumasa KONDO, modified by me. Reviewed by Petr Jelínek.
2015-03-27 15:43:22 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
d04c8ed904 Add support for index-only scans in GiST.
This adds a new GiST opclass method, 'fetch', which is used to reconstruct
the original Datum from the value stored in the index. Also, the 'canreturn'
index AM interface function gains a new 'attno' argument. That makes it
possible to use index-only scans on a multi-column index where some of the
opclasses support index-only scans but some do not.

This patch adds support in the box and point opclasses. Other opclasses
can added later as follow-on patches (btree_gist would be particularly
interesting).

Anastasia Lubennikova, with additional fixes and modifications by me.
2015-03-26 19:12:00 +02:00
Tom Lane
a4847fc3ef Add an ASSERT statement in plpgsql.
This is meant to make it easier to insert simple debugging cross-checks
in plpgsql functions.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Jim Nasby
2015-03-25 19:05:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0e1f6d8132 PL/pgSQL docs: recommend format() for query construction
Previously only concatenation was recommended.

Report by Pavel Stehule
2015-03-24 21:10:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
66c8040d50 docs: clarify when MVCC snapshot is taken
Report by Álvaro Hernández Tortosa
2015-03-24 20:56:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
278edd9ed3 doc: update NUMERIC to state that only some ops are exact
Report by Tom Lane
2015-03-24 19:57:52 -04:00
Tom Lane
e5f455f59f Apply table and domain CHECK constraints in name order.
Previously, CHECK constraints of the same scope were checked in whatever
order they happened to be read from pg_constraint.  (Usually, but not
reliably, this would be creation order for domain constraints and reverse
creation order for table constraints, because of differing implementation
details.)  Nondeterministic results of this sort are problematic at least
for testing purposes, and in discussion it was agreed to be a violation of
the principle of least astonishment.  Therefore, borrow the principle
already established for triggers, and apply such checks in name order
(using strcmp() sort rules).  This lets users control the check order
if they have a mind to.

Domain CHECK constraints still follow the rule of checking lower nested
domains' constraints first; the name sort only applies to multiple
constraints attached to the same domain.

In passing, I failed to resist the temptation to wordsmith a bit in
create_domain.sgml.

Apply to HEAD only, since this could result in a behavioral change in
existing applications, and the potential regression test failures have
not actually been observed in our buildfarm.
2015-03-23 16:59:35 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
61081e75c6 Add pg_rewind, for re-synchronizing a master server after failback.
Earlier versions of this tool were available (and still are) on github.

Thanks to Michael Paquier, Alvaro Herrera, Peter Eisentraut, Amit Kapila,
and Satoshi Nagayasu for review.
2015-03-23 19:47:52 +02:00
Tom Lane
cb1ca4d800 Allow foreign tables to participate in inheritance.
Foreign tables can now be inheritance children, or parents.  Much of the
system was already ready for this, but we had to fix a few things of
course, mostly in the area of planner and executor handling of row locks.

As side effects of this, allow foreign tables to have NOT VALID CHECK
constraints (and hence to accept ALTER ... VALIDATE CONSTRAINT), and to
accept ALTER SET STORAGE and ALTER SET WITH/WITHOUT OIDS.  Continuing to
disallow these things would've required bizarre and inconsistent special
cases in inheritance behavior.  Since foreign tables don't enforce CHECK
constraints anyway, a NOT VALID one is a complete no-op, but that doesn't
mean we shouldn't allow it.  And it's possible that some FDWs might have
use for SET STORAGE or SET WITH OIDS, though doubtless they will be no-ops
for most.

An additional change in support of this is that when a ModifyTable node
has multiple target tables, they will all now be explicitly identified
in EXPLAIN output, for example:

 Update on pt1  (cost=0.00..321.05 rows=3541 width=46)
   Update on pt1
   Foreign Update on ft1
   Foreign Update on ft2
   Update on child3
   ->  Seq Scan on pt1  (cost=0.00..0.00 rows=1 width=46)
   ->  Foreign Scan on ft1  (cost=100.00..148.03 rows=1170 width=46)
   ->  Foreign Scan on ft2  (cost=100.00..148.03 rows=1170 width=46)
   ->  Seq Scan on child3  (cost=0.00..25.00 rows=1200 width=46)

This was done mainly to provide an unambiguous place to attach "Remote SQL"
fields, but it is useful for inherited updates even when no foreign tables
are involved.

Shigeru Hanada and Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by Ashutosh Bapat and Kyotaro
Horiguchi, some additional hacking by me
2015-03-22 13:53:21 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7d60ce8065 docs: clarify the use of shell types
Report by Ondřej Bouda
2015-03-20 18:48:52 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c863c91e3f doc: add comma for clarity
Patch by Etsuro Fujita
2015-03-20 16:58:19 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7e9ed623d9 docs: mention the optimizer can increase the index usage count
Report by Marko Tiikkaja
2015-03-19 22:38:15 -04:00
Stephen Frost
bf03889996 GetUserId() changes to has_privs_of_role()
The pg_stat and pg_signal-related functions have been using GetUserId()
instead of has_privs_of_role() for checking if the current user should
be able to see details in pg_stat_activity or signal other processes,
requiring a user to do 'SET ROLE' for inheirited roles for a permissions
check, unlike other permissions checks.

This patch changes that behavior to, instead, act like most other
permission checks and use has_privs_of_role(), removing the 'SET ROLE'
need.  Documentation and error messages updated accordingly.

Per discussion with Alvaro, Peter, Adam (though not using Adam's patch),
and Robert.

Reviewed by Jeevan Chalke.
2015-03-19 15:02:33 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5f286c0242 doc: ALTER DOMAIN VALIDATE CONSTRAINT can also fail
Document that ALTER DOMAIN VALIDATE CONSTRAINT can also fail for
composite types.

Report by Ondřej Bouda
2015-03-19 13:02:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
417f78a517 pg_upgrade: document use of rsync for slave upgrades
Also document that rsync has one-second granularity for file
change comparisons.

Report by Stephen Frost
2015-03-18 15:49:29 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
13dbc7a824 array_offset() and array_offsets()
These functions return the offset position or positions of a value in an
array.

Author: Pavel Stěhule
Reviewed by: Jim Nasby
2015-03-18 16:01:34 -03:00
Andres Freund
4559167c6b Remove docs missed in 51c11a7025.
Somehow I misresolved a merge conflict when forward porting Petr's patch
leading to a section of the docs remaining...

Thankfully Fujii spotted my mistake.
2015-03-17 23:25:52 +01:00
Tom Lane
d1e9214e4f Add missing documentation for PGC_SU_BACKEND in description of pg_settings.
Commit fe550b2ac2 missed updating this list
of the PGC_XXX values, which in hindsight is not so surprising because
catalogs.sgml is not a place you'd think to look for them.  In addition to
adding the missing doco, insert the PGC_XXX C enum names in SGML comments,
so that grepping for the enum names will find this file.  That might spare
the next person similar embarrassment.

Spotted by Magnus Hagander.
2015-03-15 12:45:43 -04:00
Andres Freund
a0f5954af1 Increase max_wal_size's default from 128MB to 1GB.
The introduction of min_wal_size & max_wal_size in 88e9823026 makes it
feasible to increase the default upper bound in checkpoint
size. Previously raising the default would lead to a increased disk
footprint, even if more segments weren't beneficial.  The low default of
checkpoint size is one of common performance problem users have thus
increasing the default makes sense.  Setups where the increase in
maximum disk usage is a problem will very likely have to run with a
modified configuration anyway.

Discussion: 54F4EFB8.40202@agliodbs.com,
    CA+TgmoZEAgX5oMGJOHVj8L7XOkAe05Gnf45rP40m-K3FhZRVKg@mail.gmail.com

Author: Josh Berkus, after a discussion involving lots of people.
2015-03-15 17:37:07 +01:00
Andres Freund
51c11a7025 Remove pause_at_recovery_target recovery.conf setting.
The new recovery_target_action (introduced in aedccb1f6/b8e33a85d4)
replaces it's functionality. Having both seems likely to cause more
confusion than it saves worry due to the incompatibility.

Discussion: 5484FC53.2060903@2ndquadrant.com
Author: Petr Jelinek
2015-03-15 17:37:07 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
959df4b5fc doc: Remove link to outdated dtrace project on pgfoundry 2015-03-14 16:29:36 -04:00
Robert Haas
82fe8b1119 Document the new custom scan APIs.
These APIs changed somewhat subsequent to the initial commit, and may
change further in the future, but let's document what we have today.

KaiGai Kohei and Robert Haas, reviewed by Tom Lane and Thom Brown
2015-03-13 07:55:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
ebc0f5e01d Improve documentation of bt_page_items().
Explain some of the funny conventions used in btree page items.

Peter Geoghegan and Jeff Janes
2015-03-12 14:18:26 -04:00
Tom Lane
c6b3c939b7 Make operator precedence follow the SQL standard more closely.
While the SQL standard is pretty vague on the overall topic of operator
precedence (because it never presents a unified BNF for all expressions),
it does seem reasonable to conclude from the spec for <boolean value
expression> that OR has the lowest precedence, then AND, then NOT, then IS
tests, then the six standard comparison operators, then everything else
(since any non-boolean operator in a WHERE clause would need to be an
argument of one of these).

We were only sort of on board with that: most notably, while "<" ">" and
"=" had properly low precedence, "<=" ">=" and "<>" were treated as generic
operators and so had significantly higher precedence.  And "IS" tests were
even higher precedence than those, which is very clearly wrong per spec.

Another problem was that "foo NOT SOMETHING bar" constructs, such as
"x NOT LIKE y", were treated inconsistently because of a bison
implementation artifact: they had the documented precedence with respect
to operators to their right, but behaved like NOT (i.e., very low priority)
with respect to operators to their left.

Fixing the precedence issues is just a small matter of rearranging the
precedence declarations in gram.y, except for the NOT problem, which
requires adding an additional lookahead case in base_yylex() so that we
can attach a different token precedence to NOT LIKE and allied two-word
operators.

The bulk of this patch is not the bug fix per se, but adding logic to
parse_expr.c to allow giving warnings if an expression has changed meaning
because of these precedence changes.  These warnings are off by default
and are enabled by the new GUC operator_precedence_warning.  It's believed
that very few applications will be affected by these changes, but it was
agreed that a warning mechanism is essential to help debug any that are.
2015-03-11 13:22:52 -04:00
Fujii Masao
57aa5b2bb1 Add GUC to enable compression of full page images stored in WAL.
When newly-added GUC parameter, wal_compression, is on, the PostgreSQL server
compresses a full page image written to WAL when full_page_writes is on or
during a base backup. A compressed page image will be decompressed during WAL
replay. Turning this parameter on can reduce the WAL volume without increasing
the risk of unrecoverable data corruption, but at the cost of some extra CPU
spent on the compression during WAL logging and on the decompression during
WAL replay.

This commit changes the WAL format (so bumping WAL version number) so that
the one-byte flag indicating whether a full page image is compressed or not is
included in its header information. This means that the commit increases the
WAL volume one-byte per a full page image even if WAL compression is not used
at all. We can save that one-byte by borrowing one-bit from the existing field
like hole_offset in the header and using it as the flag, for example. But which
would reduce the code readability and the extensibility of the feature.
Per discussion, it's not worth paying those prices to save only one-byte, so we
decided to add the one-byte flag to the header.

This commit doesn't introduce any new compression algorithm like lz4.
Currently a full page image is compressed using the existing PGLZ algorithm.
Per discussion, we decided to use it at least in the first version of the
feature because there were no performance reports showing that its compression
ratio is unacceptably lower than that of other algorithm. Of course,
in the future, it's worth considering the support of other compression
algorithm for the better compression.

Rahila Syed and Michael Paquier, reviewed in various versions by myself,
Andres Freund, Robert Haas, Abhijit Menon-Sen and many others.
2015-03-11 15:52:24 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
bb7b35caf7 Fix stray sentence fragment in shared_preload_libraries documentation
The introduction in the Shared Library Preloading section already
instructs the user to separate multiple library names with commas, so
just remove the fragment from here.

Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
2015-03-10 12:36:17 -03:00
Robert Haas
865f14a2d3 Allow named parameters to be specified using => in addition to :=
SQL has standardized on => as the use of to specify named parameters,
and we've wanted for many years to support the same syntax ourselves,
but this has been complicated by the possible use of => as an operator
name.  In PostgreSQL 9.0, we began emitting a warning when an operator
named => was defined, and in PostgreSQL 9.2, we stopped shipping a
=>(text, text) operator as part of hstore.  By the time the next major
version of PostgreSQL is released, => will have been deprecated for a
full five years, so hopefully there won't be too many people still
relying on it.  We continue to support := for compatibility with
previous PostgreSQL releases.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Petr Jelinek, with a few documentation
tweaks by me.
2015-03-10 11:09:41 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
31eae6028e Allow CURRENT/SESSION_USER to be used in certain commands
Commands such as ALTER USER, ALTER GROUP, ALTER ROLE, GRANT, and the
various ALTER OBJECT / OWNER TO, as well as ad-hoc clauses related to
roles such as the AUTHORIZATION clause of CREATE SCHEMA, the FOR clause
of CREATE USER MAPPING, and the FOR ROLE clause of ALTER DEFAULT
PRIVILEGES can now take the keywords CURRENT_USER and SESSION_USER as
user specifiers in place of an explicit user name.

This commit also fixes some quite ugly handling of special standards-
mandated syntax in CREATE USER MAPPING, which in particular would fail
to work in presence of a role named "current_user".

The special role specifiers PUBLIC and NONE also have more consistent
handling now.

Also take the opportunity to add location tracking to user specifiers.

Authors: Kyotaro Horiguchi.  Heavily reworked by Álvaro Herrera.
Reviewed by: Rushabh Lathia, Adam Brightwell, Marti Raudsepp.
2015-03-09 15:41:54 -03:00
Tom Lane
1a0bc4c2bf Fix documentation for libpq's PQfn().
The SGML docs claimed that 1-byte integers could be sent or received with
the "isint" options, but no such behavior has ever been implemented in
pqGetInt() or pqPutInt().  The in-code documentation header for PQfn() was
even less in tune with reality, and the code itself used parameter names
matching neither the SGML docs nor its libpq-fe.h declaration.  Do a bit
of additional wordsmithing on the SGML docs while at it.

Since the business about 1-byte integers is a clear documentation bug,
back-patch to all supported branches.
2015-03-08 13:35:28 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
bb8582abf3 Remove rolcatupdate
This role attribute is an ancient PostgreSQL feature, but could only be
set by directly updating the system catalogs, and it doesn't have any
clearly defined use.

Author: Adam Brightwell <adam.brightwell@crunchydatasolutions.com>
2015-03-06 23:42:38 -05:00
Tom Lane
1345cc67bb Use standard casting mechanism to convert types in plpgsql, when possible.
plpgsql's historical method for converting datatypes during assignments was
to apply the source type's output function and then the destination type's
input function.  Aside from being miserably inefficient in most cases, this
method failed outright in many cases where a user might expect it to work;
an example is that "declare x int; ... x := 3.9;" would fail, not round the
value to 4.

Instead, let's convert by applying the appropriate assignment cast whenever
there is one.  To avoid breaking compatibility unnecessarily, fall back to
the I/O conversion method if there is no assignment cast.

So far as I can tell, there is just one case where this method produces a
different result than the old code in a case where the old code would not
have thrown an error.  That is assignment of a boolean value to a string
variable (type text, varchar, or bpchar); the old way gave boolean's output
representation, ie 't'/'f', while the new way follows the behavior of the
bool-to-text cast and so gives 'true' or 'false'.  This will need to be
called out as an incompatibility in the 9.5 release notes.

Aside from handling many conversion cases more sanely, this method is
often significantly faster than the old way.  In part that's because
of more effective caching of the conversion info.
2015-03-04 11:04:30 -05:00
Tom Lane
d147901174 Fix busted markup.
Evidently from commit 878fdcb843.
Per buildfarm.
2015-03-02 23:28:31 -05:00
Robert Haas
878fdcb843 pgbench: Add a real expression syntax to \set
Previously, you could do \set variable operand1 operator operand2, but
nothing more complicated.  Now, you can \set variable expression, which
makes it much simpler to do multi-step calculations here.  This also
adds support for the modulo operator (%), with the same semantics as in
C.

Robert Haas and Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Álvaro Herrera and
Stephen Frost
2015-03-02 14:21:41 -05:00
Stephen Frost
ebd092bc2a Fix pg_dump handling of extension config tables
Since 9.1, we've provided extensions with a way to denote
"configuration" tables- tables created by an extension which the user
may modify.  By marking these as "configuration" tables, the extension
is asking for the data in these tables to be pg_dump'd (tables which
are not marked in this way are assumed to be entirely handled during
CREATE EXTENSION and are not included at all in a pg_dump).

Unfortunately, pg_dump neglected to consider foreign key relationships
between extension configuration tables and therefore could end up
trying to reload the data in an order which would cause FK violations.

This patch teaches pg_dump about these dependencies, so that the data
dumped out is done so in the best order possible.  Note that there's no
way to handle circular dependencies, but those have yet to be seen in
the wild.

The release notes for this should include a caution to users that
existing pg_dump-based backups may be invalid due to this issue.  The
data is all there, but restoring from it will require extracting the
data for the configuration tables and then loading them in the correct
order by hand.

Discussed initially back in bug #6738, more recently brought up by
Gilles Darold, who provided an initial patch which was further reworked
by Michael Paquier.  Further modifications and documentation updates
by me.

Back-patch to 9.1 where we added the concept of extension configuration
tables.
2015-03-02 14:12:21 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
3f190f67eb Fix table_rewrite event trigger for ALTER TYPE/SET DATA TYPE CASCADE
When a composite type being used in a typed table is modified by way
of ALTER TYPE, a table rewrite occurs appearing to come from ALTER TYPE.
The existing event_trigger.c code was unable to cope with that
and raised a spurious error.  The fix is just to accept that command
tag for the event, and document this properly.

Noted while fooling with deparsing of DDL commands.  This appears to be
an oversight in commit 618c9430a.

Thanks to Mark Wong for documentation wording help.
2015-02-27 18:39:53 -03:00
Fujii Masao
a7920b872f Add note about how to make the SRF detoasted arguments live accross calls.
Andrew Gierth and Ali Akbar
2015-02-26 15:48:07 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
347c74320d Fix recovery_command -> restore_command typo in 8.3 release notes.
Kyotaro Horiguchi
2015-02-24 14:41:54 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
b007bee1f6 Fix invalid DocBook XML 2015-02-23 16:57:54 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
296f3a6053 Support more commands in event triggers
COMMENT, SECURITY LABEL, and GRANT/REVOKE now also fire
ddl_command_start and ddl_command_end event triggers, when they operate
on database-local objects.

Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Stephen Frost
2015-02-23 14:22:42 -03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
88e9823026 Replace checkpoint_segments with min_wal_size and max_wal_size.
Instead of having a single knob (checkpoint_segments) that both triggers
checkpoints, and determines how many checkpoints to recycle, they are now
separate concerns. There is still an internal variable called
CheckpointSegments, which triggers checkpoints. But it no longer determines
how many segments to recycle at a checkpoint. That is now auto-tuned by
keeping a moving average of the distance between checkpoints (in bytes),
and trying to keep that many segments in reserve. The advantage of this is
that you can set max_wal_size very high, but the system won't actually
consume that much space if there isn't any need for it. The min_wal_size
sets a floor for that; you can effectively disable the auto-tuning behavior
by setting min_wal_size equal to max_wal_size.

The max_wal_size setting is now the actual target size of WAL at which a
new checkpoint is triggered, instead of the distance between checkpoints.
Previously, you could calculate the actual WAL usage with the formula
"(2 + checkpoint_completion_target) * checkpoint_segments + 1". With this
patch, you set the desired WAL usage with max_wal_size, and the system
calculates the appropriate CheckpointSegments with the reverse of that
formula. That's a lot more intuitive for administrators to set.

Reviewed by Amit Kapila and Venkata Balaji N.
2015-02-23 18:53:02 +02:00
Fujii Masao
5d2b45e3f7 Add GUC to control the time to wait before retrieving WAL after failed attempt.
Previously when the standby server failed to retrieve WAL files from any sources
(i.e., streaming replication, local pg_xlog directory or WAL archive), it always
waited for five seconds (hard-coded) before the next attempt. For example,
this is problematic in warm-standby because restore_command can fail
every five seconds even while new WAL file is expected to be unavailable for
a long time and flood the log files with its error messages.

This commit adds new parameter, wal_retrieve_retry_interval, to control that
wait time.

Alexey Vasiliev and Michael Paquier, reviewed by Andres Freund and me.
2015-02-23 20:55:17 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
2a3f6e368b Fix potential deadlock with libpq non-blocking mode.
If libpq output buffer is full, pqSendSome() function tries to drain any
incoming data. This avoids deadlock, if the server e.g. sends a lot of
NOTICE messages, and blocks until we read them. However, pqSendSome() only
did that in blocking mode. In non-blocking mode, the deadlock could still
happen.

To fix, take a two-pronged approach:

1. Change the documentation to instruct that when PQflush() returns 1, you
should wait for both read- and write-ready, and call PQconsumeInput() if it
becomes read-ready. That fixes the deadlock, but applications are not going
to change overnight.

2. In pqSendSome(), drain the input buffer before returning 1. This
alleviates the problem for applications that only wait for write-ready. In
particular, a slow but steady stream of NOTICE messages during COPY FROM
STDIN will no longer cause a deadlock. The risk remains that the server
attempts to send a large burst of data and fills its output buffer, and at
the same time the client also sends enough data to fill its output buffer.
The application will deadlock if it goes to sleep, waiting for the socket
to become write-ready, before the server's data arrives. In practice,
NOTICE messages and such that the server might be sending are usually
short, so it's highly unlikely that the server would fill its output buffer
so quickly.

Backpatch to all supported versions.
2015-02-23 13:34:21 +02:00
Andres Freund
eb68379c38 Allow forcing nullness of columns during bootstrap.
Bootstrap determines whether a column is null based on simple builtin
rules. Those work surprisingly well, but nonetheless a few existing
columns aren't set correctly. Additionally there is at least one patch
sent to hackers where forcing the nullness of a column would be helpful.

The boostrap format has gained FORCE [NOT] NULL for this, which will be
emitted by genbki.pl when BKI_FORCE_(NOT_)?NULL is specified for a
column in a catalog header.

This patch doesn't change the marking of any existing columns.

Discussion: 20150215170014.GE15326@awork2.anarazel.de
2015-02-21 22:31:54 +01:00
Tom Lane
0627eff360 Don't need to explain [1] kluge anymore in xfunc.sgml. 2015-02-21 16:29:45 -05:00
Tom Lane
2fb7a75f37 Add pg_stat_get_snapshot_timestamp() to show statistics snapshot timestamp.
Per discussion, this could be useful for purposes such as programmatically
detecting a nonresponding stats collector.  We already have the timestamp
anyway, it's just a matter of providing a SQL-accessible function to fetch
it.

Matt Kelly, reviewed by Jim Nasby
2015-02-19 21:36:50 -05:00
Tom Lane
9bb955c828 Update assorted TOAST-related documentation.
While working on documentation for expanded arrays, I noticed a number of
details in the TOAST-related documentation that were already inaccurate or
obsolete.  This should be fixed independently of whether expanded arrays
get in or not.  One issue is that the already existing indirect-pointer
facility was not documented at all.  Also, the documentation says that you
only need to use VARSIZE/SET_VARSIZE if you've made your variable-length
type TOAST-aware, but actually we've forced that business on all varlena
types even if they've opted out of TOAST by setting storage = plain.
Wordsmith a few other things too, like an amusingly archaic claim that
there are few 64-bit machines.

I thought about back-patching this, but since all this doco is oriented
to hackers and C-coded extension authors, fixing it in HEAD is probably
good enough.
2015-02-18 22:33:39 -05:00
Tom Lane
2e105def09 Remove code to match IPv4 pg_hba.conf entries to IPv4-in-IPv6 addresses.
In investigating yesterday's crash report from Hugo Osvaldo Barrera, I only
looked back as far as commit f3aec2c7f5 where the breakage occurred
(which is why I thought the IPv4-in-IPv6 business was undocumented).  But
actually the logic dates back to commit 3c9bb8886d and was simply
broken by erroneous refactoring in the later commit.  A bit of archives
excavation shows that we added the whole business in response to a report
that some 2003-era Linux kernels would report IPv4 connections as having
IPv4-in-IPv6 addresses.  The fact that we've had no complaints since 9.0
seems to be sufficient confirmation that no modern kernels do that, so
let's just rip it all out rather than trying to fix it.

Do this in the back branches too, thus essentially deciding that our
effective behavior since 9.0 is correct.  If there are any platforms on
which the kernel reports IPv4-in-IPv6 addresses as such, yesterday's fix
would have made for a subtle and potentially security-sensitive change in
the effective meaning of IPv4 pg_hba.conf entries, which does not seem like
a good thing to do in minor releases.  So let's let the post-9.0 behavior
stand, and change the documentation to match it.

In passing, I failed to resist the temptation to wordsmith the description
of pg_hba.conf IPv4 and IPv6 address entries a bit.  A lot of this text
hasn't been touched since we were IPv4-only.
2015-02-17 12:49:18 -05:00
Fujii Masao
cef30974de Correct the path of pg_lzcompress.c in doc.
Commit 40bede5 moved pg_lzcompress.c to src/common, but forgot to
update its path in doc. This commit fixes that oversight.
2015-02-16 14:50:13 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan
c5b31e29f0 Minor housekeeping on JSON docs. 2015-02-15 17:08:37 -05:00
Andres Freund
8785e6e378 Fix typo in logicaldecoding.sgml.
Author: Tatsuo Ishii

Backpatch to 9.4, where logicaldecoding was introduced.
2015-02-12 01:25:35 +01:00
Michael Meskes
1f393fc923 Fixed array handling in ecpg.
When ecpg was rewritten to the new protocol version not all variable types
were corrected. This patch rewrites the code for these types to fix that. It
also fixes the documentation to correctly tell the status of array handling.
2015-02-10 12:04:10 +01:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ff16b40f8c Report WAL flush, not insert, position in replication IDENTIFY_SYSTEM
When beginning streaming replication, the client usually issues the
IDENTIFY_SYSTEM command, which used to return the current WAL insert
position. That's not suitable for the intended purpose of that field,
however. pg_receivexlog uses it to start replication from the reported
point, but if it hasn't been flushed to disk yet, it will fail. Change
IDENTIFY_SYSTEM to report the flush position instead.

Backpatch to 9.1 and above. 9.0 doesn't report any WAL position.
2015-02-06 11:26:50 +02:00
Fujii Masao
c036edb7b3 doc: Fix markup
Ian Barwick
2015-02-04 19:00:09 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
91fa7b4719 Add API functions to libpq to interrogate SSL related stuff.
This makes it possible to query for things like the SSL version and cipher
used, without depending on OpenSSL functions or macros. That is a good
thing if we ever get another SSL implementation.

PQgetssl() still works, but it should be considered as deprecated as it
only works with OpenSSL. In particular, PQgetSslInUse() should be used to
check if a connection uses SSL, because as soon as we have another
implementation, PQgetssl() will return NULL even if SSL is in use.
2015-02-03 19:57:52 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
507627f5b5 Rephrase the documentation on pg_receivexlog --synchronous option.
The old wording talked about a "sync command", meaining fsync(), but it
was not very clear.
2015-02-03 10:37:44 +02:00
Robert Haas
5d2f957f3f Add new function BackgroundWorkerInitializeConnectionByOid.
Sometimes it's useful for a background worker to be able to initialize
its database connection by OID rather than by name, so provide a way
to do that.
2015-02-02 16:23:59 -05:00
Tom Lane
2488eff889 Last-minute updates for release notes.
Add entries for security issues.

Security: CVE-2015-0241 through CVE-2015-0244
2015-02-02 11:23:59 -05:00
Tom Lane
f9ee8ea10a Doc: fix syntax description for psql's \setenv.
The variable name isn't optional --- looks like a copy-and-paste-o from
the \set command, where it is.

Dilip Kumar
2015-02-02 00:18:54 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
1332bbb30c doc: Improve claim about location of pg_service.conf
The previous wording claimed that the file was always in /etc, but of
course this varies with the installation layout.  Write instead that it
can be found via `pg_config --sysconfdir`.  Even though this is still
somewhat incorrect because it doesn't account of moved installations, it
at least conveys that the location depends on the installation.
2015-02-01 22:36:44 -05:00
Tom Lane
21fe4e2b6e Release notes for 9.4.1, 9.3.6, 9.2.10, 9.1.15, 9.0.19. 2015-02-01 16:50:31 -05:00
Tom Lane
b7d254c079 Fix documentation of psql's ECHO all mode.
"ECHO all" is ignored for interactive input, and has been for a very long
time, though possibly not for as long as the documentation has claimed the
opposite.  Fix that, and also note that empty lines aren't echoed, which
while dubious is another longstanding behavior (it's embedded in our
regression test files for one thing).  Per bug #12721 from Hans Ginzel.

In HEAD, also improve the code comments in this area, and suppress an
unnecessary fflush(stdout) when we're not echoing.  That would likely
be safe to back-patch, but I'll not risk it mere hours before a release
wrap.
2015-01-31 18:35:13 -05:00
Tom Lane
77e9125e84 First-draft release notes for 9.4.1 et al.
As usual, the release notes for older branches will be made by cutting
these down, but put them up for community review first.

Note: a significant fraction of these items don't apply to 9.4.1, only to
older branches, because the fixes already appeared in 9.4.0.  These can be
distinguished by noting the branch commits in the associated SGML comments.
This will be adjusted tomorrow while copying items into the older
release-X.Y.sgml files.  In a few cases I've made two separate entries with
different wordings for 9.4 than for the equivalent commits in the older
branches.
2015-01-31 17:30:30 -05:00
Stephen Frost
3144e1b3c6 Policy documentation improvements
In ALTER POLICY, use 'check_expression' instead of 'expression' for the
parameter, to match up with the recent CREATE POLICY change.

In CREATE POLICY, frame the discussion as granting access to rows
instead of limiting access to rows.  Further, clarify that the
expression must return true for rows to be visible/allowed and that a
false or NULL result will mean the row is not visible/allowed.

Per discussion with Dean Rasheed and Robert.
2015-01-30 16:09:41 -05:00
Tom Lane
451d280815 Fix jsonb Unicode escape processing, and in consequence disallow \u0000.
We've been trying to support \u0000 in JSON values since commit
78ed8e03c6, and have introduced increasingly worse hacks to try to
make it work, such as commit 0ad1a81632.  However, it fundamentally
can't work in the way envisioned, because the stored representation looks
the same as for \\u0000 which is not the same thing at all.  It's also
entirely bogus to output \u0000 when de-escaped output is called for.

The right way to do this would be to store an actual 0x00 byte, and then
throw error only if asked to produce de-escaped textual output.  However,
getting to that point seems likely to take considerable work and may well
never be practical in the 9.4.x series.

To preserve our options for better behavior while getting rid of the nasty
side-effects of 0ad1a81632, revert that commit in toto and instead
throw error if \u0000 is used in a context where it needs to be de-escaped.
(These are the same contexts where non-ASCII Unicode escapes throw error
if the database encoding isn't UTF8, so this behavior is by no means
without precedent.)

In passing, make both the \u0000 case and the non-ASCII Unicode case report
ERRCODE_UNTRANSLATABLE_CHARACTER / "unsupported Unicode escape sequence"
rather than claiming there's something wrong with the input syntax.

Back-patch to 9.4, where we have to do something because 0ad1a81632
broke things for many cases having nothing to do with \u0000.  9.3 also has
bogus behavior, but only for that specific escape value, so given the lack
of field complaints it seems better to leave 9.3 alone.
2015-01-30 14:44:56 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
e40d43f88e doc: Remove superfluous table column 2015-01-30 13:30:35 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
e77043055f doc: clarify libpq's 'verify-full' host name check
Report by David Guyot
2015-01-29 21:20:27 -05:00
Stephen Frost
1c993b3ace Reword CREATE POLICY parameter descriptions
The parameter description for the using_expression and check_expression
in CREATE POLICY were unclear and arguably included a typo.  Clarify
and improve the consistency of that language.

Pointed out by Dean Rasheed.
2015-01-28 23:21:54 -05:00
Stephen Frost
bb541812b8 CREATE POLICY expression -> using_expression
The syntax for CREATE POLICY simply used "expression" for the USING
expression, while the WITH CHECK expression was "check_expression".
Given that we have two expressions, it's sensible to explcitly name both
to maintain clarity.

This patch simply changes the generic "expression" to be
"using_expression".

Pointed out by Peter Geoghegan.
2015-01-28 22:59:03 -05:00
Stephen Frost
42f66b2756 Improve CREATE POLICY documentation
The CREATE POLICY documention didn't sufficiently clarify what happens
when a given command type (eg: ALL or UPDATE) accepts both USING and
WITH CHECK clauses, but only the USING clause is defined.  Add language
to clarify that, in such a case, the USING clause will be used for both
USING and WITH CHECK cases.

Pointed out by Peter Geoghegan.
2015-01-28 22:16:24 -05:00
Stephen Frost
c7cf9a2433 Add usebypassrls to pg_user and pg_shadow
The row level security patches didn't add the 'usebypassrls' columns to
the pg_user and pg_shadow views on the belief that they were deprecated,
but we havn't actually said they are and therefore we should include it.

This patch corrects that, adds missing documentation for rolbypassrls
into the system catalog page for pg_authid, along with the entries for
pg_user and pg_shadow, and cleans up a few other uses of 'row-level'
cases to be 'row level' in the docs.

Pointed out by Amit Kapila.

Catalog version bump due to system view changes.
2015-01-28 21:47:15 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
670bf71f65 Remove dead NULL-pointer checks in GiST code.
gist_poly_compress() and gist_circle_compress() checked for a NULL-pointer
key argument, but that was dead code; the gist code never passes a
NULL-pointer to the "compress" method.

This commit also removes a documentation note added in commit a0a3883,
about doing NULL-pointer checks in the "compress" method. It was added
based on the fact that some implementations were doing NULL-pointer
checks, but those checks were unnecessary in the first place.

The NULL-pointer check in gbt_var_same() function was also unnecessary.
The arguments to the "same" method come from the "compress", "union", or
"picksplit" methods, but none of them return a NULL pointer.

None of this is to be confused with SQL NULL values. Those are dealt with
by the gist machinery, and are never passed to the GiST opclass methods.

Michael Paquier
2015-01-28 10:03:58 +02:00
Tom Lane
fd496129d1 Clean up some mess in row-security patches.
Fix unsafe coding around PG_TRY in RelationBuildRowSecurity: can't change
a variable inside PG_TRY and then use it in PG_CATCH without marking it
"volatile".  In this case though it seems saner to avoid that by doing
a single assignment before entering the TRY block.

I started out just intending to fix that, but the more I looked at the
row-security code the more distressed I got.  This patch also fixes
incorrect construction of the RowSecurityPolicy cache entries (there was
not sufficient care taken to copy pass-by-ref data into the cache memory
context) and a whole bunch of sloppiness around the definition and use of
pg_policy.polcmd.  You can't use nulls in that column because initdb will
mark it NOT NULL --- and I see no particular reason why a null entry would
be a good idea anyway, so changing initdb's behavior is not the right
answer.  The internal value of '\0' wouldn't be suitable in a "char" column
either, so after a bit of thought I settled on using '*' to represent ALL.
Chasing those changes down also revealed that somebody wasn't paying
attention to what the underlying values of ACL_UPDATE_CHR etc really were,
and there was a great deal of lackadaiscalness in the catalogs.sgml
documentation for pg_policy and pg_policies too.

This doesn't pretend to be a complete code review for the row-security
stuff, it just fixes the things that were in my face while dealing with
the bugs in RelationBuildRowSecurity.
2015-01-24 16:16:22 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
a179232047 vacuumdb: enable parallel mode
This mode allows vacuumdb to open several server connections to vacuum
or analyze several tables simultaneously.

Author: Dilip Kumar.  Some reworking by Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed by: Jeff Janes, Amit Kapila, Magnus Hagander, Andres Freund
2015-01-23 15:02:45 -03:00
Bruce Momjian
b04d691613 docs: update libpq's PQputCopyData and PQputCopyEnd
Clarify the meaning of libpq return values for PQputCopyData and
PQputCopyEnd, particularly in non-blocking mode.

Report by Robert Haas
2015-01-22 13:30:08 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
412f604adb doc: Fix typos in make_timestamp{,tz} examples
Pointed out by Alan Mogi (bug #12571)
2015-01-19 12:43:58 -03:00
Robert Haas
73a8f5176a docs: Add missing <literal> markup.
Michael Paquier
2015-01-14 16:40:58 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
62f5e447fd docs: improve CREATE TRIGGER defer options list
Report by Jeff Davis
2015-01-09 19:19:29 -05:00
Robert Haas
39f2594ba5 docs: Reword CREATE POLICY documentation. 2015-01-07 14:49:59 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
4baaf863ec Update copyright for 2015
Backpatch certain files through 9.0
2015-01-06 11:43:47 -05:00
Tom Lane
d6657d2a10 Treat negative values of recovery_min_apply_delay as having no effect.
At one point in the development of this feature, it was claimed that
allowing negative values would be useful to compensate for timezone
differences between master and slave servers.  That was based on a mistaken
assumption that commit timestamps are recorded in local time; but of course
they're in UTC.  Nor is a negative apply delay likely to be a sane way of
coping with server clock skew.  However, the committed patch still treated
negative delays as doing something, and the timezone misapprehension
survived in the user documentation as well.

If recovery_min_apply_delay were a proper GUC we'd just set the minimum
allowed value to be zero; but for the moment it seems better to treat
negative settings as if they were zero.

In passing do some extra wordsmithing on the parameter's documentation,
including correcting a second misstatement that the parameter affects
processing of Restore Point records.

Issue noted by Michael Paquier, who also provided the code patch; doc
changes by me.  Back-patch to 9.4 where the feature was introduced.
2015-01-03 13:14:03 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
f9769c719f Make path to pg_service.conf absolute in documentation
The system file is always in the absolute path /etc/, not relative.

David Fetter
2015-01-03 13:18:54 +01:00
Tom Lane
2f03ae6987 Docs: improve descriptions of ISO week-numbering date features.
Use the phraseology "ISO 8601 week-numbering year" in place of just
"ISO year", and make related adjustments to other terminology.

The point of this change is that it seems some people see "ISO year"
and think "standard year", whereupon they're surprised when constructs
like to_char(..., "IYYY-MM-DD") produce nonsensical results.  Perhaps
hanging a few more adjectives on it will discourage them from jumping
to false conclusions.  I put in an explicit warning against that
specific usage, too, though the main point is to discourage people
who haven't read this far down the page.

In passing fix some nearby markup and terminology inconsistencies.
2014-12-31 16:42:42 -05:00
Tom Lane
28551797a4 Improve consistency of parsing of psql's magic variables.
For simple boolean variables such as ON_ERROR_STOP, psql has for a long
time recognized variant spellings of "on" and "off" (such as "1"/"0"),
and it also made a point of warning you if you'd misspelled the setting.
But these conveniences did not exist for other keyword-valued variables.
In particular, though ECHO_HIDDEN and ON_ERROR_ROLLBACK include "on" and
"off" as possible values, none of the alternative spellings for those were
recognized; and to make matters worse the code would just silently assume
"on" was meant for any unrecognized spelling.  Several people have reported
getting bitten by this, so let's fix it.  In detail, this patch:

* Allows all spellings recognized by ParseVariableBool() for ECHO_HIDDEN
and ON_ERROR_ROLLBACK.

* Reports a warning for unrecognized values for COMP_KEYWORD_CASE, ECHO,
ECHO_HIDDEN, HISTCONTROL, ON_ERROR_ROLLBACK, and VERBOSITY.

* Recognizes all values for all these variables case-insensitively;
previously there was a mishmash of case-sensitive and case-insensitive
behaviors.

Back-patch to all supported branches.  There is a small risk of breaking
existing scripts that were accidentally failing to malfunction; but the
consensus is that the chance of detecting real problems and preventing
future mistakes outweighs this.
2014-12-31 12:18:50 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
72dd233d3e pg_event_trigger_dropped_objects: Add name/args output columns
These columns can be passed to pg_get_object_address() and used to
reconstruct the dropped objects identities in a remote server containing
similar objects, so that the drop can be replicated.

Reviewed by Stephen Frost, Heikki Linnakangas, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Andres
Freund.
2014-12-30 17:41:46 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
a676201490 Add pg_identify_object_as_address
This function returns object type and objname/objargs arrays, which can
be passed to pg_get_object_address.  This is especially useful because
the textual representation can be copied to a remote server in order to
obtain the corresponding OID-based address.  In essence, this function
is the inverse of recently added pg_get_object_address().

Catalog version bumped due to the addition of the new function.

Also add docs to pg_get_object_address.
2014-12-30 15:41:50 -03:00
Tom Lane
ae17897ce8 Assorted minor fixes for psql metacommand docs.
Document the long forms of \H \i \ir \o \p \r \w ... apparently, we have
a long and dishonorable history of leaving out the unabbreviated names of
psql backslash commands.

Avoid saying "Unix shell"; we can just say "shell" with equal clarity,
and not leave Windows users wondering whether the feature works for them.

Improve consistency of documentation of \g \o \w metacommands.  There's
no reason to use slightly different wording or markup for each one.
2014-12-29 14:20:54 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
a609d96778 Revert "Use a bitmask to represent role attributes"
This reverts commit 1826987a46.

The overall design was deemed unacceptable, in discussion following the
previous commit message; we might find some parts of it still
salvageable, but I don't want to be on the hook for fixing it, so let's
wait until we have a new patch.
2014-12-23 15:35:49 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
1826987a46 Use a bitmask to represent role attributes
The previous representation using a boolean column for each attribute
would not scale as well as we want to add further attributes.

Extra auxilliary functions are added to go along with this change, to
make up for the lost convenience of access of the old representation.

Catalog version bumped due to change in catalogs and the new functions.

Author: Adam Brightwell, minor tweaks by Álvaro
Reviewed by: Stephen Frost, Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera
2014-12-23 10:22:09 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
7eca575d1c get_object_address: separate domain constraints from table constraints
Apart from enabling comments on domain constraints, this enables a
future project to replicate object dropping to remote servers: with the
current mechanism there's no way to distinguish between the two types of
constraints, so there's no way to know what to drop.

Also added support for the domain constraint comments in psql's \dd and
pg_dump.

Catalog version bumped due to the change in ObjectType enum.
2014-12-23 09:06:44 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
584e35d17c Change local_preload_libraries to PGC_USERSET
This allows it to be used with ALTER ROLE SET.

Although the old setting of PGC_BACKEND prevented changes after session
start, after discussion it was more useful to allow ALTER ROLE SET
instead and just document that changes during a session have no effect.
This is similar to how session_preload_libraries works already.

An alternative would be to change things to allow PGC_BACKEND and
PGC_SU_BACKEND settings to be changed by ALTER ROLE SET.  But that might
need further research (e.g., log_connections would probably not work).

based on patch by Kyotaro Horiguchi
2014-12-22 23:05:46 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
2a3f2743f2 Further tidy up on json aggregate documentation 2014-12-22 18:30:46 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
b2d145bff0 Fix documentation of argument type of json_agg and jsonb_agg
json_agg was originally designed to aggregate records. However, it soon
became clear that it is useful for aggregating all kinds of values and
that's what we have on 9.3 and 9.4, and in head for it and jsonb_agg.
The documentation suggested otherwise, so this fixes it.
2014-12-22 14:12:06 -05:00
Tom Lane
699300a146 Docs: clarify treatment of variadic functions with zero variadic arguments.
Explain that you have to use "VARIADIC ARRAY[]" to pass an empty array
to a variadic parameter position.  This was already implicit in the text
but it seems better to spell it out.

Per a suggestion from David Johnston, though I didn't use his proposed
wording.  Back-patch to all supported branches.
2014-12-21 15:30:57 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
cfb64fde7b doc: Adjust wording of ALTER TABLESPACE restriction
Report by Noah Misch
2014-12-19 20:56:03 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
0ee98d1cbf pg_event_trigger_dropped_objects: add behavior flags
Add "normal" and "original" flags as output columns to the
pg_event_trigger_dropped_objects() function.  With this it's possible to
distinguish which objects, among those listed, need to be explicitely
referenced when trying to replicate a deletion.

This is necessary so that the list of objects can be pruned to the
minimum necessary to replicate the DROP command in a remote server that
might have slightly different schema (for instance, TOAST tables and
constraints with different names and such.)

Catalog version bumped due to change of function definition.

Reviewed by: Abhijit Menon-Sen, Stephen Frost, Heikki Linnakangas,
Robert Haas.
2014-12-19 15:00:45 -03:00
Tom Lane
5b51683589 Improve documentation about CASE and constant subexpressions.
The possibility that constant subexpressions of a CASE might be evaluated
at planning time was touched on in 9.17.1 (CASE expressions), but it really
ought to be explained in 4.2.14 (Expression Evaluation Rules) which is the
primary discussion of such topics.  Add text and an example there, and
revise the <note> under CASE to link there.

Back-patch to all supported branches, since it's acted like this for a
long time (though 9.2+ is probably worse because of its more aggressive
use of constant-folding via replanning of nominally-prepared statements).
Pre-9.4, also back-patch text added in commit 0ce627d4 about CASE versus
aggregate functions.

Tom Lane and David Johnston, per discussion of bug #12273.
2014-12-18 16:39:20 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
35192f0626 Have VACUUM log number of skipped pages due to pins
Author: Jim Nasby, some kibitzing by Heikki Linnankangas.
Discussion leading to current behavior and precise wording fueled by
thoughts from Robert Haas and Andres Freund.
2014-12-18 17:18:33 -03:00
Noah Misch
f6dc6dd5ba Lock down regression testing temporary clusters on Windows.
Use SSPI authentication to allow connections exclusively from the OS
user that launched the test suite.  This closes on Windows the
vulnerability that commit be76a6d39e
closed on other platforms.  Users of "make installcheck" or custom test
harnesses can run "pg_regress --config-auth=DATADIR" to activate the
same authentication configuration that "make check" would use.
Back-patch to 9.0 (all supported versions).

Security: CVE-2014-0067
2014-12-17 22:48:40 -05:00
Tom Lane
fc2ac1fb41 Allow CHECK constraints to be placed on foreign tables.
As with NOT NULL constraints, we consider that such constraints are merely
reports of constraints that are being enforced by the remote server (or
other underlying storage mechanism).  Their only real use is to allow
planner optimizations, for example in constraint-exclusion checks.  Thus,
the code changes here amount to little more than removal of the error that
was formerly thrown for applying CHECK to a foreign table.

(In passing, do a bit of cleanup of the ALTER FOREIGN TABLE reference page,
which had accumulated some weird decisions about ordering etc.)

Shigeru Hanada and Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by Kyotaro Horiguchi and
Ashutosh Bapat.
2014-12-17 17:00:53 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
6964ad95d7 Add missing documentation for some vcregress modes
Michael Paquier
2014-12-17 11:14:34 +01:00
Magnus Hagander
cb7b5c5c6f Remove redundant sentence
Spotted by David Johnston
2014-12-17 09:59:21 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
6457ff93fe doc: Add link to how to specify time zone names to initdb man page 2014-12-14 20:02:04 -05:00
Tom Lane
af06aa822d Improve documentation around parameter-setting and ALTER SYSTEM.
The ALTER SYSTEM ref page hadn't been held to a very high standard, nor
was the feature well integrated into section 18.1 (parameter setting).
Also, though commit 4c4654afe had improved the structure of 18.1, it also
introduced a lot of poor wording, imprecision, and outright falsehoods.
Try to clean that up.
2014-12-14 18:09:51 -05:00
Tom Lane
0923b01e3e Update 9.4 release notes.
Set release date, do a final pass of wordsmithing, improve some other
new-in-9.4 documentation.
2014-12-14 14:58:03 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
c50423c0fe doc: Fix markup 2014-12-13 14:16:16 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
e39b6f953e Add CINE option for CREATE TABLE AS and CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW
Fabrízio de Royes Mello reviewed by Rushabh Lathia.
2014-12-13 13:56:09 -05:00
Tom Lane
e311cd6ded Improve recovery target settings documentation.
Commit 815d71dee hadn't bothered to update the documentation to match the
behavioral change, and a lot of other text in this section was badly in
need of copy-editing.
2014-12-13 13:46:44 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
7e354ab9fe Add several generator functions for jsonb that exist for json.
The functions are:
    to_jsonb()
    jsonb_object()
    jsonb_build_object()
    jsonb_build_array()
    jsonb_agg()
    jsonb_object_agg()

Also along the way some better logic is implemented in
json_categorize_type() to match that in the newly implemented
jsonb_categorize_type().

Andrew Dunstan, reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Alvaro Herrera.
2014-12-12 15:31:14 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
237a882443 Add json_strip_nulls and jsonb_strip_nulls functions.
The functions remove object fields, including in nested objects, that
have null as a value. In certain cases this can lead to considerably
smaller datums, with no loss of semantic information.

Andrew Dunstan, reviewed by Pavel Stehule.
2014-12-12 09:00:43 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
7afc2336cd doc: Move website-stylesheet setting to a more appropriate location 2014-12-11 21:48:01 -05:00
Simon Riggs
fe263d115a REINDEX SCHEMA
Add new SCHEMA option to REINDEX and reindexdb.

Sawada Masahiko

Reviewed by Michael Paquier and Fabrízio de Royes Mello
2014-12-09 00:28:00 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
611d46ea67 doc: Fix DocBook table column count declaration
This was broken in 618c9430a8.
2014-12-08 02:18:29 -05:00
Simon Riggs
da71632fcf Correct recovery_target_action docs
From Michael Paquier
2014-12-08 09:28:24 +09:00
Simon Riggs
618c9430a8 Event Trigger for table_rewrite
Generate a table_rewrite event when ALTER TABLE
attempts to rewrite a table. Provide helper
functions to identify table and reason.

Intended use case is to help assess or to react
to schema changes that might hold exclusive locks
for long periods.

Dimitri Fontaine, triggering an edit by Simon Riggs

Reviewed in detail by Michael Paquier
2014-12-08 00:55:28 +09:00
Andres Freund
5ede3a3117 Document that pg_stat_*_tables.n_tup_upd includes n_tup_hot_upd.
Author: Peter Geoghegan
2014-12-04 23:55:19 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
eb1c3f4786 Remove USE_VPATH make variable from PGXS
The user can just set VPATH directly.  There is no need to invent
another variable.
2014-12-04 08:07:41 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
182362b669 doc: Fix markup
In the spirit of d34b48a021

Per buildfarm member guaibasaurus, via Stefan Kaltenbrunner.
2014-12-03 16:23:38 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
73c986adde Keep track of transaction commit timestamps
Transactions can now set their commit timestamp directly as they commit,
or an external transaction commit timestamp can be fed from an outside
system using the new function TransactionTreeSetCommitTsData().  This
data is crash-safe, and truncated at Xid freeze point, same as pg_clog.

This module is disabled by default because it causes a performance hit,
but can be enabled in postgresql.conf requiring only a server restart.

A new test in src/test/modules is included.

Catalog version bumped due to the new subdirectory within PGDATA and a
couple of new SQL functions.

Authors: Álvaro Herrera and Petr Jelínek

Reviewed to varying degrees by Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Robert
Haas, Amit Kapila, Fujii Masao, Jaime Casanova, Simon Riggs, Steven
Singer, Peter Eisentraut
2014-12-03 11:53:02 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
b52cb4690e pageinspect/BRIN: minor tweaks
Michael Paquier

Double-dash additions suggested by Peter Geoghegan
2014-12-02 12:20:50 -03:00
Magnus Hagander
6d6cade05b Fix missing space in documentation
Ian Barwick
2014-12-01 12:12:07 +01:00
Alvaro Herrera
22dfd116a1 Move test modules from contrib to src/test/modules
This is advance preparation for introducing even more test modules; the
easy solution is to add them to contrib, but that's bloated enough that
it seems a good time to think of something different.

Moved modules are dummy_seclabel, test_shm_mq, test_parser and
worker_spi.

(test_decoding was also a candidate, but there was too much opposition
to moving that one.  We can always reconsider later.)
2014-11-29 23:55:00 -03:00
Noah Misch
5b12987b2e Remove PQhostaddr() from 9.4 release notes.
Back-patch to 9.4, like the feature's removal.
2014-11-29 15:53:05 -05:00
Noah Misch
2cda889984 Revert "Add libpq function PQhostaddr()."
This reverts commit 9f80f4835a.  The
function returned the raw value of a connection parameter, a task served
by PQconninfo().  The next commit will reimplement the psql \conninfo
change that way.  Back-patch to 9.4, where that commit first appeared.
2014-11-29 12:31:21 -05:00
Stephen Frost
143b39c185 Rename pg_rowsecurity -> pg_policy and other fixes
As pointed out by Robert, we should really have named pg_rowsecurity
pg_policy, as the objects stored in that catalog are policies.  This
patch fixes that and updates the column names to start with 'pol' to
match the new catalog name.

The security consideration for COPY with row level security, also
pointed out by Robert, has also been addressed by remembering and
re-checking the OID of the relation initially referenced during COPY
processing, to make sure it hasn't changed under us by the time we
finish planning out the query which has been built.

Robert and Alvaro also commented on missing OCLASS and OBJECT entries
for POLICY (formerly ROWSECURITY or POLICY, depending) in various
places.  This patch fixes that too, which also happens to add the
ability to COMMENT on policies.

In passing, attempt to improve the consistency of messages, comments,
and documentation as well.  This removes various incarnations of
'row-security', 'row-level security', 'Row-security', etc, in favor
of 'policy', 'row level security' or 'row_security' as appropriate.

Happy Thanksgiving!
2014-11-27 01:15:57 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
e6f0a48a60 doc: Fix markup 2014-11-25 22:21:23 -05:00
Simon Riggs
b7a715800a Remove extraneous SGML tag 2014-11-25 20:51:13 +00:00
Simon Riggs
aedccb1f6f action_at_recovery_target recovery config option
action_at_recovery_target = pause | promote | shutdown

Petr Jelinek

Reviewed by Muhammad Asif Naeem, Fujji Masao and
Simon Riggs
2014-11-25 20:13:30 +00:00
Tom Lane
bac27394a1 Support arrays as input to array_agg() and ARRAY(SELECT ...).
These cases formerly failed with errors about "could not find array type
for data type".  Now they yield arrays of the same element type and one
higher dimension.

The implementation involves creating functions with API similar to the
existing accumArrayResult() family.  I (tgl) also extended the base family
by adding an initArrayResult() function, which allows callers to avoid
special-casing the zero-inputs case if they just want an empty array as
result.  (Not all do, so the previous calling convention remains valid.)
This allowed simplifying some existing code in xml.c and plperl.c.

Ali Akbar, reviewed by Pavel Stehule, significantly modified by me
2014-11-25 12:21:28 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
add1b052e2 Allow "dbname" from connection string to be overridden in PQconnectDBParams
If the "dbname" attribute in PQconnectDBParams contained a connection string
or URI (and expand_dbname = TRUE), the database name from the connection
string could not be overridden by a subsequent "dbname" keyword in the
array. That was not intentional; all other options can be overridden.
Furthermore, any subsequent "dbname" caused the connection string from the
first dbname value to be processed again, overriding any values for the same
options that were given between the connection string and the second dbname
option.

In the passing, clarify in the docs that only the first dbname option in the
array is parsed as a connection string.

Alex Shulgin. Backpatch to all supported versions.
2014-11-25 17:39:44 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
3a82bc6f8a Add pageinspect functions for inspecting GIN indexes.
Patch by me, Peter Geoghegan and Michael Paquier, reviewed by Amit Kapila.
2014-11-21 11:58:07 +02:00
Tom Lane
8372304e35 Improve documentation's description of JOIN clauses.
In bug #12000, Andreas Kunert complained that the documentation was
misleading in saying "FROM T1 CROSS JOIN T2 is equivalent to FROM T1, T2".
That's correct as far as it goes, but the equivalence doesn't hold when
you consider three or more tables, since JOIN binds more tightly than
comma.  I added a <note> to explain this, and ended up rearranging some
of the existing text so that the note would make sense in context.

In passing, rewrite the description of JOIN USING, which was unnecessarily
vague, and hadn't been helped any by somebody's reliance on markup as a
substitute for clear writing.  (Mostly this involved reintroducing a
concrete example that was unaccountably removed by commit 032f3b7e166cfa28.)

Back-patch to all supported branches.
2014-11-19 16:00:24 -05:00
Simon Riggs
be1cc8f46f Add pg_dump --snapshot option
Allows pg_dump to use a snapshot previously defined by a concurrent
session that has either used pg_export_snapshot() or obtained a
snapshot when creating a logical slot. When this option is used with
parallel pg_dump, the snapshot defined by this option is used and no
new snapshot is taken.

Simon Riggs and Michael Paquier
2014-11-17 22:15:07 +00:00
Tom Lane
832054044f Update 9.4 release notes for commits through today. 2014-11-17 14:47:10 -05:00
Fujii Masao
c4f99d2029 Add --synchronous option to pg_receivexlog, for more reliable WAL writing.
Previously pg_receivexlog flushed WAL data only when WAL file was switched.
Then 3dad73e added -F option to pg_receivexlog so that users could control
how frequently sync commands were issued to WAL files. It also allowed users
to make pg_receivexlog flush WAL data immediately after writing by
specifying 0 in -F option. However feedback messages were not sent back
immediately even after a flush location was updated. So even if WAL data
was flushed in real time, the server could not see that for a while.

This commit removes -F option from and adds --synchronous to pg_receivexlog.
If --synchronous is specified, like the standby's wal receiver, pg_receivexlog
flushes WAL data as soon as there is WAL data which has not been flushed yet.
Then it sends back the feedback message identifying the latest flush location
to the server. This option is useful to make pg_receivexlog behave as sync
standby by using replication slot, for example.

Original patch by Furuya Osamu, heavily rewritten by me.
Reviewed by Heikki Linnakangas, Alvaro Herrera and Sawada Masahiko.
2014-11-18 02:32:48 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
d883b916a9 Mention the TZ environment variable for initdb
Daniel Gustafsson
2014-11-16 15:48:47 +01:00
Magnus Hagander
386c9b7383 Restructure doc sections about statistics views
Break out the "dynamic statistics" views in the table from the
"collected statistics" ones. Could do with some more refactoring,
but this is a start.
2014-11-16 13:49:03 +01:00
Tom Lane
0ce627d465 Document evaluation-order considerations for aggregate functions.
The SELECT reference page didn't really address the question of when
aggregate function evaluation occurs, nor did the "expression evaluation
rules" documentation mention that CASE can't be used to control whether
an aggregate gets evaluated or not.  Improve that.

Per discussion of bug #11661.  Original text by Marti Raudsepp and Michael
Paquier, rewritten significantly by me.
2014-11-14 17:19:56 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
79172a58ea Document BRIN's pages_per_range in CREATE INDEX
Author: Michael Paquier
2014-11-14 17:36:10 -03:00
Stephen Frost
155c0f24b7 Revert change to ALTER TABLESPACE summary.
When ALTER TABLESPACE MOVE ALL was changed to be ALTER TABLE ALL IN
TABLESPACE, the ALTER TABLESPACE summary should have been adjusted back
to its original definition.

Patch by Thom Brown (thanks!).
2014-11-14 15:16:01 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
35fed51626 Tweak row-level locking documentation
Move the meat of locking levels to mvcc.sgml, leaving only a link to it
in the SELECT reference page.

Michael Paquier, with some tweaks by Álvaro
2014-11-13 14:45:55 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
1d69ae419d doc: Add index entry for "hypothetical-set aggregate" 2014-11-13 11:57:50 -05:00
Fujii Masao
c291503b1c Rename pending_list_cleanup_size to gin_pending_list_limit.
Since this parameter is only for GIN index, it's better to
add "gin" to the parameter name for easier understanding.
2014-11-13 12:14:48 +09:00
Fujii Masao
1871c89202 Add generate_series(numeric, numeric).
Платон Малюгин
Reviewed by Michael Paquier, Ali Akbar and Marti Raudsepp
2014-11-11 21:44:46 +09:00
Fujii Masao
a1b395b6a2 Add GUC and storage parameter to set the maximum size of GIN pending list.
Previously the maximum size of GIN pending list was controlled only by
work_mem. But the reasonable value of work_mem and the reasonable size
of the list are basically not the same, so it was not appropriate to
control both of them by only one GUC, i.e., work_mem. This commit
separates new GUC, pending_list_cleanup_size, from work_mem to allow
users to control only the size of the list.

Also this commit adds pending_list_cleanup_size as new storage parameter
to allow users to specify the size of the list per index. This is useful,
for example, when users want to increase the size of the list only for
the GIN index which can be updated heavily, and decrease it otherwise.

Reviewed by Etsuro Fujita.
2014-11-11 21:08:21 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
1e0b4365c2 Further code and wording tweaks in BRIN
Besides a couple of typo fixes, per David Rowley, Thom Brown, and Amit
Langote, and mentions of BRIN in the general CREATE INDEX page again per
David, this includes silencing MSVC compiler warnings (thanks Microsoft)
and an additional variable initialization per Coverity scanner.
2014-11-10 15:56:08 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
552faefd68 doc: Update pg_receivexlog note
The old note about how to use pg_receivexlog as an alternative to
archive_command was obsoleted by replication slots.
2014-11-07 20:15:22 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
7516f52594 BRIN: Block Range Indexes
BRIN is a new index access method intended to accelerate scans of very
large tables, without the maintenance overhead of btrees or other
traditional indexes.  They work by maintaining "summary" data about
block ranges.  Bitmap index scans work by reading each summary tuple and
comparing them with the query quals; all pages in the range are returned
in a lossy TID bitmap if the quals are consistent with the values in the
summary tuple, otherwise not.  Normal index scans are not supported
because these indexes do not store TIDs.

As new tuples are added into the index, the summary information is
updated (if the block range in which the tuple is added is already
summarized) or not; in the latter case, a subsequent pass of VACUUM or
the brin_summarize_new_values() function will create the summary
information.

For data types with natural 1-D sort orders, the summary info consists
of the maximum and the minimum values of each indexed column within each
page range.  This type of operator class we call "Minmax", and we
supply a bunch of them for most data types with B-tree opclasses.
Since the BRIN code is generalized, other approaches are possible for
things such as arrays, geometric types, ranges, etc; even for things
such as enum types we could do something different than minmax with
better results.  In this commit I only include minmax.

Catalog version bumped due to new builtin catalog entries.

There's more that could be done here, but this is a good step forwards.

Loosely based on ideas from Simon Riggs; code mostly by Álvaro Herrera,
with contribution by Heikki Linnakangas.

Patch reviewed by: Amit Kapila, Heikki Linnakangas, Robert Haas.
Testing help from Jeff Janes, Erik Rijkers, Emanuel Calvo.

PS:
  The research leading to these results has received funding from the
  European Union's Seventh Framework Programme (FP7/2007-2013) under
  grant agreement n° 318633.
2014-11-07 16:38:14 -03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
2076db2aea Move the backup-block logic from XLogInsert to a new file, xloginsert.c.
xlog.c is huge, this makes it a little bit smaller, which is nice. Functions
related to putting together the WAL record are in xloginsert.c, and the
lower level stuff for managing WAL buffers and such are in xlog.c.

Also move the definition of XLogRecord to a separate header file. This
causes churn in the #includes of all the files that write WAL records, and
redo routines, but it avoids pulling in xlog.h into most places.

Reviewed by Michael Paquier, Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund and Amit Kapila.
2014-11-06 13:55:36 +02:00
Fujii Masao
08309aaf74 Implement IF NOT EXIST for CREATE INDEX.
Fabrízio de Royes Mello, reviewed by Marti Raudsepp, Adam Brightwell and me.
2014-11-06 18:48:33 +09:00
Tom Lane
525a489915 Remove the last vestige of server-side autocommit.
Long ago we briefly had an "autocommit" GUC that turned server-side
autocommit on and off.  That behavior was removed in 7.4 after concluding
that it broke far too much client-side logic, and making clients cope with
both behaviors was impractical.  But the GUC variable was left behind, so
as not to break any client code that might be trying to read its value.
Enough time has now passed that we should remove the GUC completely.
Whatever vestigial backwards-compatibility benefit it had is outweighed by
the risk of confusion for newbies who assume it ought to do something,
as per a recent complaint from Wolfgang Wilhelm.

In passing, adjust what seemed to me a rather confusing documentation
reference to libpq's autocommit behavior.  libpq as such knows nothing
about autocommit, so psql is probably what was meant.
2014-11-05 19:35:23 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
e809fa2c80 doc: Move misplaced paragraph 2014-11-04 16:10:58 -05:00
Tom Lane
f443de873e Docs: fix incorrect spelling of contrib/pgcrypto option.
pgp_sym_encrypt's option is spelled "sess-key", not "enable-session-key".
Spotted by Jeff Janes.

In passing, improve a comment in pgp-pgsql.c to make it clearer that
the debugging options are intentionally undocumented.
2014-11-03 11:11:34 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
9522efdae1 Fix generation of INSTALL file by removing link 2014-11-02 20:17:32 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
a409b464f9 Add configure --enable-tap-tests option
Don't skip the TAP tests anymore when IPC::Run is not found.  This will
fail normally now.
2014-11-02 09:17:26 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
3e81a33d79 PL/Python: Fix example
Revert "6f6b46c9c0ca3d96acbebc5499c32ee6369e1eec", which was broken.

Reported-by: Jonathan Rogers <jrogers@socialserve.com>
2014-11-01 11:31:35 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
252e652ede doc: Fix typos
per Andres Freund
2014-10-31 08:11:06 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
50709a1d42 doc: Wording and formatting improvements in new logical decoding docs 2014-10-30 22:53:11 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5bd91e3a83 doc: Improve CREATE VIEW / WITH documentation
Similar to 590eb0c14e, remove the options
list from the synopsis and elaborate in the main description.
2014-10-30 22:53:09 -04:00
Robert Haas
7f609a10ad Add missing equals signs to pg_recvlogical documentation.
Michael Paquier
2014-10-27 08:53:16 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6f04368cfc Allow input format xxxx-xxxx-xxxx for macaddr type
Author: Herwin Weststrate <herwin@quarantainenet.nl>
Reviewed-by: Ali Akbar <the.apaan@gmail.com>
2014-10-21 16:16:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5d93ce2d0c doc: Check DocBook XML validity during the build
Building the documentation with XSLT does not check the DTD, like a
DSSSL build would.  One can often get away with having invalid XML, but
the stylesheets might then create incorrect output, as they are not
designed to handle that.  Therefore, check the validity of the XML
against the DTD, using xmllint, during the build.

Add xmllint detection to configure, and add some documentation.

xmllint comes with libxml2, which is already in use, but it might be in
a separate package, such as libxml2-utils on Debian.

Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2014-10-21 14:46:38 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f43afbca70 doc: Update Red Hat documentation tools information
The old text was written in ancient times when RPM packages could be
shared more or less freely across a plethora of RPM-based Linux
distributions.  This isn't really the case anymore, so just make this
information more concrete for the Red Hat family.
2014-10-21 10:43:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f048e50037 doc: Update FreeBSD documentation tools information
based on patch from Dag-Erling Smørgrav <des@des.no>
2014-10-21 10:35:58 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7feaccc217 Allow setting effective_io_concurrency even on unsupported systems
This matches the behavior of other parameters that are unsupported on
some systems (e.g., ssl).

Also document the default value.
2014-10-18 21:35:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b87671f1b6 Shorten warning about hash creation
Also document that PITR is also affected.
2014-10-18 10:36:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
97d554871c doc: restrictions on alter database moving default tablespace
Mention tablespace must be empty and no one connected to the database.

Report by Josh Berkus
2014-10-18 10:23:42 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
52c1ae22d6 doc: Clean up pg_recvlogical reference page
This needed a general cleanup of wording, typos, outdated terminology,
formatting, and hard-to-understand and borderline incorrect information.

Also tweak the pg_receivexlog page a bit to make the two more
consistent.
2014-10-18 09:26:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
b2cbced9ee Support timezone abbreviations that sometimes change.
Up to now, PG has assumed that any given timezone abbreviation (such as
"EDT") represents a constant GMT offset in the usage of any particular
region; we had a way to configure what that offset was, but not for it
to be changeable over time.  But, as with most things horological, this
view of the world is too simplistic: there are numerous regions that have
at one time or another switched to a different GMT offset but kept using
the same timezone abbreviation.  Almost the entire Russian Federation did
that a few years ago, and later this month they're going to do it again.
And there are similar examples all over the world.

To cope with this, invent the notion of a "dynamic timezone abbreviation",
which is one that is referenced to a particular underlying timezone
(as defined in the IANA timezone database) and means whatever it currently
means in that zone.  For zones that use or have used daylight-savings time,
the standard and DST abbreviations continue to have the property that you
can specify standard or DST time and get that time offset whether or not
DST was theoretically in effect at the time.  However, the abbreviations
mean what they meant at the time in question (or most recently before that
time) rather than being absolutely fixed.

The standard abbreviation-list files have been changed to use this behavior
for abbreviations that have actually varied in meaning since 1970.  The
old simple-numeric definitions are kept for abbreviations that have not
changed, since they are a bit faster to resolve.

While this is clearly a new feature, it seems necessary to back-patch it
into all active branches, because otherwise use of Russian zone
abbreviations is going to become even more problematic than it already was.
This change supersedes the changes in commit 513d06ded et al to modify the
fixed meanings of the Russian abbreviations; since we've not shipped that
yet, this will avoid an undesirably incompatible (not to mention incorrect)
change in behavior for timestamps between 2011 and 2014.

This patch makes some cosmetic changes in ecpglib to keep its usage of
datetime lookup tables as similar as possible to the backend code, but
doesn't do anything about the increasingly obsolete set of timezone
abbreviation definitions that are hard-wired into ecpglib.  Whatever we
do about that will likely not be appropriate material for back-patching.
Also, a potential free() of a garbage pointer after an out-of-memory
failure in ecpglib has been fixed.

This patch also fixes pre-existing bugs in DetermineTimeZoneOffset() that
caused it to produce unexpected results near a timezone transition, if
both the "before" and "after" states are marked as standard time.  We'd
only ever thought about or tested transitions between standard and DST
time, but that's not what's happening when a zone simply redefines their
base GMT offset.

In passing, update the SGML documentation to refer to the Olson/zoneinfo/
zic timezone database as the "IANA" database, since it's now being
maintained under the auspices of IANA.
2014-10-16 15:22:10 -04:00
Tom Lane
90063a7612 Print planning time only in EXPLAIN ANALYZE, not plain EXPLAIN.
We've gotten enough push-back on that change to make it clear that it
wasn't an especially good idea to do it like that.  Revert plain EXPLAIN
to its previous behavior, but keep the extra output in EXPLAIN ANALYZE.
Per discussion.

Internally, I set this up as a separate flag ExplainState.summary that
controls printing of planning time and execution time.  For now it's
just copied from the ANALYZE option, but we could consider exposing it
to users.
2014-10-15 18:50:13 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
0ff5047d52 Fix typo in docs.
Shigeru Hanada
2014-10-14 09:45:33 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
db75e52485 doc: Improve ALTER VIEW / SET documentation
The way the ALTER VIEW / SET options were listed in the synopsis was
very confusing.  Move the list to the main description, similar to how
the ALTER TABLE reference page does it.
2014-10-13 22:22:20 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5dc4b50b02 doc: Fix copy-and-paste mistakes 2014-10-13 22:22:20 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8660b40d0c doc: mention TM is ignored for to_date/to_timestamp()
Report by Goulven Guillard
2014-10-13 17:36:50 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ebd33f27ab doc: mention more changes needed to use huge pages
Report by Laurence Parry
2014-10-13 17:23:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7ab96d18f9 docs: error for adding _validated_ domains for existing uses
Report by David G Johnston
2014-10-13 16:44:20 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
032f3b7e16 doc: improve USING and NATURAL JOIN descriptions
Patch by David G Johnston
2014-10-13 15:39:52 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
98aed6c721 Add --latency-limit option to pgbench.
This allows transactions that take longer than specified limit to be counted
separately. With --rate, transactions that are already late by the time we
get to execute them are skipped altogether. Using --latency-limit with
--rate allows you to "catch up" more quickly, if there's a hickup in the
server causing a lot of transactions to stall momentarily.

Fabien COELHO, reviewed by Rukh Meski and heavily refactored by me.
2014-10-13 20:50:24 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
80e6af1272 docs: remove mention that attnotnull should be changed
Report by Andres Freund
2014-10-11 17:23:57 -04:00
Tom Lane
25ad5a5284 Improve documentation about JSONB array containment behavior.
Per gripe from Josh Berkus.
2014-10-11 14:29:51 -04:00
Fujii Masao
f19f0ee716 Fix broken example in PL/pgSQL document.
Back-patch to all supported branches.

Marti Raudsepp, per a report from Marko Tiikkaja
2014-10-10 03:18:01 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
df630b0dd5 Implement SKIP LOCKED for row-level locks
This clause changes the behavior of SELECT locking clauses in the
presence of locked rows: instead of causing a process to block waiting
for the locks held by other processes (or raise an error, with NOWAIT),
SKIP LOCKED makes the new reader skip over such rows.  While this is not
appropriate behavior for general purposes, there are some cases in which
it is useful, such as queue-like tables.

Catalog version bumped because this patch changes the representation of
stored rules.

Reviewed by Craig Ringer (based on a previous attempt at an
implementation by Simon Riggs, who also provided input on the syntax
used in the current patch), David Rowley, and Álvaro Herrera.

Author: Thomas Munro
2014-10-07 17:23:34 -03:00
Andres Freund
d9f38c7a55 Add support for managing physical replication slots to pg_receivexlog.
pg_receivexlog already has the capability to use a replication slot to
reserve WAL on the upstream node. But the used slot currently has to
be created via SQL.

To allow using slots directly, without involving SQL, add
--create-slot and --drop-slot actions, analogous to the logical slot
manipulation support in pg_recvlogical.

Author: Michael Paquier
Discussion: CABUevEx+zrOHZOQg+dPapNPFRJdsk59b=TSVf30Z71GnFXhQaw@mail.gmail.com
2014-10-06 12:51:37 +02:00
Andres Freund
c8b6cba84a Rename pg_recvlogical's --create/--drop to --create-slot/--drop-slot.
A future patch (9.5 only) adds slot management to pg_receivexlog. The
verbs create/drop don't seem descriptive enough there. It seems better
to rename pg_recvlogical's commands now, in beta, than live with the
inconsistency forever.

The old form (e.g. --drop) will still be accepted by virtue of most
getopt_long() options accepting abbreviations for long commands.

Backpatch to 9.4 where pg_recvlogical was introduced.

Author: Michael Paquier and Andres Freund
Discussion: CAB7nPqQtt79U6FmhwvgqJmNyWcVCbbV-nS72j_jyPEopERg9rg@mail.gmail.com
2014-10-06 12:11:52 +02:00
Tom Lane
f706f2c1a0 Update 9.4 release notes for commits through today.
Add entries for recent changes, including noting the JSONB format change
and the recent timezone data changes.  We should remove those two items
before 9.4 final: the JSONB change will be of no interest in the long
run, and it's not normally our habit to mention timezone updates in
major-release notes.  But it seems important to document them temporarily
for beta testers.

I failed to resist the temptation to wordsmith a couple of existing
entries, too.
2014-10-05 14:14:04 -04:00
Stephen Frost
78d72563ef Fix CreatePolicy, pg_dump -v; psql and doc updates
Peter G pointed out that valgrind was, rightfully, complaining about
CreatePolicy() ending up copying beyond the end of the parsed policy
name.  Name is a fixed-size type and we need to use namein (through
DirectFunctionCall1()) to flush out the entire array before we pass
it down to heap_form_tuple.

Michael Paquier pointed out that pg_dump --verbose was missing a
newline and Fabrízio de Royes Mello further pointed out that the
schema was also missing from the messages, so fix those also.

Also, based on an off-list comment from Kevin, rework the psql \d
output to facilitate copy/pasting into a new CREATE or ALTER POLICY
command.

Lastly, improve the pg_policies view and update the documentation for
it, along with a few other minor doc corrections based on an off-list
discussion with Adam Brightwell.
2014-10-03 16:31:53 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
1021bd6a89 Don't balance vacuum cost delay when per-table settings are in effect
When there are cost-delay-related storage options set for a table,
trying to make that table participate in the autovacuum cost-limit
balancing algorithm produces undesirable results: instead of using the
configured values, the global values are always used,
as illustrated by Mark Kirkwood in
http://www.postgresql.org/message-id/52FACF15.8020507@catalyst.net.nz

Since the mechanism is already complicated, just disable it for those
cases rather than trying to make it cope.  There are undesirable
side-effects from this too, namely that the total I/O impact on the
system will be higher whenever such tables are vacuumed.  However, this
is seen as less harmful than slowing down vacuum, because that would
cause bloat to accumulate.  Anyway, in the new system it is possible to
tweak options to get the precise behavior one wants, whereas with the
previous system one was simply hosed.

This has been broken forever, so backpatch to all supported branches.
This might affect systems where cost_limit and cost_delay have been set
for individual tables.
2014-10-03 13:01:27 -03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
7a08e21f35 Fix documentation for CREATE SEQUENCE IF NOT EXISTS.
The [ IF NOT EXISTS ] was put in wrong place in the syntax.

Pointed out by Marti Raudsepp.
2014-10-03 10:25:48 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
32984d8fc3 Add functions for dealing with PGP armor header lines to pgcrypto.
This add a new pgp_armor_headers function to extract armor headers from an
ASCII-armored blob, and a new overloaded variant of the armor function, for
constructing an ASCII-armor with extra headers.

Marko Tiikkaja and me.
2014-10-01 16:03:39 +03:00
Andres Freund
0ef3c29a4b Improve documentation about binary/textual output mode for output plugins.
Also improve related error message as it contributed to the confusion.

Discussion: CAB7nPqQrqFzjqCjxu4GZzTrD9kpj6HMn9G5aOOMwt1WZ8NfqeA@mail.gmail.com,
    CAB7nPqQXc_+g95zWnqaa=mVQ4d3BVRs6T41frcEYi2ocUrR3+A@mail.gmail.com

Per discussion between Michael Paquier, Robert Haas and Andres Freund

Backpatch to 9.4 where logical decoding was introduced.
2014-10-01 13:22:17 +02:00
Stephen Frost
8492d86342 Correct stdin/stdout usage in COPY .. PROGRAM
The COPY documentation incorrectly stated, for the PROGRAM case,
that we read from stdin and wrote to stdout.  Fix that, and improve
consistency by referring to the 'PostgreSQL' user instead of the
'postgres' user, as is done in the rest of the COPY documentation.

Pointed out by Peter van Dijk.

Back-patch to 9.3 where COPY .. PROGRAM was introduced.
2014-09-30 15:55:28 -04:00
Andres Freund
445d262852 doc fix for pg_recvlogical: --create doesn't immediately exit.
Author: Michael Paquier
2014-09-30 01:49:25 +02:00
Stephen Frost
c8a026e4f1 Revert 95d737ff to add 'ignore_nulls'
Per discussion, revert the commit which added 'ignore_nulls' to
row_to_json.  This capability would be better added as an independent
function rather than being bolted on to row_to_json.  Additionally,
the implementation didn't address complex JSON objects, and so was
incomplete anyway.

Pointed out by Tom and discussed with Andrew and Robert.
2014-09-29 13:32:22 -04:00
Stephen Frost
ff27fcfa0a Fix relcache for policies, and doc updates
Andres pointed out that there was an extra ';' in equalPolicies, which
made me realize that my prior testing with CLOBBER_CACHE_ALWAYS was
insufficient (it didn't always catch the issue, just most of the time).
Thanks to that, a different issue was discovered, specifically in
equalRSDescs.  This change corrects eqaulRSDescs to return 'true' once
all policies have been confirmed logically identical.  After stepping
through both functions to ensure correct behavior, I ran this for
about 12 hours of CLOBBER_CACHE_ALWAYS runs of the regression tests
with no failures.

In addition, correct a few typos in the documentation which were pointed
out by Thom Brown (thanks!) and improve the policy documentation further
by adding a flushed out usage example based on a unix passwd file.

Lastly, clean up a few comments in the regression tests and pg_dump.h.
2014-09-26 12:46:26 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
b0d81adea6 Add -D option to specify data directory to pg_controldata and pg_resetxlog.
It was confusing that to other commands, like initdb and postgres, you would
pass the data directory with "-D datadir", but pg_controldata and
pg_resetxlog would take just plain path, without the "-D". With this patch,
pg_controldata and pg_resetxlog also accept "-D datadir".

Abhijit Menon-Sen, with minor kibitzing by me
2014-09-25 13:37:19 +03:00
Stephen Frost
afd1d95f5b Copy-editing of row security
Address a few typos in the row security update, pointed out
off-list by Adam Brightwell.  Also include 'ALL' in the list
of commands supported, for completeness.
2014-09-24 17:45:11 -04:00
Stephen Frost
6550b901fe Code review for row security.
Buildfarm member tick identified an issue where the policies in the
relcache for a relation were were being replaced underneath a running
query, leading to segfaults while processing the policies to be added
to a query.  Similar to how TupleDesc RuleLocks are handled, add in a
equalRSDesc() function to check if the policies have actually changed
and, if not, swap back the rsdesc field (using the original instead of
the temporairly built one; the whole structure is swapped and then
specific fields swapped back).  This now passes a CLOBBER_CACHE_ALWAYS
for me and should resolve the buildfarm error.

In addition to addressing this, add a new chapter in Data Definition
under Privileges which explains row security and provides examples of
its usage, change \d to always list policies (even if row security is
disabled- but note that it is disabled, or enabled with no policies),
rework check_role_for_policy (it really didn't need the entire policy,
but it did need to be using has_privs_of_role()), and change the field
in pg_class to relrowsecurity from relhasrowsecurity, based on
Heikki's suggestion.  Also from Heikki, only issue SET ROW_SECURITY in
pg_restore when talking to a 9.5+ server, list Bypass RLS in \du, and
document --enable-row-security options for pg_dump and pg_restore.

Lastly, fix a number of minor whitespace and typo issues from Heikki,
Dimitri, add a missing #include, per Peter E, fix a few minor
variable-assigned-but-not-used and resource leak issues from Coverity
and add tab completion for role attribute bypassrls as well.
2014-09-24 16:32:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
898f8a96ef Fix failure of contrib/auto_explain to print per-node timing information.
This has been broken since commit af7914c662,
which added the EXPLAIN (TIMING) option.  Although that commit included
updates to auto_explain, they evidently weren't tested very carefully,
because the code failed to print node timings even when it should, due to
failure to set es.timing in the ExplainState struct.  Reported off-list by
Neelakanth Nadgir of Salesforce.

In passing, clean up the documentation for auto_explain's options a
little bit, including re-ordering them into what seems to me a more
logical order.
2014-09-19 13:19:27 -04:00
Robert Haas
a92b5f969b doc: Use <literal> and all-caps for READ COMMITTED isolation level.
The documentation overall is not entirely consistent about how we do
this, but this is consistent with other usages within lock.sgml.

Etsuro Fujita
2014-09-19 13:12:52 -04:00
Stephen Frost
491c029dbc Row-Level Security Policies (RLS)
Building on the updatable security-barrier views work, add the
ability to define policies on tables to limit the set of rows
which are returned from a query and which are allowed to be added
to a table.  Expressions defined by the policy for filtering are
added to the security barrier quals of the query, while expressions
defined to check records being added to a table are added to the
with-check options of the query.

New top-level commands are CREATE/ALTER/DROP POLICY and are
controlled by the table owner.  Row Security is able to be enabled
and disabled by the owner on a per-table basis using
ALTER TABLE .. ENABLE/DISABLE ROW SECURITY.

Per discussion, ROW SECURITY is disabled on tables by default and
must be enabled for policies on the table to be used.  If no
policies exist on a table with ROW SECURITY enabled, a default-deny
policy is used and no records will be visible.

By default, row security is applied at all times except for the
table owner and the superuser.  A new GUC, row_security, is added
which can be set to ON, OFF, or FORCE.  When set to FORCE, row
security will be applied even for the table owner and superusers.
When set to OFF, row security will be disabled when allowed and an
error will be thrown if the user does not have rights to bypass row
security.

Per discussion, pg_dump sets row_security = OFF by default to ensure
that exports and backups will have all data in the table or will
error if there are insufficient privileges to bypass row security.
A new option has been added to pg_dump, --enable-row-security, to
ask pg_dump to export with row security enabled.

A new role capability, BYPASSRLS, which can only be set by the
superuser, is added to allow other users to be able to bypass row
security using row_security = OFF.

Many thanks to the various individuals who have helped with the
design, particularly Robert Haas for his feedback.

Authors include Craig Ringer, KaiGai Kohei, Adam Brightwell, Dean
Rasheed, with additional changes and rework by me.

Reviewers have included all of the above, Greg Smith,
Jeff McCormick, and Robert Haas.
2014-09-19 11:18:35 -04:00
Andres Freund
bdd5726c34 Add the capability to display summary statistics to pg_xlogdump.
The new --stats/--stats=record options to pg_xlogdump display per
rmgr/per record statistics about the parsed WAL. This is useful to
understand what the WAL primarily consists of, to allow targeted
optimizations on application, configuration, and core code level.

It is likely that we will want to fine tune the statistics further,
but the feature already is quite helpful.

Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen, slightly editorialized by me
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Dilip Kumar and Furuya Osamu
Discussion: 20140604104716.GA3989@toroid.org
2014-09-19 16:33:16 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
77e65bf369 Fix the return type of GIN triConsistent support functions to "char".
They were marked to return a boolean, but they actually return a
GinTernaryValue, which is more like a "char". It makes no practical
difference, as the triConsistent functions cannot be called directly from
SQL because they have "internal" arguments, but this nevertheless seems
more correct.

Also fix the GinTernaryValue name in the documentation. I renamed the enum
earlier, but neglected the docs.

Alexander Korotkov. This is new in 9.4, so backpatch there.
2014-09-16 09:22:33 +03:00
Tom Lane
fe550b2ac2 Invent PGC_SU_BACKEND and mark log_connections/log_disconnections that way.
This new GUC context option allows GUC parameters to have the combined
properties of PGC_BACKEND and PGC_SUSET, ie, they don't change after
session start and non-superusers can't change them.  This is a more
appropriate choice for log_connections and log_disconnections than their
previous context of PGC_BACKEND, because we don't want non-superusers
to be able to affect whether their sessions get logged.

Note: the behavior for log_connections is still a bit odd, in that when
a superuser attempts to set it from PGOPTIONS, the setting takes effect
but it's too late to enable or suppress connection startup logging.
It's debatable whether that's worth fixing, and in any case there is
a reasonable argument for PGC_SU_BACKEND to exist.

In passing, re-pgindent the files touched by this commit.

Fujii Masao, reviewed by Joe Conway and Amit Kapila
2014-09-13 21:01:57 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c2a01439c0 Run missing documentation tools through "missing"
Instead of just erroring out when a tool is missing, wrap the call with
the "missing" script that we are already using for bison, flex, and
perl, so that the users get a useful error message.
2014-09-13 20:22:21 -04:00
Fujii Masao
4ad2a54805 Add GUC to enable logging of replication commands.
Previously replication commands like IDENTIFY_COMMAND were not logged
even when log_statements is set to all. Some users who want to audit
all types of statements were not satisfied with this situation. To
address the problem, this commit adds new GUC log_replication_commands.
If it's enabled, all replication commands are logged in the server log.

There are many ways to allow us to enable that logging. For example,
we can extend log_statement so that replication commands are logged
when it's set to all. But per discussion in the community, we reached
the consensus to add separate GUC for that.

Reviewed by Ian Barwick, Robert Haas and Heikki Linnakangas.
2014-09-13 02:55:45 +09:00
Stephen Frost
a2dabf0e1d Add unicode_{column|header|border}_style to psql
With the unicode linestyle, this adds support to control if the
column, header, or border style should be single or double line
unicode characters.  The default remains 'single'.

In passing, clean up the border documentation and address some
minor formatting/spelling issues.

Pavel Stehule, with some additional changes by me.
2014-09-12 12:04:37 -04:00
Stephen Frost
95d737ff45 Add 'ignore_nulls' option to row_to_json
Provide an option to skip NULL values in a row when generating a JSON
object from that row with row_to_json.  This can reduce the size of the
JSON object in cases where columns are NULL without really reducing the
information in the JSON object.

This also makes row_to_json into a single function with default values,
rather than having multiple functions.  In passing, change array_to_json
to also be a single function with default values (we don't add an
'ignore_nulls' option yet- it's not clear that there is a sensible
use-case there, and it hasn't been asked for in any case).

Pavel Stehule
2014-09-11 21:23:51 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
02e3bcc661 Change the way latency is calculated with pgbench --rate option.
The reported latency values now include the "schedule lag" time, that is,
the time between the transaction's scheduled start time and the time it
actually started. This relates better to a model where requests arrive at a
certain rate, and we are interested in the response time to the end user or
application, rather than the response time of the database itself.

Also, when --rate is used, include the schedule lag time in the log output.

The --rate option is new in 9.4, so backpatch to 9.4. It seems better to
make this change in 9.4, while we're still in the beta period, than ship a
9.4 version that calculates the values differently than 9.5.
2014-09-11 12:57:32 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
4c4654afeb doc: improve configuration management section
Patch by David Johnston

Backpatch through 9.4
2014-09-10 20:50:15 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
36ad1a87a3 Implement mxid_age() to compute multi-xid age
Report by Josh Berkus
2014-09-10 17:13:04 -04:00
Andres Freund
07c8651dd9 Add new psql help topics, accessible to both --help and \?.
Add --help=<topic> for the commandline, and \? <topic> as a backslash
command, to show more help than the invocations without parameters
do. "commands", "variables" and "options" currently exist as help
topics describing, respectively, backslash commands, psql variables,
and commandline switches. Without parameters the help commands show
their previous topic.

Some further wordsmithing or extending of the added help content might
be needed; but there seems little benefit delaying the overall feature
further.

Author: Pavel Stehule, editorialized by many

Reviewed-By: Andres Freund, Petr Jelinek, Fujii Masao, MauMau, Abhijit
    Menon-Sen and Erik Rijkers.

Discussion: CAFj8pRDVGuC-nXBfe2CK8vpyzd2Dsr9GVpbrATAnZO=2YQ0s2Q@mail.gmail.com,
    CAFj8pRA54AbTv2RXDTRxiAd8hy8wxmoVLqhJDRCwEnhdd7OUkw@mail.gmail.com
2014-09-10 00:08:56 +02:00
Tom Lane
e80252d424 Add width_bucket(anyelement, anyarray).
This provides a convenient method of classifying input values into buckets
that are not necessarily equal-width.  It works on any sortable data type.

The choice of function name is a bit debatable, perhaps, but showing that
there's a relationship to the SQL standard's width_bucket() function seems
more attractive than the other proposals.

Petr Jelinek, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2014-09-09 15:34:14 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
220bb39dee doc: Reflect renaming of Mac OS X to OS X
bug #10528
2014-09-09 13:56:29 -04:00
Tom Lane
750c5ee6ce Fix psql \s to work with recent libedit, and add pager support.
psql's \s (print command history) doesn't work at all with recent libedit
versions when printing to the terminal, because libedit tries to do an
fchmod() on the target file which will fail if the target is /dev/tty.
(We'd already noted this in the context of the target being /dev/null.)
Even before that, it didn't work pleasantly, because libedit likes to
encode the command history file (to ensure successful reloading), which
renders it nigh unreadable, not to mention significantly different-looking
depending on exactly which libedit version you have.  So let's forget using
write_history() for this purpose, and instead print the data ourselves,
using logic similar to that used to iterate over the history for newline
encoding/decoding purposes.

While we're at it, insert the ability to use the pager when \s is printing
to the terminal.  This has been an acknowledged shortcoming of \s for many
years, so while you could argue it's not exactly a back-patchable bug fix
it still seems like a good improvement.  Anyone who's seriously annoyed
at this can use "\s /dev/tty" or local equivalent to get the old behavior.

Experimentation with this showed that the history iteration logic was
actually rather broken when used with libedit.  It turns out that with
libedit you have to use previous_history() not next_history() to advance
to more recent history entries.  The easiest and most robust fix for this
seems to be to make a run-time test to verify which function to call.
We had not noticed this because libedit doesn't really need the newline
encoding logic: its own encoding ensures that command entries containing
newlines are reloaded correctly (unlike libreadline).  So the effective
behavior with recent libedits was that only the oldest history entry got
newline-encoded or newline-decoded.  However, because of yet other bugs in
history_set_pos(), some old versions of libedit allowed the existing loop
logic to reach entries besides the oldest, which means there may be libedit
~/.psql_history files out there containing encoded newlines in more than
just the oldest entry.  To ensure we can reload such files, it seems
appropriate to back-patch this fix, even though that will result in some
incompatibility with older psql versions (ie, multiline history entries
written by a psql with this fix will look corrupted to a psql without it,
if its libedit is reasonably up to date).

Stepan Rutz and Tom Lane
2014-09-08 16:09:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
0640c1bfc0 Documentation fix: sum(float4) returns float4, not float8.
The old claim is from my commit d06ebdb8d3 of
2000-07-17, but it seems to have been a plain old thinko; sum(float4) has
been distinct from sum(float8) since Berkeley days.  Noted by KaiGai Kohei.

While at it, mention the existence of sum(money), which is also of
embarrassingly ancient vintage.
2014-09-07 22:40:41 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
465b52e74c docs: Improve pg_isready details about username/dbname
Report by Erik Rijkers

Backpatch through 9.4
2014-09-06 12:43:11 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
d42f67c52a Properly document that -r is only honored from the command-line.
This is for postgres/postmaster options.

Report by Tom Lane

Backpatch through 9.4
2014-09-06 11:10:52 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
a74a4aa23b pg_upgrade: preserve the timestamp epoch
This is useful for replication tools like Slony and Skytools.

Report by Sergey Konoplev
2014-09-05 19:19:41 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1f4d1074c5 Clarify documentation about "peer" rows in window functions
Peer rows are matching rows when ORDER BY is specified.

Report by arnaud.mouronval@gmail.com, David G Johnston
2014-09-05 18:59:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
8b896abe8e doc: Remove dead link
The link to the NIST web page about DES standards leads to nowhere, and
according to archive.org has been forwarded to an unrelated page for
many years.  Therefore, just remove that link.  More up to date
information can be found via Wikipedia, for example.
2014-09-04 14:11:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4b91ade41f Update URL reference material in /contrib/isn docs
Report by Peter Eisentraut
2014-09-03 17:22:20 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4b22401175 Document use of partial indexes for partial unique constraints
Report by Tomáš Greif

Backpatch through 9.4
2014-09-03 14:32:57 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
c1008f0037 Check number of parameters in RAISE statement at compile time.
The number of % parameter markers in RAISE statement should match the number
of parameters given. We used to check that at execution time, but we have
all the information needed at compile time, so let's check it at compile
time instead. It's generally better to find mistakes earlier.

Marko Tiikkaja, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
2014-09-02 15:56:50 +03:00
Andres Freund
51bb79569f Add psql PROMPT variable showing which line of a statement is being edited.
The new %l substitution shows the line number inside a (potentially
multi-line) statement starting from one.

Author: Sawada Masahiko, heavily editorialized by me.
Reviewed-By: Jeevan Chalke, Alvaro Herrera
2014-09-02 13:06:11 +02:00
Fujii Masao
bd3b7a9eef Support ALTER SYSTEM RESET command.
This patch allows us to execute ALTER SYSTEM RESET command to
remove the configuration entry from postgresql.auto.conf.

Vik Fearing, reviewed by Amit Kapila and me.
2014-09-02 16:06:58 +09:00
Kevin Grittner
05258761bf doc: Various typo/grammar fixes
Errors detected using Topy (https://github.com/intgr/topy), all
changes verified by hand and some manual tweaks added.

Marti Raudsepp

Individual changes backpatched, where applicable, as far as 9.0.
2014-08-30 10:52:36 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
01363beae5 pg_is_xlog_replay_paused(): remove super-user-only restriction
Also update docs to mention which function are super-user-only.

Report by sys-milan@statpro.com

Backpatch through 9.4
2014-08-29 09:06:05 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
14b7c8f2d0 doc: Revert ALTER TABLESPACE summary line
It was changed when ALTER TABLESPACE / MOVE was added but then not
updated when that was moved back out.
2014-08-29 00:26:17 -04:00
Tom Lane
6c40f8316e Add min and max aggregates for inet/cidr data types.
Haribabu Kommi, reviewed by Muhammad Asif Naeem
2014-08-28 22:37:58 -04:00
Andres Freund
11a020eb6e Allow escaping of option values for options passed at connection start.
This is useful to allow to set GUCs to values that include spaces;
something that wasn't previously possible. The primary case motivating
this is the desire to set default_transaction_isolation to 'repeatable
read' on a per connection basis, but other usecases like seach_path do
also exist.

This introduces a slight backward incompatibility: Previously a \ in
an option value would have been passed on literally, now it'll be
taken as an escape.

The relevant mailing list discussion starts with
20140204125823.GJ12016@awork2.anarazel.de.
2014-08-28 13:59:29 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
8e484bc4ab doc: Document valid checkpoint_timeout range
Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
2014-08-26 22:43:37 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
0076f264b6 Implement IF NOT EXISTS for CREATE SEQUENCE.
Fabrízio de Royes Mello
2014-08-26 16:18:17 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
e8c81b1b8e pg_upgrade docs: update docs for 8.3 support removal 2014-08-25 20:11:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ebe30ad59b pg_ctl, pg_upgrade: allow multiple -o/-O options, append them
Report by Pavel Raiskup
2014-08-25 16:30:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
bf1c866597 upgrade docs: highlight pg_upgrade, warn about globals preservation
Also, remove OID preservation mention, mention non-text dump formats

Backpatch through 9.4
2014-08-25 15:34:55 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
f41872d0c1 Implement ALTER TABLE .. SET LOGGED / UNLOGGED
This enables changing permanent (logged) tables to unlogged and
vice-versa.

(Docs for ALTER TABLE / SET TABLESPACE got shuffled in an order that
hopefully makes more sense than the original.)

Author: Fabrízio de Royes Mello
Reviewed by: Christoph Berg, Andres Freund, Thom Brown
Some tweaking by Álvaro Herrera
2014-08-22 14:27:00 -04:00
Tom Lane
41dd50e84d Fix corner-case behaviors in JSON/JSONB field extraction operators.
Cause the path extraction operators to return their lefthand input,
not NULL, if the path array has no elements.  This seems more consistent
since the case ought to correspond to applying the simple extraction
operator (->) zero times.

Cause other corner cases in field/element/path extraction to return NULL
rather than failing.  This behavior is arguably more useful than throwing
an error, since it allows an expression index using these operators to be
built even when not all values in the column are suitable for the
extraction being indexed.  Moreover, we already had multiple
inconsistencies between the path extraction operators and the simple
extraction operators, as well as inconsistencies between the JSON and
JSONB code paths.  Adopt a uniform rule of returning NULL rather than
throwing an error when the JSON input does not have a structure that
permits the request to be satisfied.

Back-patch to 9.4.  Update the release notes to list this as a behavior
change since 9.3.
2014-08-22 13:17:58 -04:00
Stephen Frost
3c4cf08087 Rework 'MOVE ALL' to 'ALTER .. ALL IN TABLESPACE'
As 'ALTER TABLESPACE .. MOVE ALL' really didn't change the tablespace
but instead changed objects inside tablespaces, it made sense to
rework the syntax and supporting functions to operate under the
'ALTER (TABLE|INDEX|MATERIALIZED VIEW)' syntax and to be in
tablecmds.c.

Pointed out by Alvaro, who also suggested the new syntax.

Back-patch to 9.4.
2014-08-21 19:06:17 -04:00
Andres Freund
f57791985a Add pinning_backends column to the pg_buffercache extension.
The new column shows how many backends have a buffer pinned. That can
be useful during development or to diagnose production issues
e.g. caused by vacuum waiting for cleanup locks.

To handle upgrades transparently - the extension might be used in
views - deal with callers expecting the old number of columns.

Reviewed by Fujii Masao and Rajeev rastogi.
2014-08-22 00:28:37 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
02587dcddc Use comma+space as the separator in the default search_path.
While the space is optional, it seems nicer to be consistent with what
you get if you do "SET search_path=...". SET always normalizes the
separator to be comma+space.

Christoph Martin
2014-08-20 12:06:08 +03:00
Noah Misch
7fc5f1a355 Make pg_service.conf sample LDIF more portable.
The aboriginal sample placed connection parameters in
groupOfUniqueNames/uniqueMember.  OpenLDAP, at least as early as version
2.4.23, rejects uniqueMember entries that do not conform to the syntax
for a distinguished name.  Use device/description, which is free-form.
Back-patch to 9.4 for web site visibility.
2014-08-18 22:58:57 -04:00
Noah Misch
10718612fb Document new trigger-related forms of ALTER FOREIGN TABLE.
Oversight in commit 7cbe57c34d.
Back-patch to 9.4, where that commit first appeared.  In passing,
release-note the FDW API postcondition change from the same commit.
2014-08-18 22:58:25 -04:00
Greg Stark
663675885e Adjust Release Notes to reflect holding off wrapped expanded mode until 9.5 (thanks Michael Paquier) 2014-08-18 23:12:59 +01:00
Tom Lane
2b475c5946 Fix obsolete mention of non-int64 support in CREATE SEQUENCE documentation.
The old text explained what happened if we didn't have working int64
arithmetic.  Since that case has been explicitly rejected by configure
since 8.4.3, documenting it in the 9.x branches can only produce confusion.
2014-08-18 01:17:49 -04:00
Tom Lane
e56ec50c16 Use ISO 8601 format for dates converted to JSON, too.
Commit f30015b6d7 made this happen for
timestamp and timestamptz, but it seems pretty inconsistent to not
do it for simple dates as well.

(In passing, I re-pgindent'd json.c.)
2014-08-17 22:57:46 -04:00
Fujii Masao
3e9f70f128 Add missing index terms for replication commands in the document.
Previously only CREATE_REPLICATION_SLOT was exposed as an index term.
That's odd and there is no reason not to add index terms for other
replication commands.

Back-patch to 9.4.
2014-08-18 11:19:38 +09:00
Tom Lane
f66faadc44 Make an editorial pass over the 9.4 release notes.
Update the notes to include commits through today, and do a lot of
wordsmithing and markup adjustment.  Notably, don't use <link> where <xref>
will do; since we got rid of the text-format HISTORY file, there is no
longer a reason to avoid <xref>.
2014-08-17 22:26:44 -04:00
Tom Lane
259904ecd4 Improve DISCARD documentation.
The new DISCARD SEQUENCES option was inadequately described, and hadn't
been mentioned at all in the initial Description paragraph.  Rather than
rectifying the latter the hard way, it seemed better to rewrite the
description as a summary, instead of having it basically duplicate
statements made under Parameters.  Be more consistent about the ordering
of the options, too.
2014-08-17 15:59:03 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1330e2922c doc: Work around stylesheet bug for man build
The upstream stylesheets for man output insert a *roff comment for an
occurrence of an indexterm, for reasons that have apparently been lost
in history.  This, however, is done incorrectly and causes some
formatting problems.  This hasn't been an issue until now, but the
reorganization of indexterm elements inside variablelists has triggered
this issue.

The upstream fix (http://sourceforge.net/p/docbook/bugs/1340/) is to
drop indexterms altogether in man output, and so we'll do the same here.
2014-08-17 09:10:28 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ef153ecc55 Doc fix: New York State's capital is Albany.
The inheritance example in the manual implies that the capital of New York
is New York City, but in reality it's Albany.

George Hartzell
2014-08-15 10:01:31 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
d34b48a021 doc: Fix DocBook XML validity
See 3a9d430af5.  A new one snuck in.
2014-08-14 21:47:11 -04:00
Tom Lane
5ff5bfb5f0 Update SysV parameter configuration documentation for FreeBSD.
FreeBSD hasn't made any use of kern.ipc.semmap since 1.1, and newer
releases reject attempts to set it altogether; so stop recommending
that it be adjusted.  Per bug #11161.

Back-patch to all supported branches.  Before 9.3, also incorporate
commit 7a42dff47, which touches the same text and for some reason
was not back-patched at the time.
2014-08-14 16:06:16 -04:00
Robert Haas
751b704105 docs: Add missing period.
Fabien COELHO and Robert Haas
2014-08-14 15:19:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
faa14acc9b doc: Remove obsolete set element DSSSL customizations
We don't use set elements (collection of books) anymore, so this is just
dead code.
2014-08-13 22:10:25 -04:00
Fujii Masao
52bffe3499 Expose -S option in pg_receivexlog.
This option is equivalent to --slot option which pg_receivexlog has
already supported, which specifies the replication slot to use for
WAL streaming. pg_recvlogical has already supported both options,
and this commit makes pg_receivexlog consistent with pg_recvlogical
regarding the slot option.

Back-patch to 9.4 where the slot option was added.

Michael Paquier
2014-08-13 10:42:16 +09:00
Fujii Masao
d6ded369a7 Fix typo in \setrandom document.
Fabien COELHO
2014-08-12 18:01:01 +09:00
Fujii Masao
e15c4ab5fb Add tab-completion for \unset and valid setting values of psql variables.
This commit also changes tab-completion for \set so that it displays
all the special variables like COMP_KEYWORD_CASE. Previously it displayed
only variables having the set values. Which was not user-friendly for
those who want to set the unset variables.

This commit also changes tab-completion for :variable so that only the
variables having the set values are displayed. Previously even unset
variables were displayed.

Pavel Stehule, modified by me.
2014-08-12 11:57:39 +09:00
Fujii Masao
7d835ff4db Fix documentation oversights about pageinspect and initialization fork.
The initialization fork was added in 9.1, but has not been taken into
consideration in documents of get_raw_page function in pageinspect and
storage layout. This commit fixes those oversights.

get_raw_page can read not only a table but also an index, etc. So it
should be documented that the function can read any relation. This commit
also fixes the document of pageinspect that way.

Back-patch to 9.1 where those oversights existed.

Vik Fearing, review by MauMau
2014-08-11 22:52:16 +09:00
Tom Lane
6aa61580e0 Clarify type resolution behavior for domain types.
The user documentation was vague and not entirely accurate about how
we treat domain inputs for ambiguous operators/functions.  Clarify
that, and add an example and some commentary.  Per a recent question
from Adam Mackler.

It's acted like this ever since we added domains, so back-patch
to all supported branches.
2014-08-10 16:13:13 -04:00
Tom Lane
495cadda5e Further cleanup of JSON-specific error messages.
Fix an obvious typo in json_build_object()'s complaint about invalid
number of arguments, and make the errhint a bit more sensible too.

Per discussion about how to word the improved hint, change the few places
in the documentation that refer to JSON object field names as "names" to
say "keys" instead, since that's what we've said in the vast majority of
places in the docs.  Arguably "name" is more correct, since that's the
terminology used in RFC 7159; but we're stuck with "key" in view of the
naming of json_object_keys() so let's at least be self-consistent.

I adjusted a few code comments to match this as well, and failed to
resist the temptation to clean up some odd whitespace choices in the
same area, as well as a useless duplicate PG_ARGISNULL() check.  There's
still quite a bit of code that uses the phrase "field name" in non-user-
visible ways, so I left those usages alone.
2014-08-09 16:35:29 -04:00
Fujii Masao
3dad73e71f Add -F option to pg_receivexlog, for specifying fsync interval.
This allows us to specify the maximum time to issue fsync to ensure
the received WAL file is safely flushed to disk. Without this,
pg_receivexlog always flushes WAL file only when it's closed and
which can cause WAL data to be lost at the event of a crash.

Furuya Osamu, heavily modified by me.
2014-08-08 16:50:54 +09:00
Tom Lane
1add956ac7 Fix typo in docs.
s/XIDs XIDs/XIDs/ in one place in maintenance.sgml.

Guillaume Lelarge
2014-08-07 20:46:41 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ee646df59a pg_upgrade: assume user is install user
The user specified to the upgrade was effectively the install user, but
that was not clearly stated in the comments, documentation, or error
messages.
2014-08-04 11:56:16 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
822ff44c82 Fix typo in user manual 2014-08-01 21:13:17 +03:00
Robert Haas
ed802e7dc3 pgbench: Allow \setrandom to generate Gaussian/exponential distributions.
Mitsumasa KONDO and Fabien COELHO, with further wordsmithing by me.
2014-07-30 13:22:08 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
232f1475dc doc: Clean up some recently added PL/pgSQL documentation
- Capitalize titles consistently.
- Fix some grammar.
- Group "Obtaining Information About an Error" under "Trapping Errors",
  but make "Obtaining the Call Stack Context Information" its own
  section, since it's not about errors.
2014-07-29 23:47:16 -04:00
Fujii Masao
61e48efba5 Reword the sentence for pg_logical_slot_peek_changes function.
Previously the duplicated paragraphs were used next to each other
in the document to demonstrate that the changes in the stream
were not consumed by pg_logical_slot_peek_changes function.
But some users misunderstood that the duplication of the same
paragraph was just typo. So this commit rewords the sentence in
the latter paragraph for less confusing.

Christoph Moench-Tegeder
2014-07-29 12:07:54 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
b0d3636c17 doc: Fix up ALTER TABLESPACE reference page
The documentation of ALTER TABLESPACE ... MOVE was added without any
markup, not even paragraph breaks.  Fix that, and clarify the text in a
few places.
2014-07-26 23:19:02 -04:00
Robert Haas
967a4e7f31 docs: Improve documentation of \pset without arguments.
The syntax summary previously failed to clarify that the first
argument is also optional.  The textual description did mention it,
but all the way at the bottom.  It fits better with the command
overview, so move it there, and fix the summary also.

Dilip Kumar, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
2014-07-24 08:06:54 -04:00
Tom Lane
4fd9e6ffdd Rearrange documentation paragraph describing pg_relation_size().
Break the list of available options into an <itemizedlist> instead of
inline sentences.  This is mostly motivated by wanting to ensure that the
cross-references to the FSM and VM docs don't cross page boundaries in PDF
format; but it seems to me to read more easily this way anyway.  I took the
liberty of editorializing a bit further while at it.

Per complaint from Magnus about 9.0.18 docs not building in A4 format.
Patch all active branches so we don't get blind-sided by this particular
issue again in future.
2014-07-23 15:20:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
212825f813 Release notes for 9.3.5, 9.2.9, 9.1.14, 9.0.18, 8.4.22. 2014-07-21 14:59:17 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
2ee4efc408 Replace "internationalize" with "localize" where appropriate 2014-07-20 21:39:37 -04:00
Tom Lane
ddc41fd2f4 First-draft release notes for 9.3.5.
As usual, the release notes for older branches will be made by cutting
these down, but put them up for community review first.

Note: a few of these items actually don't apply to 9.3, but only to older
branches.  I'll sort that out when copying the text into the older
release-X.Y.sgml files.
2014-07-20 18:17:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
4cbe3abb31 Fix xreflabel for hot_standby_feedback.
Rather remarkable that this has been wrong since 9.1 and nobody noticed.
2014-07-19 22:20:29 -04:00
Noah Misch
85f95739ec Limit pg_upgrade authentication advice to always-secure techniques.
~/.pgpass is a sound choice everywhere, and "peer" authentication is
safe on every platform it supports.  Cease to recommend "trust"
authentication, the safety of which is deeply configuration-specific.
Back-patch to 9.0, where pg_upgrade was introduced.
2014-07-18 16:05:17 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
c0e4520b16 Add option to pg_ctl to choose event source for logging
pg_ctl will log to the Windows event log when it is running as a service,
which is the primary way of running PostgreSQL on Windows. This option
makes it possible to specify which event source to use for this, in order
to separate different instances. The server logging itself is still controlled
by the regular logging parameters, including a separate setting for the event
source. The parameter to pg_ctl only controlls the logging from pg_ctl itself.

MauMau, review in many iterations by Amit Kapila and me.
2014-07-17 12:42:08 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
aa68872561 doc: Spell checking 2014-07-16 22:48:11 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
9a218c02b8 doc: Put new options in right order on reference pages 2014-07-15 15:08:16 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
da6ac4a668 Add missing doc changes for ee80f043bc
Per note from Tom Lane
2014-07-15 13:59:53 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f162fb75b3 doc: small fixes for REINDEX reference page
From: Josh Kupershmidt <schmiddy@gmail.com>
2014-07-14 20:37:00 -04:00
Tom Lane
59efda3e50 Implement IMPORT FOREIGN SCHEMA.
This command provides an automated way to create foreign table definitions
that match remote tables, thereby reducing tedium and chances for error.
In this patch, we provide the necessary core-server infrastructure and
implement the feature fully in the postgres_fdw foreign-data wrapper.
Other wrappers will throw a "feature not supported" error until/unless
they are updated.

Ronan Dunklau and Michael Paquier, additional work by me
2014-07-10 15:01:43 -04:00
Fujii Masao
5b214c5dd1 Add new ECHO mode 'errors' that displays only failed commands in psql.
When the psql variable ECHO is set to 'erros', only failed SQL commands
are printed to standard error output. Also this patch adds -b option into psql.
This is equivalent to setting the variable ECHO to 'errors'.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Fabrízio de Royes Mello, Samrat Revagade,
Kumar Rajeev Rastogi, Abhijit Menon-Sen, and me.
2014-07-10 14:27:54 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
8522f21400 Fix whitespace 2014-07-08 23:29:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
56abcf6b82 Update key words table for 9.4 2014-07-08 14:55:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
889313c76b doc: Link text to table by id 2014-07-08 14:14:55 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
53166fe248 doc: Fix spacing in verbatim environments 2014-07-08 11:39:36 -04:00
Fujii Masao
644d85351e Split out the description of page-level lock as new subsection in document.
Michael Banck
2014-07-04 11:24:59 +09:00
Tom Lane
8b6010b835 Improve support for composite types in PL/Python.
Allow PL/Python functions to return arrays of composite types.
Also, fix the restriction that plpy.prepare/plpy.execute couldn't
handle query parameters or result columns of composite types.

In passing, adopt a saner arrangement for where to release the
tupledesc reference counts acquired via lookup_rowtype_tupdesc.
The callers of PLyObject_ToCompositeDatum were doing the lookups,
but then the releases happened somewhere down inside subroutines
of PLyObject_ToCompositeDatum, which is bizarre and bug-prone.
Instead release in the same function that acquires the refcount.

Ed Behn and Ronan Dunklau, reviewed by Abhijit Menon-Sen
2014-07-03 16:10:50 -04:00
Andres Freund
a36a8fa376 Rename logical decoding's pg_llog directory to pg_logical.
The old name wasn't very descriptive as of actual contents of the
directory, which are historical snapshots in the snapshots/
subdirectory and mappingdata for rewritten tuples in
mappings/. There's been a fair amount of discussion what would be a
good name. I'm settling for pg_logical because it's likely that
further data around logical decoding and replication will need saving
in the future.

Also add the missing entry for the directory into storage.sgml's list
of PGDATA contents.

Bumps catversion as the data directories won't be compatible.
2014-07-02 21:07:47 +02:00
Tom Lane
fbb1d7d73f Allow CREATE/ALTER DATABASE to manipulate datistemplate and datallowconn.
Historically these database properties could be manipulated only by
manually updating pg_database, which is error-prone and only possible for
superusers.  But there seems no good reason not to allow database owners to
set them for their databases, so invent CREATE/ALTER DATABASE options to do
that.  Adjust a couple of places that were doing it the hard way to use the
commands instead.

Vik Fearing, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2014-07-01 20:10:38 -04:00
Tom Lane
1b2488731c Allow multi-character source strings in contrib/unaccent.
This could be useful in languages where diacritic signs are represented as
separate characters; more generally it supports using unaccent dictionaries
for substring substitutions beyond narrowly conceived "diacritic removal".
In any case, since the rule-file parser doesn't complain about
multi-character source strings, it behooves us to do something unsurprising
with them.
2014-06-30 21:46:29 -04:00
Tom Lane
97c40ce614 Allow empty replacement strings in contrib/unaccent.
This is useful in languages where diacritic signs are represented as
separate characters; it's also one step towards letting unaccent be used
for arbitrary substring substitutions.

In passing, improve the user documentation for unaccent, which was sadly
vague about some important details.

Mohammad Alhashash, reviewed by Abhijit Menon-Sen
2014-06-30 20:51:30 -04:00
Andres Freund
6647f59fd2 Fix typos in the cluster_name commit.
Thom Brown and Fujii Masao
2014-06-30 10:49:39 +02:00
Tom Lane
a749a23d7a Remove use_json_as_text options from json_to_record/json_populate_record.
The "false" case was really quite useless since all it did was to throw
an error; a definition not helped in the least by making it the default.
Instead let's just have the "true" case, which emits nested objects and
arrays in JSON syntax.  We might later want to provide the ability to
emit sub-objects in Postgres record or array syntax, but we'd be best off
to drive that off a check of the target field datatype, not a separate
argument.

For the functions newly added in 9.4, we can just remove the flag arguments
outright.  We can't do that for json_populate_record[set], which already
existed in 9.3, but we can ignore the argument and always behave as if it
were "true".  It helps that the flag arguments were optional and not
documented in any useful fashion anyway.
2014-06-29 13:50:58 -04:00
Andres Freund
51adcaa0df Add cluster_name GUC which is included in process titles if set.
When running several postgres clusters on one OS instance it's often
inconveniently hard to identify which "postgres" process belongs to
which postgres instance.

Add the cluster_name GUC, whose value will be included as part of the
process titles if set. With that processes can more easily identified
using tools like 'ps'.

To avoid problems with encoding mismatches between postgresql.conf,
consoles, and individual databases replace non-ASCII chars in the name
with question marks. The length is limited to NAMEDATALEN to make it
less likely to truncate important information at the end of the
status.

Thomas Munro, with some adjustments by me and review by a host of people.
2014-06-29 14:15:09 +02:00
Andres Freund
a6d488cb53 Remove Alpha and Tru64 support.
Support for running postgres on Alpha hasn't been tested for a long
while. Due to Alpha's uniquely lax cache coherency model it's a hard
to develop for platform (especially blindly!) and thought to be
unlikely to currently work correctly.

As Alpha is the only supported architecture for Tru64 drop support for
it as well. Tru64's support has ended 2012 and it has been in
maintenance-only mode for much longer.

Also remove stray references to __ksr__ and ultrix defines.
2014-06-28 21:46:15 +02:00
Tom Lane
f71136eeeb Get rid of bogus separate pg_proc entries for json_extract_path operators.
These should not have existed to begin with, but there was apparently some
misunderstanding of the purpose of the opr_sanity regression test item
that checks for operator implementation functions with their own comments.
The idea there is to check for unintentional violations of the rule that
operator implementation functions shouldn't be documented separately
.... but for these functions, that is in fact what we want, since the
variadic option is useful and not accessible via the operator syntax.
Get rid of the extra pg_proc entries and fix the regression test and
documentation to be explicit about what we're doing here.
2014-06-26 16:22:15 -07:00
Fujii Masao
de42ed401a Remove obsolete example of CSV log file name from log_filename document.
7380b63 changed log_filename so that epoch was not appended to it
when no format specifier is given. But the example of CSV log file name
with epoch still left in log_filename document. This commit removes
such obsolete example.

This commit also documents the defaults of log_directory and
log_filename.

Backpatch to all supported versions.

Christoph Berg
2014-06-26 14:27:27 +09:00
Fujii Masao
f8ad8bd473 Fix typo in replication slot function doc. 2014-06-24 03:51:51 +09:00
Fujii Masao
394e05996f Add missing closing parenthesis into max_replication_slots doc. 2014-06-24 03:25:01 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
884dede37a doc: adjust JSONB GIN index description
Backpatch through 9.4
2014-06-21 15:33:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
a52f2a0b9c 9.4 release notes: adjust some entry wording
Backpatch to 9.4
2014-06-21 10:57:23 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
734bea8a69 Fix documentation template for CREATE TRIGGER.
By using curly braces, the template had specified that one of
"NOT DEFERRABLE", "INITIALLY IMMEDIATE", or "INITIALLY DEFERRED"
was required on any CREATE TRIGGER statement, which is not
accurate.  Change to square brackets makes that optional.

Backpatch to 9.1, where the error was introduced.
2014-06-21 09:17:04 -05:00
Andres Freund
3bdcf6a5a7 Don't allow to disable backend assertions via the debug_assertions GUC.
The existance of the assert_enabled variable (backing the
debug_assertions GUC) reduced the amount of knowledge some static code
checkers (like coverity and various compilers) could infer from the
existance of the assertion. That could have been solved by optionally
removing the assertion_enabled variable from the Assert() et al macros
at compile time when some special macro is defined, but the resulting
complication doesn't seem to be worth the gain from having
debug_assertions. Recompiling is fast enough.

The debug_assertions GUC is still available, but readonly, as it's
useful when diagnosing problems. The commandline/client startup option
-A, which previously also allowed to enable/disable assertions, has
been removed as it doesn't serve a purpose anymore.

While at it, reduce code duplication in bufmgr.c and localbuf.c
assertions checking for spurious buffer pins. That code had to be
reindented anyway to cope with the assert_enabled removal.
2014-06-20 11:09:17 +02:00
Tom Lane
f28d9b10f7 Document SQL functions' behavior of parsing the whole function at once.
Haribabu Kommi, somewhat rewritten by me
2014-06-19 12:33:56 -04:00
Fujii Masao
9ba78fb0b9 Don't allow data_directory to be set in postgresql.auto.conf by ALTER SYSTEM.
data_directory could be set both in postgresql.conf and postgresql.auto.conf so far.
This could cause some problematic situations like circular definition. To avoid such
situations, this commit forbids a user to set data_directory in postgresql.auto.conf.

Backpatch this to 9.4 where ALTER SYSTEM command was introduced.

Amit Kapila, reviewed by Abhijit Menon-Sen, with minor adjustments by me.
2014-06-19 20:31:20 +09:00
Tom Lane
df8b7bc9ff Improve our mechanism for controlling the Linux out-of-memory killer.
Arrange for postmaster child processes to respond to two environment
variables, PG_OOM_ADJUST_FILE and PG_OOM_ADJUST_VALUE, to determine whether
they reset their OOM score adjustments and if so to what.  This is superior
to the previous design involving #ifdef's in several ways.  The behavior is
now available in a default build, and both ends of the adjustment --- the
original adjustment of the postmaster's level and the subsequent
readjustment by child processes --- can now be controlled in one place,
namely the postmaster launch script.  So it's no longer necessary for the
launch script to act on faith that the server was compiled with the
appropriate options.  In addition, if someone wants to use an OOM score
other than zero for the child processes, that doesn't take a recompile
anymore; and we no longer have to cater separately to the two different
historical kernel APIs for this adjustment.

Gurjeet Singh, somewhat revised by me
2014-06-18 20:12:51 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
d2a986b74a Document that jsonb has all the standard comparison operators. 2014-06-18 15:18:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
8f889b1083 Implement UPDATE tab SET (col1,col2,...) = (SELECT ...), ...
This SQL-standard feature allows a sub-SELECT yielding multiple columns
(but only one row) to be used to compute the new values of several columns
to be updated.  While the same results can be had with an independent
sub-SELECT per column, such a workaround can require a great deal of
duplicated computation.

The standard actually says that the source for a multi-column assignment
could be any row-valued expression.  The implementation used here is
tightly tied to our existing sub-SELECT support and can't handle other
cases; the Bison grammar would have some issues with them too.  However,
I don't feel too bad about this since other cases can be converted into
sub-SELECTs.  For instance, "SET (a,b,c) = row_valued_function(x)" could
be written "SET (a,b,c) = (SELECT * FROM row_valued_function(x))".
2014-06-18 13:22:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4cd3b1cbbd 9.4 release notes: improve valgrind mention
Report by Peter Geoghegan
2014-06-17 11:29:19 -04:00
Noah Misch
be76a6d39e Secure Unix-domain sockets of "make check" temporary clusters.
Any OS user able to access the socket can connect as the bootstrap
superuser and proceed to execute arbitrary code as the OS user running
the test.  Protect against that by placing the socket in a temporary,
mode-0700 subdirectory of /tmp.  The pg_regress-based test suites and
the pg_upgrade test suite were vulnerable; the $(prove_check)-based test
suites were already secure.  Back-patch to 8.4 (all supported versions).
The hazard remains wherever the temporary cluster accepts TCP
connections, notably on Windows.

As a convenient side effect, this lets testing proceed smoothly in
builds that override DEFAULT_PGSOCKET_DIR.  Popular non-default values
like /var/run/postgresql are often unwritable to the build user.

Security: CVE-2014-0067
2014-06-14 09:41:13 -04:00
Noah Misch
a7205d8157 Adjust 9.4 release notes.
Back-patch to 9.4.
2014-06-13 19:57:41 -04:00
Tom Lane
154146d208 Rename lo_create(oid, bytea) to lo_from_bytea().
The previous naming broke the query that libpq's lo_initialize() uses
to collect the OIDs of the server-side functions it requires, because
that query effectively assumes that there is only one function named
lo_create in the pg_catalog schema (and likewise only one lo_open, etc).

While we should certainly make libpq more robust about this, the naive
query will remain in use in the field for the foreseeable future, so it
seems the only workable choice is to use a different name for the new
function.  lo_from_bytea() won a small straw poll.

Back-patch into 9.4 where the new function was introduced.
2014-06-12 15:39:09 -04:00
Tom Lane
a24c104b9a Stamp HEAD as 9.5devel.
Let the hacking begin ...
2014-06-10 21:36:13 -04:00
Andres Freund
f0c108560b Consistently spell a replication slot's name as slot_name.
Previously there's been a mix between 'slotname' and 'slot_name'. It's
not nice to be unneccessarily inconsistent in a new feature. As a post
beta1 initdb now is required in the wake of eeca4cd35e, fix the
inconsistencies.
Most the changes won't affect usage of replication slots because the
majority of changes is around function parameter names. The prominent
exception to that is that the recovery.conf parameter
'primary_slotname' is now named 'primary_slot_name'.
2014-06-05 16:29:20 +02:00
Fujii Masao
c8c9c1f5a3 Add description of pg_stat directory into doc.
Back-patch to 9.3 where pg_stat directory was introduced.
2014-06-05 01:43:17 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan
0ad1a81632 Do not escape a unicode sequence when escaping JSON text.
Previously, any backslash in text being escaped for JSON was doubled so
that the result was still valid JSON. However, this led to some perverse
results in the case of Unicode sequences, These are now detected and the
initial backslash is no longer escaped. All other backslashes are
still escaped. No validity check is performed, all that is looked for is
\uXXXX where X is a hexidecimal digit.

This is a change from the 9.2 and 9.3 behaviour as noted in the Release
notes.

Per complaint from Teodor Sigaev.
2014-06-03 16:11:31 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
f30015b6d7 Output timestamps in ISO 8601 format when rendering JSON.
Many JSON processors require timestamp strings in ISO 8601 format in
order to convert the strings. When converting a timestamp, with or
without timezone, to a JSON datum we therefore now use such a format
rather than the type's default text output, in functions such as
to_json().

This is a change in behaviour from 9.2 and 9.3, as noted in the release
notes.
2014-06-03 13:56:53 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
19c9da1d96 doc: fix JSON function prototype variable label
from_jsonb -> from_json, for consistency

Patch by rudolf (private report)
2014-06-02 16:18:45 -04:00
Andres Freund
a57509821c Improvements to the replication protocol documentation.
Document the CREATE_REPLICATION_SLOT's output_plugin parameter; that
START_REPLICATION ... LOGICAL takes parameters; that START_REPLICATION
... LOGICAL uses the same messages as ... PHYSICAL; and be more
consistent with the usage of <literal/>.

Michael Paquier, with some additional changes by me.
2014-05-31 15:58:04 +02:00
Robert Haas
42be7d6923 In release notes, mention the need to initialize bgw_notify_pid.
Michael Paquier
2014-05-29 23:33:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c676315658 doc: improve markup of ssl_ecdh_curve commit 2014-05-28 06:27:04 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
49cf2cd815 doc: improve ssl_ecdh_curve descriptions
Patch by Marko Kreen
2014-05-27 21:30:49 -04:00
Tom Lane
b8cc8f9473 Support BSD and e2fsprogs UUID libraries alongside OSSP UUID library.
Allow the contrib/uuid-ossp extension to be built atop any one of these
three popular UUID libraries.  (The extension's name is now arguably a
misnomer, but we'll keep it the same so as not to cause unnecessary
compatibility issues for users.)

We would not normally consider a change like this post-beta1, but the issue
has been forced by our upgrade to autoconf 2.69, whose more rigorous header
checks are causing OSSP's header files to be rejected on some platforms.
It's been foreseen for some time that we'd have to move away from depending
on OSSP UUID due to lack of upstream maintenance, so this is a down payment
on that problem.

While at it, add some simple regression tests, in hopes of catching any
major incompatibilities between the three implementations.

Matteo Beccati, with some further hacking by me
2014-05-27 19:42:08 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
37828e87ae doc: link/caps fixes for 9.4 release notes
Report by Tomonari Katsumata
2014-05-23 15:05:31 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2e1b5d3f01 doc: add ALTER TABLE lock level item as major 9.4 item
Report by Simon Riggs
2014-05-21 15:49:44 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6a61308fba doc: 9.4 release notes update for pg_bench line limit item
Report by David Johnston
2014-05-20 14:10:39 -04:00
Fujii Masao
f097d70b72 Fix typo in JSON function document. 2014-05-19 20:41:41 +09:00
Fujii Masao
eb56812144 Fix incorrect column name in pg_stat_replication document.
Fabrízio de Royes Mello
2014-05-19 17:03:30 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
009ca5e782 doc: adjust JSONB 9.4 release note item
Report by Andrew Dunstan
2014-05-19 00:47:45 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b05d1e3c0b doc: 9.4 release note adjustements
Text from David G Johnston
2014-05-19 00:35:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4d30d4b9d7 doc: improve 9.4 release notes
Patch by Andres Freund
2014-05-18 23:59:23 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ff810b4928 Misc message style and doc fixes.
Euler Taveira
2014-05-15 14:49:11 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
4773c70aa4 doc: Clarify what files pg_basebackup omits from data directory 2014-05-14 22:26:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
bb797b6404 pg_upgrade: error out on 'line' data type usage
The data type internal format changed in 9.4.  Also mention this in the
9.4 release notes.
2014-05-14 16:26:13 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ac53295d66 doc: fix 9.4 release notes typo
Report by Dean Rasheed
2014-05-14 14:13:19 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
eefd90c4a9 doc: fix typo in 9.4 release note comments
Patch by Sergey Muraviov
2014-05-14 12:21:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
eb6144bb44 docs: mention windows quoting change in 9.4 release notes
Report by Heikki Linnakangas
2014-05-14 11:02:03 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e513087f64 doc: auto-updatable view adjustments for 9.4 release notes
Report by Dean Rasheed
2014-05-14 10:07:24 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
062f535189 docs: 9.4 release notes adjustments
Patch by Andres Freund, slight adjustments by me
2014-05-13 15:13:02 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9af8bd51a1 docs: use structfield instead of structname in 9.4 release notes
Where appropriate
2014-05-12 21:37:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6de9a6c015 doc: 9.4 release note adjustments
Report by Nicolas Barbier, Tatsuo Ishii, MauMau
2014-05-12 21:31:13 -04:00
Fujii Masao
a3632771bb Fix typo in test_shm_mq document.
Amit Langote
2014-05-13 01:41:54 +09:00
Tom Lane
e6df2e1be6 Stamp 9.4beta1. 2014-05-11 17:16:48 -04:00
Tom Lane
12e611d43e Rename jsonb_hash_ops to jsonb_path_ops.
There's no longer much pressure to switch the default GIN opclass for
jsonb, but there was still some unhappiness with the name "jsonb_hash_ops",
since hashing is no longer a distinguishing property of that opclass,
and anyway it seems like a relatively minor detail.  At the suggestion of
Heikki Linnakangas, we'll use "jsonb_path_ops" instead; that captures the
important characteristic that each index entry depends on the entire path
from the document root to the indexed value.

Also add a user-facing explanation of the implementation properties of
these two opclasses.
2014-05-11 12:06:04 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ea78ce1d45 docs: Mark 9.4 release notes as current as of today 2014-05-10 22:03:24 -04:00
Tom Lane
0d0b2bf175 Rename min_recovery_apply_delay to recovery_min_apply_delay.
Per discussion, this seems like a more consistent choice of name.

Fabrízio de Royes Mello, after a suggestion by Peter Eisentraut;
some additional documentation wordsmithing by me
2014-05-10 19:46:19 -04:00
Tom Lane
f825c7c850 More work on the JSON/JSONB user documentation.
Document existence operator adequately; fix obsolete claim that no
Unicode-escape semantic checks happen on input (it's still true for
json, but not for jsonb); improve examples; assorted wordsmithing.
2014-05-10 18:57:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
17e4082b63 Fix bogus documentation of json_object_agg().
It takes two arguments, not one.
2014-05-09 20:25:42 -04:00
Tom Lane
0b92a77c17 Improve user-facing JSON documentation.
I started out with the intention of just fixing the info about the jsonb
operator classes, but soon found myself copy-editing most of the JSON
material.  Hopefully it's more readable now.
2014-05-09 16:33:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
fb1974cc6b Document permissions needed for pg_database_size and pg_tablespace_size.
Back in 8.3, we installed permissions checks in these functions (see
commits 8bc225e799 and cc26599b72).  But we forgot to document that
anywhere in the user-facing docs; it did get mentioned in the 8.3 release
notes, but nobody's looking at that any more.  Per gripe from Suya Huang.
2014-05-08 21:45:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
b910d7ea35 Increase the default value of effective_cache_size to 4GB.
Per discussion, the old value of 128MB is ridiculously small on modern
machines; in fact, it's not even any larger than the default value of
shared_buffers, which it certainly should be.  Increase to 4GB, which
is unlikely to be any worse than the old default for anyone, and should
be noticeably better for most.  Eventually we might have an autotuning
scheme for this setting, but the recent attempt crashed and burned,
so for now just do this.
2014-05-08 21:11:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
a16d421ca4 Revert "Auto-tune effective_cache size to be 4x shared buffers"
This reverts commit ee1e5662d8, as well as
a remarkably large number of followup commits, which were mostly concerned
with the fact that the implementation didn't work terribly well.  It still
doesn't: we probably need some rather basic work in the GUC infrastructure
if we want to fully support GUCs whose default varies depending on the
value of another GUC.  Meanwhile, it also emerged that there wasn't really
consensus in favor of the definition the patch tried to implement (ie,
effective_cache_size should default to 4 times shared_buffers).  So whack
it all back to where it was.  In a followup commit, I'll do what was
recently agreed to, which is to simply change the default to a higher
value.
2014-05-08 20:49:38 -04:00
Robert Haas
be7558162a When a background worker exists with code 0, unregister it.
The previous behavior was to restart immediately, which was generally
viewed as less useful.

Petr Jelinek, with some adjustments by me.
2014-05-07 17:44:42 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3a9d430af5 doc: Fix DocBook XML validity
The main problem is that DocBook SGML allows indexterm elements just
about everywhere, but DocBook XML is stricter.  For example, this common
pattern

    <varlistentry>
     <indexterm>...</indexterm>
     <term>...</term>
     ...
    </varlistentry>

needs to be changed to something like

    <varlistentry>
     <term>...<indexterm>...</indexterm></term>
     ...
    </varlistentry>

See also bb4eefe7bf.

There is currently nothing in the build system that enforces that things
stay valid, because that requires additional tools and will receive
separate consideration.
2014-05-06 21:28:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
47faae9316 More rewording of pg_stat_statements for 9.4 release notes
Report by Amit Langote
2014-05-06 08:52:30 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
768fb00326 Update 9.4 release notes for queryid control 2014-05-05 20:24:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
a1c287a383 Move pg_stat_statements into its on 9.4 release note section 2014-05-05 20:03:12 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
60832ea39d In 9.4 release notes, add detail to pg_stat_statements items 2014-05-05 19:58:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
49c683bafd Improve JSONB 9.4 release text 2014-05-05 19:16:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
a64560d994 Add doc links to 9.4 release notes, and add major features list 2014-05-05 16:26:33 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b2f7bd72c4 Add SGML markup tags to 9.4 release notes 2014-05-05 12:38:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f8db074049 Update "huge pages" description in the 9.4 release notes 2014-05-05 10:30:45 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5b8de6d467 Update 9.4 release notes with feedback from the hackers list 2014-05-05 10:06:26 -04:00
Robert Haas
c70cc9afb3 doc: In FDW handler docs, mark up scan_clauses with <literal>.
Etsuro Fujita
2014-05-05 10:04:02 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
d69ffd6f03 Add missing 9.4 release file. 2014-05-04 07:12:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
21223c24c2 Initial version of Postgres 9.4 release notes 2014-05-03 23:16:24 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0717748c90 doc: Update pg_basebackup version compatibility claim for 9.4 2014-05-01 22:08:22 -04:00
Robert Haas
65fb5ff130 Documentation corrections for pg_replication_slots.
Thomas Reiss, with changes to the catalog_xmin language by me.
2014-04-30 22:55:16 -04:00
Tom Lane
2d00190495 Rationalize common/relpath.[hc].
Commit a730183926 created rather a mess by
putting dependencies on backend-only include files into include/common.
We really shouldn't do that.  To clean it up:

* Move TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY back to its longtime home in
catalog/catalog.h.  We won't consider this symbol part of the FE/BE API.

* Push enum ForkNumber from relfilenode.h into relpath.h.  We'll consider
relpath.h as the source of truth for fork numbers, since relpath.c was
already partially serving that function, and anyway relfilenode.h was
kind of a random place for that enum.

* So, relfilenode.h now includes relpath.h rather than vice-versa.  This
direction of dependency is fine.  (That allows most, but not quite all,
of the existing explicit #includes of relpath.h to go away again.)

* Push forkname_to_number from catalog.c to relpath.c, just to centralize
fork number stuff a bit better.

* Push GetDatabasePath from catalog.c to relpath.c; it was rather odd
that the previous commit didn't keep this together with relpath().

* To avoid needing relfilenode.h in common/, redefine the underlying
function (now called GetRelationPath) as taking separate OID arguments,
and make the APIs using RelFileNode or RelFileNodeBackend into macro
wrappers.  (The macros have a potential multiple-eval risk, but none of
the existing call sites have an issue with that; one of them had such a
risk already anyway.)

* Fix failure to follow the directions when "init" fork type was added;
specifically, the errhint in forkname_to_number wasn't updated, and neither
was the SGML documentation for pg_relation_size().

* Fix tablespace-path-too-long check in CreateTableSpace() to account for
fork-name component of maximum-length pathnames.  This requires putting
FORKNAMECHARS into a header file, but it was rather useless (and
actually unreferenced) where it was.

The last couple of items are potentially back-patchable bug fixes,
if anyone is sufficiently excited about them; but personally I'm not.

Per a gripe from Christoph Berg about how include/common wasn't
self-contained.
2014-04-30 17:30:50 -04:00
Robert Haas
728c06f17f Minor fixes for ALTER TABLE documentation.
Etsuro Fujita
2014-04-28 10:10:51 -04:00
Tom Lane
f0fedfe82c Allow polymorphic aggregates to have non-polymorphic state data types.
Before 9.4, such an aggregate couldn't be declared, because its final
function would have to have polymorphic result type but no polymorphic
argument, which CREATE FUNCTION would quite properly reject.  The
ordered-set-aggregate patch found a workaround: allow the final function
to be declared as accepting additional dummy arguments that have types
matching the aggregate's regular input arguments.  However, we failed
to notice that this problem applies just as much to regular aggregates,
despite the fact that we had a built-in regular aggregate array_agg()
that was known to be undeclarable in SQL because its final function
had an illegal signature.  So what we should have done, and what this
patch does, is to decouple the extra-dummy-arguments behavior from
ordered-set aggregates and make it generally available for all aggregate
declarations.  We have to put this into 9.4 rather than waiting till
later because it slightly alters the rules for declaring ordered-set
aggregates.

The patch turned out a bit bigger than I'd hoped because it proved
necessary to record the extra-arguments option in a new pg_aggregate
column.  I'd thought we could just look at the final function's pronargs
at runtime, but that didn't work well for variadic final functions.
It's probably just as well though, because it simplifies life for pg_dump
to record the option explicitly.

While at it, fix array_agg() to have a valid final-function signature,
and add an opr_sanity test to notice future deviations from polymorphic
consistency.  I also marked the percentile_cont() aggregates as not
needing extra arguments, since they don't.
2014-04-23 19:17:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
125ba2945a doc: Fix DocBook table column count declaration
This was broken in 26cd1d7d95.
2014-04-23 16:14:14 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
4a781f1e6c Fix typo, trance -> tranche, in docs.
Amit Langote
2014-04-23 13:00:08 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
2362c2bd23 doc: adjust 9970443640 for "null string"
Report by Andrew Dunstan
2014-04-22 20:33:12 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9970443640 doc: improve wording of COPY commit 7ec73783d8 2014-04-22 19:16:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8506a607a3 doc: mention CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW AS can be EXPLAINed
Patch by Amit Langote

Report by

Backpatch through
2014-04-22 18:38:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
26cd1d7d95 docs: add results for JSON operator examples
Patch by Sehrope Sarkuni
2014-04-22 18:19:07 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
72590b3a69 docs: clearify use of pg_database.datistemplate
Patch by Rajeev rastogi
2014-04-22 18:10:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c27bf777cf doc: improve CREATE RULE event list
Patch by Fujii Masao

Report by Emanuel Calvo
2014-04-22 17:54:42 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7ec73783d8 copy: update docs for FORCE_NULL and FORCE_NOT_NULL combination
Also update regression tests

Patch by Michael Paquier
2014-04-22 16:06:37 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
80ce90b9c4 doc: Improve "replication slot" index entries
Now that we have accumulated two different "replication slot" concepts,
make the index entries consistent.
2014-04-22 15:22:10 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
012025f9ae doc: CREATE DATABASE doesn't copy template database-level config params
Report by Alexey Bashtanov
2014-04-19 15:26:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0e8beed515 doc: mention archive_command and recovery_command are exec'ed locally
Report by Craig Ringer
2014-04-19 14:59:47 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4353d1809f docs: tablespaces cannot be accessed independently
Mention impossibility of moving tablespaces, backing them up
independently, or the inadvisability of placing them on temporary
file systems.

Patch by Craig Ringer, adjustments by Ian Lawrence Warwick and me
2014-04-19 10:52:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
13ecb822e8 libpq: have PQconnectdbParams() and PQpingParams accept "" as default
Previously, these functions treated "" optin values as defaults in some
ways, but not in others, like when comparing to .pgpass.  Also, add
documentation to clarify that now "" and NULL use defaults, like
PQsetdbLogin() has always done.

BACKWARD INCOMPATIBILITY

Patch by Adrian Vondendriesch, docs by me

Report by Jeff Janes
2014-04-19 08:41:51 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
52e757420f docs: adjustments for streaming standbys that disconnect frequently
Document problems when disconnection causes loss of hot_standby_feedback
and suggest adjusting max_standby_archive_delay and
max_standby_streaming_delay.

Initial patch by Marko Tiikkaja, adjustments by me
2014-04-17 10:52:48 -04:00
Tom Lane
5f86cbd714 Rename EXPLAIN ANALYZE's "total runtime" output to "execution time".
Now that EXPLAIN also outputs a "planning time" measurement, the use of
"total" here seems rather confusing: it sounds like it might include the
planning time which of course it doesn't.  Majority opinion was that
"execution time" is a better label, so we'll call it that.

This should be noted as a backwards incompatibility for tools that examine
EXPLAIN ANALYZE output.

In passing, I failed to resist the temptation to do a little editing on the
materialized-view example affected by this change.
2014-04-16 20:48:59 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e183d11262 docs: properly document psql auto encoding mode
In psql, both stdin and stdout must be terminals to get a client
encoding of 'auto'.

Patch by Albe Laurenz

Backpatch to 9.3.
2014-04-16 19:53:42 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
be5f7fff47 doc: move min_recovery_apply_delay into the right section
Patch by Fujii Masao
2014-04-16 19:15:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9c53346500 docs: make max_wal_senders higher to handle disconnects
Document abrupt streaming client disconnection might leave slots in use,
so max_wal_senders should be slightly higher than needed to allow for
immediate reconnection.

Per mention by Magnus
2014-04-16 15:06:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
dfc0219f64 Add to_regprocedure() and to_regoperator().
These are natural complements to the functions added by commit
0886fc6a5c, but they weren't included
in the original patch for some reason.  Add them.

Patch by me, per a complaint by Tom Lane.  Review by Tatsuo
Ishii.
2014-04-16 12:21:43 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ed4a26260c doc: fix json_extract_path_text() typo by adding jsonb
Report from rudolf <stu3.1@eq.cz>
2014-04-16 11:24:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4168c00a5d psql: conditionally display oids and replication identity
In psql \d+, display oids only when they exist, and display replication
identity only when it is non-default.  Also document the defaults for
replication identity for system and non-system tables.  Update
regression output.
2014-04-15 13:28:54 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c92c3d50d7 vacuumdb: Add option --analyze-in-stages
Add vacuumdb option --analyze-in-stages which runs ANALYZE three times
with different configuration settings, adopting the logic from the
analyze_new_cluster.sh script that pg_upgrade generates.  That way,
users of pg_dump/pg_restore can also use that functionality.

Change pg_upgrade to create the script so that it calls vacuumdb instead
of implementing the logic itself.
2014-04-15 00:44:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7d0f493f19 Add TAP tests for client programs
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stěhule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
2014-04-14 21:33:46 -04:00
Robert Haas
69671ab548 doc: Suggesting clearing pg_replslot from a hot filesystem backup.
Maybe we'll settle on another way of solving this problem, but for
now this is the recommended procedure.

Per discussion with Michael Paquier.
2014-04-14 13:01:53 -04:00
Robert Haas
c050b2aae3 doc: Update yet another place that didn't get the memo about matviews.
Etsuro Fujita
2014-04-14 12:48:25 -04:00
Robert Haas
f0aa6c06d4 Correct description of constraint_name in ALTER TABLE documentation.
Apparently, the old text was written at a time when the only use of
constraint_name here was for a constraint to be dropped, but that's
no longer true.

Etsuro Fujita
2014-04-14 10:52:07 -04:00
Robert Haas
0c953540d2 Update list of relation types on which ALTER TABLE RENAME/OWNER work.
Etsuro Fujita
2014-04-14 10:44:59 -04:00
Stephen Frost
842faa714c Make security barrier views automatically updatable
Views which are marked as security_barrier must have their quals
applied before any user-defined quals are called, to prevent
user-defined functions from being able to see rows which the
security barrier view is intended to prevent them from seeing.

Remove the restriction on security barrier views being automatically
updatable by adding a new securityQuals list to the RTE structure
which keeps track of the quals from security barrier views at each
level, independently of the user-supplied quals.  When RTEs are
later discovered which have securityQuals populated, they are turned
into subquery RTEs which are marked as security_barrier to prevent
any user-supplied quals being pushed down (modulo LEAKPROOF quals).

Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Craig Ringer, Simon Riggs, KaiGai Kohei
2014-04-12 21:04:58 -04:00
Tom Lane
a9d9acbf21 Create infrastructure for moving-aggregate optimization.
Until now, when executing an aggregate function as a window function
within a window with moving frame start (that is, any frame start mode
except UNBOUNDED PRECEDING), we had to recalculate the aggregate from
scratch each time the frame head moved.  This patch allows an aggregate
definition to include an alternate "moving aggregate" implementation
that includes an inverse transition function for removing rows from
the aggregate's running state.  As long as this can be done successfully,
runtime is proportional to the total number of input rows, rather than
to the number of input rows times the average frame length.

This commit includes the core infrastructure, documentation, and regression
tests using user-defined aggregates.  Follow-on commits will update some
of the built-in aggregates to use this feature.

David Rowley and Florian Pflug, reviewed by Dean Rasheed; additional
hacking by me
2014-04-12 12:03:30 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
3c41b812c5 docs: psql '--' comments are not passed to the server
C-style block comments are passed to the server.
2014-04-10 17:16:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
85c6bba2ce docs: add link to pg_start_backup() from pg_basebackup --checkpoint
This references the meaning of the fast/spread checkpoint option.

Per private IM report
2014-04-09 17:45:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
f23a5630eb Add an in-core GiST index opclass for inet/cidr types.
This operator class can accelerate subnet/supernet tests as well as
btree-equivalent ordered comparisons.  It also handles a new network
operator inet && inet (overlaps, a/k/a "is supernet or subnet of"),
which is expected to be useful in exclusion constraints.

Ideally this opclass would be the default for GiST with inet/cidr data,
but we can't mark it that way until we figure out how to do a more or
less graceful transition from the current situation, in which the
really-completely-bogus inet/cidr opclasses in contrib/btree_gist are
marked as default.  Having the opclass in core and not default is better
than not having it at all, though.

While at it, add new documentation sections to allow us to officially
document GiST/GIN/SP-GiST opclasses, something there was never a clear
place to do before.  I filled these in with some simple tables listing
the existing opclasses and the operators they support, but there's
certainly scope to put more information there.

Emre Hasegeli, reviewed by Andreas Karlsson, further hacking by me
2014-04-08 15:46:43 -04:00
Robert Haas
02f65617ea doc: Fix typo.
Ian Barwick
2014-04-08 11:47:29 -04:00
Robert Haas
0886fc6a5c Add new to_reg* functions for error-free OID lookups.
These functions won't throw an error if the object doesn't exist,
or if (for functions and operators) there's more than one matching
object.

Yugo Nagata and Nozomi Anzai, reviewed by Amit Khandekar, Marti
Raudsepp, Amit Kapila, and me.
2014-04-08 10:27:56 -04:00
Simon Riggs
7d8f1de1bc Extra warnings and errors for PL/pgSQL
Infrastructure to allow
 plpgsql.extra_warnings
 plpgsql.extra_errors

Initial extra checks only for shadowed_variables

Marko Tiikkaja and Petr Jelinek
Reviewed by Simon Riggs and Pavel Stěhule
2014-04-06 12:21:51 -04:00
Simon Riggs
e5550d5fec Reduce lock levels of some ALTER TABLE cmds
VALIDATE CONSTRAINT

CLUSTER ON
SET WITHOUT CLUSTER

ALTER COLUMN SET STATISTICS
ALTER COLUMN SET ()
ALTER COLUMN RESET ()

All other sub-commands use AccessExclusiveLock

Simon Riggs and Noah Misch

Reviews by Robert Haas and Andres Freund
2014-04-06 11:13:43 -04:00
Tom Lane
c7b3539599 Fix non-equivalence of VARIADIC and non-VARIADIC function call formats.
For variadic functions (other than VARIADIC ANY), the syntaxes foo(x,y,...)
and foo(VARIADIC ARRAY[x,y,...]) should be considered equivalent, since the
former is converted to the latter at parse time.  They have indeed been
equivalent, in all releases before 9.3.  However, commit 75b39e790 made an
ill-considered decision to record which syntax had been used in FuncExpr
nodes, and then to make equal() test that in checking node equality ---
which caused the syntaxes to not be seen as equivalent by the planner.
This is the underlying cause of bug #9817 from Dmitry Ryabov.

It might seem that a quick fix would be to make equal() disregard
FuncExpr.funcvariadic, but the same commit made that untenable, because
the field actually *is* semantically significant for some VARIADIC ANY
functions.  This patch instead adopts the approach of redefining
funcvariadic (and aggvariadic, in HEAD) as meaning that the last argument
is a variadic array, whether it got that way by parser intervention or was
supplied explicitly by the user.  Therefore the value will always be true
for non-ANY variadic functions, restoring the principle of equivalence.
(However, the planner will continue to consider use of VARIADIC as a
meaningful difference for VARIADIC ANY functions, even though some such
functions might disregard it.)

In HEAD, this change lets us simplify the decompilation logic in
ruleutils.c, since the funcvariadic/aggvariadic flag tells directly whether
to print VARIADIC.  However, in 9.3 we have to continue to cope with
existing stored rules/views that might contain the previous definition.
Fortunately, this just means no change in ruleutils.c, since its existing
behavior effectively ignores funcvariadic for all cases other than VARIADIC
ANY functions.

In HEAD, bump catversion to reflect the fact that FuncExpr.funcvariadic
changed meanings; this is sort of pro forma, since I don't believe any
built-in views are affected.

Unfortunately, this patch doesn't magically fix everything for affected
9.3 users.  After installing 9.3.5, they might need to recreate their
rules/views/indexes containing variadic function calls in order to get
everything consistent with the new definition.  As in the cited bug,
the symptom of a problem would be failure to use a nominally matching
index that has a variadic function call in its definition.  We'll need
to mention this in the 9.3.5 release notes.
2014-04-03 22:02:24 -04:00
Tom Lane
42c6236f37 Fix documentation about joining pg_locks to other views.
The advice to join to pg_prepared_xacts via the transaction column was not
updated when the transaction column was replaced by virtualtransaction.
Since it's not quite obvious how to do that join, give an explicit example.
For consistency also give an example for the adjacent case of joining to
pg_stat_activity.  And link-ify the view references too, just because we
can.  Per bug #9840 from Alexey Bashtanov.

Michael Paquier and Tom Lane
2014-04-03 14:18:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
879808e519 Avoid promising that "ADD COLUMN ... DEFAULT NULL" is free.
The system realizes that DEFAULT NULL is dummy in simple cases, but not if
a cast function (such as a length coercion) needs to be applied.  It's
dubious that suppressing that function call would be appropriate, anyway.
For the moment, let's just adjust the docs to say that you should omit the
DEFAULT clause if you don't want a rewrite to happen.  Per gripe from Amit
Langote.
2014-04-03 12:38:00 -04:00
Tom Lane
6eff0accfe Doc: improve discussion of reverse+forward host name lookup in pg_hba.conf.
Fix some grammatical issues and make it a bit more readable.
2014-04-01 15:20:38 -04:00
Noah Misch
8f5578d0f9 Revert "Secure Unix-domain sockets of "make check" temporary clusters."
About half of the buildfarm members use too-long directory names,
strongly suggesting that this approach is a dead end.
2014-03-29 03:12:00 -04:00
Noah Misch
31c6e54ec9 Secure Unix-domain sockets of "make check" temporary clusters.
Any OS user able to access the socket can connect as the bootstrap
superuser and in turn execute arbitrary code as the OS user running the
test.  Protect against that by placing the socket in the temporary data
directory, which has mode 0700 thanks to initdb.  Back-patch to 8.4 (all
supported versions).  The hazard remains wherever the temporary cluster
accepts TCP connections, notably on Windows.

Attempts to run "make check" from a directory with a long name will now
fail.  An alternative not sharing that problem was to place the socket
in a subdirectory of /tmp, but that is only secure if /tmp is sticky.
The PG_REGRESS_SOCK_DIR environment variable is available as a
workaround when testing from long directory paths.

As a convenient side effect, this lets testing proceed smoothly in
builds that override DEFAULT_PGSOCKET_DIR.  Popular non-default values
like /var/run/postgresql are often unwritable to the build user.

Security: CVE-2014-0067
2014-03-29 00:52:56 -04:00
Noah Misch
fbd32b0cab Document platform-specificity of unix_socket_permissions.
Back-patch to 8.4 (all supported versions).
2014-03-29 00:52:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
e5a452b3a4 Improve documentation note about Python 2.3 and cdecimal.
Explain exactly what fails (ie, function arguments of type numeric)
if you don't have it.
2014-03-27 17:15:45 -04:00
Tom Lane
f3cfc23195 Document that Python 2.3 requires cdecimal module for full functionality.
This has been true for some time, but we were leaving users to discover it
the hard way.

Back-patch to 9.2.  It might've been true before that, but we were claiming
Python 2.2 compatibility before that, so I won't guess at the exact
requirements back then.
2014-03-26 22:43:36 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
f9c6d72cbf Cleanup around json_to_record/json_to_recordset
Set function parameter names and defaults. Add jsonb versions (which the
code already provided for so the actual new code is trivial). Add jsonb
regression tests and docs.

Bump catalog version (which I apparently forgot to do when jsonb was
committed).
2014-03-26 10:18:24 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ce9bb92f8f Add -f/--follow option to pg_xlogdump.
This is useful for seeing what WAL records are inserted in real-time, by
pointing pg_xlogdump to a live server.
2014-03-26 13:48:20 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
36f7c3a1e0 Fix typos in pg_basebackup documentation
Joshua Tolley
2014-03-25 11:16:57 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
6c5ced1526 doc: list unlogged tables as a non-durable option 2014-03-24 22:04:44 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5db55c6bbc Remove wchar.c Asserts that were stricter than the main code
Assert errors were thrown for functions being passed invalid encodings,
while the main code handled it just fine.

Also document that libpq's PQclientEncoding() returns -1 for an encoding
lookup failure.

Per report from Peter Geoghegan
2014-03-24 15:59:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0b5c0f3bc7 docs: Add short "cover density" description
Also, previous commit 1420f3a982 to fix
ts_rank_cd() for stripped lexemes was from a patch created by Alex Hill.
2014-03-24 15:46:59 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1420f3a982 Fix ts_rank_cd() to ignore stripped lexemes
Previously, stripped lexemes got a default location and could be
considered if mixed with non-stripped lexemes.

BACKWARD INCOMPATIBILITY CHANGE
2014-03-24 14:37:16 -04:00
Fujii Masao
cf5d38f4b9 Fix START_REPLICATION syntax in document.
Enclose "TIMELINE tli" part with brackets because it's optional.

Backport to 9.3 where TIMELINE option was introduced.

Noted by Marko Tiikkaja
2014-03-24 19:30:32 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
3ed249b741 Fix "the the" typos.
Erik Rijkers
2014-03-24 08:42:13 +02:00
Andrew Dunstan
ca07cd59b2 Fix mis-spelling in jsonb docs.
Per Thom Brown.
2014-03-23 18:25:16 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
d9134d0a35 Introduce jsonb, a structured format for storing json.
The new format accepts exactly the same data as the json type. However, it is
stored in a format that does not require reparsing the orgiginal text in order
to process it, making it much more suitable for indexing and other operations.
Insignificant whitespace is discarded, and the order of object keys is not
preserved. Neither are duplicate object keys kept - the later value for a given
key is the only one stored.

The new type has all the functions and operators that the json type has,
with the exception of the json generation functions (to_json, json_agg etc.)
and with identical semantics. In addition, there are operator classes for
hash and btree indexing, and two classes for GIN indexing, that have no
equivalent in the json type.

This feature grew out of previous work by Oleg Bartunov and Teodor Sigaev, which
was intended to provide similar facilities to a nested hstore type, but which
in the end proved to have some significant compatibility issues.

Authors: Oleg Bartunov,  Teodor Sigaev, Peter Geoghegan and Andrew Dunstan.
Review: Andres Freund
2014-03-23 16:40:19 -04:00
Noah Misch
7cbe57c34d Offer triggers on foreign tables.
This covers all the SQL-standard trigger types supported for regular
tables; it does not cover constraint triggers.  The approach for
acquiring the old row mirrors that for view INSTEAD OF triggers.  For
AFTER ROW triggers, we spool the foreign tuples to a tuplestore.

This changes the FDW API contract; when deciding which columns to
populate in the slot returned from data modification callbacks, writable
FDWs will need to check for AFTER ROW triggers in addition to checking
for a RETURNING clause.

In support of the feature addition, refactor the TriggerFlags bits and
the assembly of old tuples in ModifyTable.

Ronan Dunklau, reviewed by KaiGai Kohei; some additional hacking by me.
2014-03-23 02:16:34 -04:00
Fujii Masao
fb1d92a9fa Some minor improvements to logical decoding document.
Also improve help message in pg_recvlogical.
2014-03-19 22:13:05 +09:00
Robert Haas
3ee4fcfc63 Logical decoding documentation corrections.
Thom Brown
2014-03-18 14:57:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
49c0864d7e Documentation for logical decoding.
Craig Ringer, Andres Freund, Christian Kruse, with edits by me.
2014-03-18 13:20:01 -04:00
Fujii Masao
e726e59dc4 Fix help message and document in pg_receivexlog.
Add SLOTNAME placeholder to --slot option in help message and
document.
2014-03-18 21:15:45 +09:00
Tom Lane
551fb5ac74 Release notes for 9.3.4, 9.2.8, 9.1.13, 9.0.17, 8.4.21. 2014-03-17 15:28:22 -04:00
Fujii Masao
2bccced110 Fix typos in comments.
Thom Brown
2014-03-17 20:47:28 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
0294023a6b Cleanups from the remove-native-krb5 patch
krb_srvname is actually not available anymore as a parameter server-side, since
with gssapi we accept all principals in our keytab. It's still used in libpq for
client side specification.

In passing remove declaration of krb_server_hostname, where all the functionality
was already removed.

Noted by Stephen Frost, though a different solution than his suggestion
2014-03-16 15:22:45 +01:00
Tom Lane
e3c9f23250 First-draft release notes for 9.3.4.
As usual, the release notes for older branches will be made by cutting
these down, but put them up for community review first.
2014-03-15 15:58:59 -04:00
Tom Lane
f70a78bc1f Allow psql to print COPY command status in more cases.
Previously, psql would print the "COPY nnn" command status only for COPY
commands executed server-side.  Now it will print that for frontend copies
too (including \copy).  However, we continue to suppress the command status
for COPY TO STDOUT, since in that case the copy data has been routed to the
same place that the command status would go, and there is a risk of the
status line being mistaken for another line of COPY data.  Doing that would
break existing scripts, and it doesn't seem worth the benefit --- this case
seems fairly analogous to SELECT, for which we also suppress the command
status.

Kumar Rajeev Rastogi, with substantial review by Amit Khandekar
2014-03-13 13:49:03 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
16ff08b794 Fix a couple of typos in docs.
Thom Brown
2014-03-13 15:01:45 +02:00
Fujii Masao
588fb50715 Show PIDs of lock holders and waiters in log_lock_waits log message.
Christian Kruse, reviewed by Kumar Rajeev Rastogi.
2014-03-13 03:26:47 +09:00
Robert Haas
a0b4c355c2 test_decoding: Documentation fix.
Andres Freund
2014-03-12 14:11:06 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
c5608ea26a Allow opclasses to provide tri-valued GIN consistent functions.
With the GIN "fast scan" feature, GIN can skip items without fetching all
the keys for them, if it can prove that they don't match regardless of
those keys. So far, it has done the proving by calling the boolean
consistent function with all combinations of TRUE/FALSE for the unfetched
keys, but since that's O(n^2), it becomes unfeasible with more than a few
keys. We can avoid calling consistent with all the combinations, if we can
tell the operator class implementation directly which keys are unknown.

This commit includes a triConsistent function for the built-in array and
tsvector opclasses.

Alexander Korotkov, with some changes by me.
2014-03-12 17:51:30 +02:00
Robert Haas
5a991ef869 Allow logical decoding via the walsender interface.
In order for this to work, walsenders need the optional ability to
connect to a database, so the "replication" keyword now allows true
or false, for backward-compatibility, and the new value "database"
(which causes the "dbname" parameter to be respected).

walsender needs to loop not only when idle but also when sending
decoded data to the user and when waiting for more xlog data to decode.
This means that there are now three separate loops inside walsender.c;
although some refactoring has been done here, this is still a bit ugly.

Andres Freund, with contributions from Álvaro Herrera, and further
review by me.
2014-03-10 13:50:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
19026aadd8 doc: remove extra whitespace in SGML markup 2014-03-08 17:08:01 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
11d205e2bd pg_ctl: improve handling of invalid data directory
Return '4' and report a meaningful error message when a non-existent or
invalid data directory is passed.  Previously, pg_ctl would just report
the server was not running.

Patch by me and Amit Kapila
Report from Peter Eisentraut
2014-03-08 12:15:25 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
3624acd342 docs: small adjustements to recent SELECT and pg_upgrade improvements 2014-03-08 11:26:47 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
8879fa09ee pg_upgrade: document delete problems with tablespaces inside the cluster directory
Per report by Marc Mamin
2014-03-07 22:46:38 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
ea43af38dc doc: improve server's keepalive description
Use superior libpq keepalive description for the server-level
parameters.

Per report by Tatsuo Ishii and Marko Tiikkaja
2014-03-07 22:02:38 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
b0cb40f93a docs: improve TABLE command by showing supported clauses
Initial patch by Colin 't Hart
2014-03-07 20:56:16 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
4ea2e2d474 release notes: add item missed in 9.2.5 release
Item is "Prevent errors in WAL replay due to references to uninitialized
empty pages".

Report and text by Andres Freund

Backpatch through 9.2.
2014-03-07 13:45:38 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
2b8483d69d Fix name of syslog_ident GUC in docs.
Michael Paquier
2014-03-07 10:35:37 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
e2224faf17 docs: to_timestamp and to_date do minimal range checking
Initial patch from Steve Crawford
2014-03-05 20:45:27 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
3b5e03dca2 Provide a FORCE NULL option to COPY in CSV mode.
This forces an input field containing the quoted null string to be
returned as a NULL. Without this option, only unquoted null strings
behave this way. This helps where some CSV producers insist on quoting
every field, whether or not it is needed. The option takes a list of
fields, and only applies to those columns. There is an equivalent
column-level option added to file_fdw.

Ian Barwick, with some tweaking by Andrew Dunstan, reviewed by Payal
Singh.
2014-03-04 17:31:59 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
e2a0fc5363 auto_explain: Add logging of trigger execution
Author: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI
Reviewed-by: Jaime Casanova
2014-03-04 15:31:18 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
84df54b22e Constructors for interval, timestamp, timestamptz
Author: Pavel Stěhule, editorialized somewhat by Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Tomáš Vondra, Marko Tiikkaja
With input from Fabrízio de Royes Mello, Jim Nasby
2014-03-04 15:09:43 -03:00
Robert Haas
b89e151054 Introduce logical decoding.
This feature, building on previous commits, allows the write-ahead log
stream to be decoded into a series of logical changes; that is,
inserts, updates, and deletes and the transactions which contain them.
It is capable of handling decoding even across changes to the schema
of the effected tables.  The output format is controlled by a
so-called "output plugin"; an example is included.  To make use of
this in a real replication system, the output plugin will need to be
modified to produce output in the format appropriate to that system,
and to perform filtering.

Currently, information can be extracted from the logical decoding
system only via SQL; future commits will add the ability to stream
changes via walsender.

Andres Freund, with review and other contributions from many other
people, including Álvaro Herrera, Abhijit Menon-Sen, Peter Gheogegan,
Kevin Grittner, Robert Haas, Heikki Linnakangas, Fujii Masao, Abhijit
Menon-Sen, Michael Paquier, Simon Riggs, Craig Ringer, and Steve
Singer.
2014-03-03 16:32:18 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
f8ce16d0d2 Rename huge_tlb_pages to huge_pages, and improve docs.
Christian Kruse
2014-03-03 20:52:48 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
9067310cc5 pg_dump et al: Add --if-exists option
This option makes pg_dump, pg_dumpall and pg_restore inject an IF EXISTS
clause to each DROP command they emit.  (In pg_dumpall, the clause is
not added to individual objects drops, but rather to the CREATE DATABASE
commands, as well as CREATE ROLE and CREATE TABLESPACE.)

This allows for a better user dump experience when using --clean in case
some objects do not already exist.  Per bug #7873 by Dave Rolsky.

Author: Pavel Stěhule
Reviewed-by: Jeevan Chalke, Álvaro Herrera, Josh Kupershmidt
2014-03-03 15:02:18 -03:00
Robert Haas
d83ee62231 Corrections to replication slots code and documentation.
Andres Freund, per a report from Vik Faering
2014-03-03 07:16:54 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
ef5856fd9b Allow BASE_BACKUP to be throttled
A new MAX_RATE option allows imposing a limit to the network transfer
rate from the server side.  This is useful to limit the stress that
taking a base backup has on the server.

pg_basebackup is now able to specify a value to the server, too.

Author: Antonin Houska

Patch reviewed by Stefan Radomski, Andres Freund, Zoltán Böszörményi,
Fujii Masao, and Álvaro Herrera.
2014-02-27 18:55:57 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
4333eee82d doc: bgw_main takes a Datum argument, not void *.
Per report from James Harper.
2014-02-27 11:41:43 -03:00
Robert Haas
dd1a3bccca Show xid and xmin in pg_stat_activity and pg_stat_replication.
Christian Kruse, reviewed by Andres Freund and myself, with further
minor adjustments by me.
2014-02-25 12:34:04 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
32001ab0b7 Update and clarify ssl_ciphers default
- Write HIGH:MEDIUM instead of DEFAULT:!LOW:!EXP for clarity.
- Order 3DES last to work around inappropriate OpenSSL default.
- Remove !MD5 and @STRENGTH, because they are irrelevant.
- Add clarifying documentation.

Effectively, the new default is almost the same as the old one, but it
is arguably easier to understand and modify.

Author: Marko Kreen <markokr@gmail.com>
2014-02-24 20:30:28 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
848ae330a4 Increase work_mem and maintenance_work_mem defaults by 4x
New defaults are 4MB and 64MB.
2014-02-24 13:04:51 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
6f14a6f703 docs: remove unnecessary references to old PG versions 2014-02-24 12:56:37 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
3f05bedaf2 Fix markup for CHAR() doc patch 2014-02-24 12:26:04 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
8457d0beca docs: document behavior of CHAR() comparisons with chars < space
Space trimming rather than space-padding causes unusual behavior, which
might not be standards-compliant.

Also remove recently-added now-redundant C comment.
2014-02-24 12:09:23 -05:00
Robert Haas
6615e77439 Use pg_lsn data type in pg_stat_replication, too.
Michael Paquier, per a suggestion from Andres Freund
2014-02-24 10:38:45 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
bb4eefe7bf doc: Improve DocBook XML validity
DocBook XML is superficially compatible with DocBook SGML but has a
slightly stricter DTD that we have been violating in a few cases.
Although XSLT doesn't care whether the document is valid, the style
sheets don't necessarily process invalid documents correctly, so we need
to work toward fixing this.

This first commit moves the indexterms in refentry elements to an
allowed position.  It has no impact on the output.
2014-02-23 21:31:08 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
fb05f3ce83 pg_basebackup: Add support for relocating tablespaces
Tablespaces can be relocated in plain backup mode by specifying one or
more -T olddir=newdir options.

Author: Steeve Lennmark <steevel@handeldsbanken.se>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter_e@gmx.net>
2014-02-22 13:38:06 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
8c059dffd8 doc: Clarify documentation page header customization code
The customization overrode the fast-forward code with its custom Up
link.  So this is no longer really the fast-forward feature, so we might
as well turn that off and override the non-ff template instead, thus
removing one mental indirection.

Fix the wrong column span declaration.

Clarify and update the documentation.
2014-02-20 21:41:24 -05:00
Robert Haas
7b3cf9ba9d Document pg_replslot in storage.sgml.
Per an observation from Amit Kapila.
2014-02-19 11:57:31 -05:00
Robert Haas
6f289c2b7d Switch various builtin functions to use pg_lsn instead of text.
The functions in slotfuncs.c don't exist in any released version,
but the changes to xlogfuncs.c represent backward-incompatibilities.
Per discussion, we're hoping that the queries using these functions
are few enough and simple enough that this won't cause too much
breakage for users.

Michael Paquier, reviewed by Andres Freund and further modified
by me.
2014-02-19 11:37:43 -05:00
Robert Haas
7d03a83f4d Add a pg_lsn data type, to represent an LSN.
Robert Haas and Michael Paquier
2014-02-19 08:35:23 -05:00
Tom Lane
7b1fab3fd2 Last-minute updates for release notes.
Add entries for security issues.

Security: CVE-2014-0060 through CVE-2014-0067
2014-02-17 14:26:28 -05:00
Tom Lane
e7f409756d Improve documentation about multixact IDs.
Per gripe from Josh Berkus.
2014-02-17 12:20:57 -05:00
Tom Lane
6ef325429c Document risks of "make check" in the regression testing instructions.
Since the temporary server started by "make check" uses "trust"
authentication, another user on the same machine could connect to it
as database superuser, and then potentially exploit the privileges of
the operating-system user who started the tests.  We should change
the testing procedures to prevent this risk; but discussion is required
about the best way to do that, as well as more testing than is practical
for an undisclosed security problem.  Besides, the same issue probably
affects some user-written test harnesses.  So for the moment, we'll just
warn people against using "make check" when there are untrusted users on
the same machine.

In passing, remove some ancient advice that suggested making the
regression testing subtree world-writable if you'd built as root.
That looks dangerously insecure in modern contexts, and anyway we
should not be encouraging people to build Postgres as root.

Security: CVE-2014-0067
2014-02-17 11:24:32 -05:00
Noah Misch
540b4e5bc8 Document security implications of check_function_bodies.
Back-patch to 8.4 (all supported versions).
2014-02-17 09:33:31 -05:00
Noah Misch
537cbd35c8 Prevent privilege escalation in explicit calls to PL validators.
The primary role of PL validators is to be called implicitly during
CREATE FUNCTION, but they are also normal functions that a user can call
explicitly.  Add a permissions check to each validator to ensure that a
user cannot use explicit validator calls to achieve things he could not
otherwise achieve.  Back-patch to 8.4 (all supported versions).
Non-core procedural language extensions ought to make the same two-line
change to their own validators.

Andres Freund, reviewed by Tom Lane and Noah Misch.

Security: CVE-2014-0061
2014-02-17 09:33:31 -05:00
Noah Misch
fea164a72a Shore up ADMIN OPTION restrictions.
Granting a role without ADMIN OPTION is supposed to prevent the grantee
from adding or removing members from the granted role.  Issuing SET ROLE
before the GRANT bypassed that, because the role itself had an implicit
right to add or remove members.  Plug that hole by recognizing that
implicit right only when the session user matches the current role.
Additionally, do not recognize it during a security-restricted operation
or during execution of a SECURITY DEFINER function.  The restriction on
SECURITY DEFINER is not security-critical.  However, it seems best for a
user testing his own SECURITY DEFINER function to see the same behavior
others will see.  Back-patch to 8.4 (all supported versions).

The SQL standards do not conflate roles and users as PostgreSQL does;
only SQL roles have members, and only SQL users initiate sessions.  An
application using PostgreSQL users and roles as SQL users and roles will
never attempt to grant membership in the role that is the session user,
so the implicit right to add or remove members will never arise.

The security impact was mostly that a role member could revoke access
from others, contrary to the wishes of his own grantor.  Unapproved role
member additions are less notable, because the member can still largely
achieve that by creating a view or a SECURITY DEFINER function.

Reviewed by Andres Freund and Tom Lane.  Reported, independently, by
Jonas Sundman and Noah Misch.

Security: CVE-2014-0060
2014-02-17 09:33:31 -05:00
Tom Lane
0983315b1d Release notes for 9.3.3, 9.2.7, 9.1.12, 9.0.16, 8.4.20. 2014-02-16 22:08:28 -05:00
Tom Lane
734ff84b08 Further wordsmithing on 9.3.3 release notes.
No substantive changes, but reorder some items and improve some
descriptions.
2014-02-16 14:54:28 -05:00
Tom Lane
8fd994e40c Improve release notes per comments from Andres Freund.
Make a bit more noise about the timeout-interrupt bug.  Also, remove the
release note entry for commit 423e1211a; that patch fixed a problem
introduced post-9.3.2, so there's no need to document it in the release
notes.
2014-02-16 12:03:54 -05:00
Tom Lane
cefd3e507d First-draft release notes for 9.3.3.
As usual, the release notes for older branches will be made by cutting
these down, but put them up for community review first.
2014-02-16 00:40:37 -05:00
Tom Lane
2128c52f5c Update regression testing instructions.
This documentation never got the word about the existence of check-world or
installcheck-world.  Revise to recommend use of those, and document all the
subsidiary test suites.  Do some minor wordsmithing elsewhere, too.

In passing, remove markup related to generation of plain-text regression
test instructions, since we don't do that anymore.

Back-patch to 9.1 where check-world was added.  (installcheck-world exists
in 9.0; but since check-world doesn't, this patch would need additional
work to cover that branch, and it doesn't seem worth the effort.)
2014-02-14 16:50:22 -05:00
Tom Lane
1ea081bbd7 Suggest shell here-documents instead of psql -c for multiple commands.
The documentation suggested using "echo | psql", but not the often-superior
alternative of a here-document.  Also, be more direct about suggesting
that people avoid -c for multiple commands.  Per discussion.
2014-02-14 12:54:39 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
801c2dc72c Separate multixact freezing parameters from xid's
Previously we were piggybacking on transaction ID parameters to freeze
multixacts; but since there isn't necessarily any relationship between
rates of Xid and multixact consumption, this turns out not to be a good
idea.

Therefore, we now have multixact-specific freezing parameters:

vacuum_multixact_freeze_min_age: when to remove multis as we come across
them in vacuum (default to 5 million, i.e. early in comparison to Xid's
default of 50 million)

vacuum_multixact_freeze_table_age: when to force whole-table scans
instead of scanning only the pages marked as not all visible in
visibility map (default to 150 million, same as for Xids).  Whichever of
both which reaches the 150 million mark earlier will cause a whole-table
scan.

autovacuum_multixact_freeze_max_age: when for cause emergency,
uninterruptible whole-table scans (default to 400 million, double as
that for Xids).  This means there shouldn't be more frequent emergency
vacuuming than previously, unless multixacts are being used very
rapidly.

Backpatch to 9.3 where multixacts were made to persist enough to require
freezing.  To avoid an ABI break in 9.3, VacuumStmt has a couple of
fields in an unnatural place, and StdRdOptions is split in two so that
the newly added fields can go at the end.

Patch by me, reviewed by Robert Haas, with additional input from Andres
Freund and Tom Lane.
2014-02-13 19:36:31 -03:00
Bruce Momjian
de4b6558be docs: improve CREATE FUNCTION docs about language case and quoting
Report from Marc Mamin
2014-02-13 17:07:05 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
474cb24df7 pgcrypto: clarify 'md5' (hash) table entry
Per suggestion from Peter Eisentraut
2014-02-13 15:38:48 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
3f735ae831 pg_upgrade: mention the need for tablespace snapshots in docs 2014-02-13 05:06:22 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
bcec58cf1e pg_upgrade: document use of file system and COW snapshots 2014-02-12 22:07:03 -05:00
Tom Lane
4a6f136c46 Improve cross-references between minor version release notes.
We have a practice of providing a "bread crumb" trail between the minor
versions where the migration section actually tells you to do something.
Historically that was just plain text, eg, "see the release notes for
9.2.4"; but if you're using a browser or PDF reader, it's a lot nicer
if it's a live hyperlink.  So use "<xref>" instead.  Any argument against
doing this vanished with the recent decommissioning of plain-text release
notes.

Vik Fearing
2014-02-12 19:09:18 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
993c3961a4 Revert gmake/make release note changes
Backbranch release note changes cause merge conflicts.
2014-02-12 17:32:20 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
2fc80e8e83 Rename 'gmake' to 'make' in docs and recommended commands
This simplifies the docs and makes it easier to cut/paste command lines.
2014-02-12 17:29:19 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
8c9db4a5a4 doc: Postgres date-style date-only output is ISO
Backpatch to 9.3

Report from MauMau
2014-02-12 11:25:34 -05:00
Tom Lane
2895415205 Don't generate plain-text HISTORY and src/test/regress/README anymore.
Providing this information as plain text was doubtless worth the trouble
ten years ago, but it seems likely that hardly anyone reads it in this
format anymore.  And the effort required to maintain these files (in the
form of extra-complex markup rules in the relevant parts of the SGML
documentation) is significant.  So, let's stop doing that and rely solely
on the other documentation formats.

Per discussion, the plain-text INSTALL instructions might still be worth
their keep, so we continue to generate that file.

Rather than remove HISTORY and src/test/regress/README from distribution
tarballs entirely, replace them with simple stub files that tell the reader
where to find the relevant documentation.  This is mainly to avoid possibly
breaking packaging recipes that expect these files to exist.

Back-patch to all supported branches, because simplifying the markup
requirements for release notes won't help much unless we do it in all
branches.
2014-02-10 20:48:04 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
f31005e340 doc: Disable indentation of XHTML output
Indenting the XHTML output can lead to incorrect rendering.  This only
affects the build via XSLT.
2014-02-05 23:49:25 -05:00
Robert Haas
14aa601f50 Minor improvements to replication slot documentation.
Fix a thinko pointed out by Jeff Davis, and convert a couple of other
references into links.
2014-02-05 13:41:25 -05:00
Robert Haas
c1fe08eb2f Rephrase text to avoid links in regress.sgml
Otherwise, the standalone regress_README build gets unhappy.
2014-02-03 20:12:05 -05:00
Robert Haas
65a193ebbb Document a few more regression test hazards.
Michael Paquier, reviewed by Christian Kruse
2014-02-03 10:49:01 -05:00
Fujii Masao
c087e8cf34 Add <indexterm> for functions pg_sleep_for and pg_sleep_until. 2014-02-03 03:40:36 +09:00
Fujii Masao
63be3b78f6 Fix typos in docs and comments.
Thom Brown
2014-02-02 10:28:18 +09:00
Robert Haas
858ec11858 Introduce replication slots.
Replication slots are a crash-safe data structure which can be created
on either a master or a standby to prevent premature removal of
write-ahead log segments needed by a standby, as well as (with
hot_standby_feedback=on) pruning of tuples whose removal would cause
replication conflicts.  Slots have some advantages over existing
techniques, as explained in the documentation.

In a few places, we refer to the type of replication slots introduced
by this patch as "physical" slots, because forthcoming patches for
logical decoding will also have slots, but with somewhat different
properties.

Andres Freund and Robert Haas
2014-01-31 22:45:36 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
5bdef38b89 docs: mention 'g' is not in the regex embedded options table
Mentioned in substring() and regexp_replace() sections.
2014-01-31 22:40:08 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
637fab6e57 doc: mention statistics reset during crash recovery
Takayuki Tsunakawa
2014-01-31 21:28:15 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
85317e88cc doc: mention data page checksums in WAL section
Backpatch to 9.3

Adjusted patch from Ian Lawrence Barwick
2014-01-31 19:05:00 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
3fd3e34914 docs: mention tgconstrindid supports exclusion constraints
Dean Rasheed
2014-01-31 17:44:18 -05:00
Tom Lane
e93ca1618b Add some examples to the postgres_fdw documentation.
Michael Paquier
2014-01-31 17:28:02 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
384fbd1a5d doc: authentication wording improvements
Suggested by David Tonhofer
2014-01-31 17:08:27 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
8824b38909 docs: specify FOR UPDATE/SHARE incompatibilities
Document that FOR UPDATE/SHARE are incompatible with GROUP BY, DISTINCT,
HAVING and window functions.

Michael Paquier
2014-01-31 16:37:25 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
e9afdf2f4b Fix documented return type of json_array_elements_text.
Per gripe from hubert depesz lubaczewski.

Also improve examples for this and json_array_elements so they match the
example results.
2014-01-31 09:31:58 -05:00
Robert Haas
760c770ff6 Add convenience functions pg_sleep_for and pg_sleep_until.
Vik Fearing, reviewed by Pavel Stehule and myself
2014-01-30 15:47:56 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
c29a6dd548 docs: improve xref description for xreflabel and refentry links 2014-01-30 12:26:18 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
7aba24e971 docs: mention SGML refentry also pulls text from the link 2014-01-30 12:21:48 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
b1cbd2b573 docs: add mention of index swapping
Backpatch to 9.3

Greg Smith
2014-01-30 12:14:24 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
146604ec43 Add checks for interval overflow/underflow
New checks include input, month/day/time internal adjustments, addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and negation.  Also adjust docs to
correctly specify interval size in bytes.

Report from Rok Kralj
2014-01-30 09:41:43 -05:00
Robert Haas
9347baa5bb Include planning time in EXPLAIN ANALYZE output.
This doesn't work for prepared queries, but it's not too easy to get
the information in that case and there's some debate as to exactly
what the right thing to measure is, so just do this for now.

Andreas Karlsson, with slight doc changes by me.
2014-01-29 16:09:15 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
5264d91541 Add json_array_elements_text function.
This was a notable omission from the json functions added in 9.3 and
there have been numerous complaints about its absence.

Laurence Rowe.
2014-01-29 15:39:01 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
2013e5eef7 Remedy two small omissions in the new json functions docs. 2014-01-29 09:51:02 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
991659dcd7 Fix docs build.
Broken by the huge_tlb_pages patch.

Vik Fearing.
2014-01-29 16:16:19 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
1a3458b6d8 Allow using huge TLB pages on Linux (MAP_HUGETLB)
This patch adds an option, huge_tlb_pages, which allows requesting the
shared memory segment to be allocated using huge pages, by using the
MAP_HUGETLB flag in mmap(). This can improve performance.

The default is 'try', which means that we will attempt using huge pages,
and fall back to non-huge pages if it doesn't work. Currently, only Linux
has MAP_HUGETLB. On other platforms, the default 'try' behaves the same as
'off'.

In the passing, don't try to round the mmap() size to a multiple of
pagesize. mmap() doesn't require that, and there's no particular reason for
PostgreSQL to do that either. When using MAP_HUGETLB, however, round the
request size up to nearest 2MB boundary. This is to work around a bug in
some Linux kernel versions, but also to avoid wasting memory, because the
kernel will round the size up anyway.

Many people were involved in writing this patch, including Christian Kruse,
Richard Poole, Abhijit Menon-Sen, reviewed by Peter Geoghegan, Andres Freund
and me.
2014-01-29 14:08:30 +02:00
Andrew Dunstan
c2099751cd Minor docs fixes for new json functions.
Thom Brown.
2014-01-28 18:28:16 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
105639900b New json functions.
json_build_array() and json_build_object allow for the construction of
arbitrarily complex json trees. json_object() turns a one or two
dimensional array, or two separate arrays, into a json_object of
name/value pairs, similarly to the hstore() function.
json_object_agg() aggregates its two arguments into a single json object
as name value pairs.

Catalog version bumped.

Andrew Dunstan, reviewed by Marko Tiikkaja.
2014-01-28 17:48:21 -05:00
Fujii Masao
9132b189bf Add pg_stat_archiver statistics view.
This view shows the statistics about the WAL archiver process's activity.

Gabriele Bartolini, reviewed by Michael Paquier, refactored a bit by me.
2014-01-29 02:58:22 +09:00
Tom Lane
f0d6f20278 Keep pg_stat_statements' query texts in a file, not in shared memory.
This change allows us to eliminate the previous limit on stored query
length, and it makes the shared-memory hash table very much smaller,
allowing more statements to be tracked.  (The default value of
pg_stat_statements.max is therefore increased from 1000 to 5000.)
In typical scenarios, the hash table can be large enough to hold all the
statements commonly issued by an application, so that there is little
"churn" in the set of tracked statements, and thus little need to do I/O
to the file.

To further reduce the need for I/O to the query-texts file, add a way
to retrieve all the columns of the pg_stat_statements view except for
the query text column.  This is probably not of much interest for human
use but it could be exploited by programs, which will prefer using the
queryid anyway.

Ordinarily, we'd need to bump the extension version number for the latter
change.  But since we already advanced pg_stat_statements' version number
from 1.1 to 1.2 in the 9.4 development cycle, it seems all right to just
redefine what 1.2 means.

Peter Geoghegan, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2014-01-27 15:37:54 -05:00
Robert Haas
ea9df812d8 Relax the requirement that all lwlocks be stored in a single array.
This makes it possible to store lwlocks as part of some other data
structure in the main shared memory segment, or in a dynamic shared
memory segment.  There is still a main LWLock array and this patch does
not move anything out of it, but it provides necessary infrastructure
for doing that in the future.

This change is likely to increase the size of LWLockPadded on some
platforms, especially 32-bit platforms where it was previously only
16 bytes.

Patch by me.  Review by Andres Freund and KaiGai Kohei.
2014-01-27 11:07:44 -05:00
Tom Lane
2850896961 Code review for auto-tuned effective_cache_size.
Fix integer overflow issue noted by Magnus Hagander, as well as a bunch
of other infelicities in commit ee1e5662d8
and its unreasonably large number of followups.
2014-01-27 00:05:56 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
a7e5f7bf68 Provide for client-only installs with MSVC.
MauMau.
2014-01-26 17:03:13 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
cec8394b5c Enable building with Visual Studion 2013.
Backpatch to 9.3.

Brar Piening.
2014-01-26 09:49:10 -05:00
Stephen Frost
00ba97365d Use E, not e, for escaping in example docs
From the Department of Nitpicking, be consistent with other escaping
and use 'E' instead of 'e' to escape the string in the example docs
for GET DISAGNOSTICS stack = PG_CONTEXT.

Noticed by Department Chief Magnus Hagander.
2014-01-26 09:40:34 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
a16c2edcc7 Copy-editing docs for recovery_target='immediate', and "ie."
Phrase the sentence better. Also, spell "i.e." rather than "ie."

Thom Brown
2014-01-25 23:33:03 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
e2989fcab6 docs: mention CREATE TABLE LIKE linkage using INCLUDING DEFAULTS
Mention that CREATE TABLE LIKE INCLUDING DEFAULTS creates a link between
the original and new tables if a default function modifies the database,
like nextval().
2014-01-25 14:33:27 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
71c6a8e375 Add recovery_target='immediate' option.
This allows ending recovery as a consistent state has been reached. Without
this, there was no easy way to e.g restore an online backup, without
replaying any extra WAL after the backup ended.

MauMau and me.
2014-01-25 17:34:04 +02:00
Stephen Frost
fbe19ee3b8 ALTER TABLESPACE ... MOVE ... OWNED BY
Add the ability to specify the objects to move by who those objects are
owned by (as relowner) and change ALL to mean ALL objects.  This
makes the command always operate against a well-defined set of objects
and not have the objects-to-be-moved based on the role of the user
running the command.

Per discussion with Simon and Tom.
2014-01-23 23:52:40 -05:00
Fujii Masao
3ee74df2e4 Remove duplicate index entry DATE_TRUNC in document. 2014-01-24 11:12:48 +09:00
Fujii Masao
9f80f4835a Add libpq function PQhostaddr().
There was a bug in the psql's meta command \conninfo. When the
IP address was specified in the hostaddr and psql used it to create
a connection (i.e., psql -d "hostaddr=xxx"), \conninfo could not
display that address. This is because \conninfo got the connection
information only from PQhost() which could not return hostaddr.

This patch adds PQhostaddr(), and changes \conninfo so that it
can display not only the host name that PQhost() returns but also
the IP address which PQhostaddr() returns.

The bug has existed since 9.1 where \conninfo was introduced.
But it's too late to add new libpq function into the released versions,
so no backpatch.
2014-01-24 02:32:39 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
90afc7d805 Add date_trunc('', interval) documentation mention
Report from Eric Howe
2014-01-22 22:26:45 -05:00
Robert Haas
01f7808b3e Add a cardinality function for arrays.
Unlike our other array functions, this considers the total number of
elements across all dimensions, and returns 0 rather than NULL when the
array has no elements.  But it seems that both of those behaviors are
almost universally disliked, so hopefully that's OK.

Marko Tiikkaja, reviewed by Dean Rasheed and Pavel Stehule
2014-01-21 12:38:53 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
98de86e422 Remove support for native krb5 authentication
krb5 has been deprecated since 8.3, and the recommended way to do
Kerberos authentication is using the GSSAPI authentication method
(which is still fully supported).

libpq retains the ability to identify krb5 authentication, but only
gives an error message about it being unsupported. Since all authentication
is initiated from the backend, there is no need to keep it at all
in the backend.
2014-01-19 17:05:01 +01:00
Stephen Frost
5254958e92 Add CREATE TABLESPACE ... WITH ... Options
Tablespaces have a few options which can be set on them to give PG hints
as to how the tablespace behaves (perhaps it's faster for sequential
scans, or better able to handle random access, etc).  These options were
only available through the ALTER TABLESPACE command.

This adds the ability to set these options at CREATE TABLESPACE time,
removing the need to do both a CREATE TABLESPACE and ALTER TABLESPACE to
get the correct options set on the tablespace.

Vik Fearing, reviewed by Michael Paquier.
2014-01-18 20:59:31 -05:00
Stephen Frost
76e91b38ba Add ALTER TABLESPACE ... MOVE command
This adds a 'MOVE' sub-command to ALTER TABLESPACE which allows moving sets of
objects from one tablespace to another.  This can be extremely handy and avoids
a lot of error-prone scripting.  ALTER TABLESPACE ... MOVE will only move
objects the user owns, will notify the user if no objects were found, and can
be used to move ALL objects or specific types of objects (TABLES, INDEXES, or
MATERIALIZED VIEWS).
2014-01-18 18:56:40 -05:00
Tom Lane
e6170126fc Add gen_random_uuid() to contrib/pgcrypto.
This function provides a way of generating version 4 (pseudorandom) UUIDs
based on pgcrypto's PRNG.  The main reason for doing this is that the
OSSP UUID library depended on by contrib/uuid-ossp is becoming more and
more of a porting headache, so we need an alternative for people who can't
install that.  A nice side benefit though is that this implementation is
noticeably faster than uuid-ossp's uuid_generate_v4() function.

Oskari Saarenmaa, reviewed by Emre Hasegeli
2014-01-17 16:52:06 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
d8a0b96c50 doc: rename "Equals" to "Equal" 2014-01-16 19:38:22 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
93c4bbc999 doc: fix := description typo. 2014-01-16 19:28:50 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
7e1955b861 docs: update PL/pgSQL docs about the use of := and = 2014-01-16 16:40:58 -05:00
Tom Lane
515d2c596c Add display of oprcode (the underlying function's name) to psql's \do+.
The + modifier of \do didn't use to do anything, but now it adds an oprcode
column.  This is useful both as an additional form of documentation of what
the operator does, and to save a step when finding out properties of the
underlying function.

Marko Tiikkaja, reviewed by Rushabh Lathia, adjusted a bit by me
2014-01-16 15:29:33 -05:00
Tom Lane
5df99f6481 Improve FILES section of psql reference page.
Primarily, explain where to find the system-wide psqlrc file, per recent
gripe from John Sutton.  Do some general wordsmithing and improve the
markup, too.

Also adjust psqlrc.sample so its comments about file location are somewhat
trustworthy.  (Not sure why we bother with this file when it's empty,
but whatever.)

Back-patch to 9.2 where the startup file naming scheme was last changed.
2014-01-14 19:27:57 -05:00
Robert Haas
16cad3e867 Documentation for test_shm_mq.
Commit 4db3744f1f added this contrib
module but neglected to document it.  Oops.
2014-01-14 15:58:15 -05:00
Robert Haas
b682709451 Mention that VACUUM FREEZE also effectively zeroes the table freeze age.
Maciek Sakrejda, reviewed by Amit Kapila
2014-01-14 14:48:57 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
04038148b6 Add OVERLAPS to index in the docs.
Per report from Adam Mackler and Jonathan Katz
2014-01-13 15:16:26 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
d84c584ece Revert fd2ace8028
Seems we want to document '=' plpgsql assignment instead.
2014-01-11 14:00:47 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
fd2ace8028 docs: remove undocumented assign syntax in plpgsql examples
Pavel Stehule
2014-01-11 13:41:08 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
7e04792a1c Update copyright for 2014
Update all files in head, and files COPYRIGHT and legal.sgml in all back
branches.
2014-01-07 16:05:30 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
edc43458d7 Add more use of psprintf() 2014-01-06 21:30:26 -05:00
Robert Haas
3cff1879f8 Aggressively freeze tables when CLUSTER or VACUUM FULL rewrites them.
We haven't wanted to do this in the past on the grounds that in rare
cases the original xmin value will be needed for forensic purposes, but
commit 37484ad2aa removes that objection,
so now we can.

Per extensive discussion, among many people, on pgsql-hackers.
2014-01-02 15:15:51 -05:00
Tom Lane
d7ee4311af Fix alphabetization in catalogs.sgml.
Some recent patches seem not to have grasped the concept that the catalogs
are described in alphabetical order.
2013-12-30 13:27:51 -05:00
Robert Haas
d43760b624 Revise documentation for new freezing method.
Commit 37484ad2aa invalidated a good
chunk of documentation, so patch it up to reflect the new state of
play.  Along the way, patch remaining documentation references to
FrozenXID to say instead FrozenTransactionId, so that they match the
way we actually spell it in the code.
2013-12-23 20:36:31 -05:00
Tom Lane
8d65da1f01 Support ordered-set (WITHIN GROUP) aggregates.
This patch introduces generic support for ordered-set and hypothetical-set
aggregate functions, as well as implementations of the instances defined in
SQL:2008 (percentile_cont(), percentile_disc(), rank(), dense_rank(),
percent_rank(), cume_dist()).  We also added mode() though it is not in the
spec, as well as versions of percentile_cont() and percentile_disc() that
can compute multiple percentile values in one pass over the data.

Unlike the original submission, this patch puts full control of the sorting
process in the hands of the aggregate's support functions.  To allow the
support functions to find out how they're supposed to sort, a new API
function AggGetAggref() is added to nodeAgg.c.  This allows retrieval of
the aggregate call's Aggref node, which may have other uses beyond the
immediate need.  There is also support for ordered-set aggregates to
install cleanup callback functions, so that they can be sure that
infrastructure such as tuplesort objects gets cleaned up.

In passing, make some fixes in the recently-added support for variadic
aggregates, and make some editorial adjustments in the recent FILTER
additions for aggregates.  Also, simplify use of IsBinaryCoercible() by
allowing it to succeed whenever the target type is ANY or ANYELEMENT.
It was inconsistent that it dealt with other polymorphic target types
but not these.

Atri Sharma and Andrew Gierth; reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Vik Fearing,
and rather heavily editorialized upon by Tom Lane
2013-12-23 16:11:35 -05:00
Fujii Masao
961bf59fb7 Rename wal_log_hintbits to wal_log_hints, per discussion on pgsql-hackers.
Sawada Masahiko
2013-12-21 03:33:16 +09:00
Robert Haas
c32afe53c2 pg_prewarm, a contrib module for prewarming relationd data.
Patch by me.  Review by Álvaro Herrera, Amit Kapila, Jeff Janes,
Gurjeet Singh, and others.
2013-12-20 08:14:13 -05:00
Fujii Masao
f83a75451f Fix typo in docs for min_recovery_apply_delay.
Bernd Helmle
2013-12-19 19:22:29 +09:00
Tatsuo Ishii
65d6e4cb5c Add ALTER SYSTEM command to edit the server configuration file.
Patch contributed by Amit Kapila. Reviewed by Hari Babu, Masao Fujii,
Boszormenyi Zoltan, Andres Freund, Greg Smith and others.
2013-12-18 23:42:44 +09:00
Tom Lane
1b4f7f93b4 Allow empty target list in SELECT.
This fixes a problem noted as a followup to bug #8648: if a query has a
semantically-empty target list, e.g. SELECT * FROM zero_column_table,
ruleutils.c will dump it as a syntactically-empty target list, which was
not allowed.  There doesn't seem to be any reliable way to fix this by
hacking ruleutils (note in particular that the originally zero-column table
might since have had columns added to it); and even if we had such a fix,
it would do nothing for existing dump files that might contain bad syntax.
The best bet seems to be to relax the syntactic restriction.

Also, add parse-analysis errors for SELECT DISTINCT with no columns (after
*-expansion) and RETURNING with no columns.  These cases previously
produced unexpected behavior because the parsed Query looked like it had
no DISTINCT or RETURNING clause, respectively.  If anyone ever offers
a plausible use-case for this, we could work a bit harder on making the
situation distinguishable.

Arguably this is a bug fix that should be back-patched, but I'm worried
that there may be client apps or PLs that expect "SELECT ;" to throw a
syntax error.  The issue doesn't seem important enough to risk changing
behavior in minor releases.
2013-12-14 20:23:26 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
dde6282500 Fix more instances of "the the" in comments.
Plus one instance of "to to" in the docs.
2013-12-13 20:02:01 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
50e547096c Add GUC to enable WAL-logging of hint bits, even with checksums disabled.
WAL records of hint bit updates is useful to tools that want to examine
which pages have been modified. In particular, this is required to make
the pg_rewind tool safe (without checksums).

This can also be used to test how much extra WAL-logging would occur if
you enabled checksums, without actually enabling them (which you can't
currently do without re-initdb'ing).

Sawada Masahiko, docs by Samrat Revagade. Reviewed by Dilip Kumar, with
further changes by me.
2013-12-13 16:26:14 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
56afe8509e Fix double "the" in the documentation
Erik Rijkers
2013-12-13 15:01:56 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
46328916ee configure: Allow adding a custom string to PG_VERSION
This can be used to mark custom built binaries with an extra version
string such as a git describe identifier or distribution package release
version.

From: Oskari Saarenmaa <os@ohmu.fi>
2013-12-12 22:01:27 -05:00
Tom Lane
ccca6f56f5 Fix ancient docs/comments thinko: XID comparison is mod 2^32, not 2^31.
Pointed out by Gianni Ciolli.
2013-12-12 12:39:48 -05:00
Tom Lane
f26099057a Improve EXPLAIN to print the grouping columns in Agg and Group nodes.
Per request from Kevin Grittner.
2013-12-12 11:24:38 -05:00
Simon Riggs
8693559cac New autovacuum_work_mem parameter
If autovacuum_work_mem is set, autovacuum workers now use
this parameter in preference to maintenance_work_mem.

Peter Geoghegan
2013-12-12 11:42:39 +00:00
Simon Riggs
36da3cfb45 Allow time delayed standbys and recovery
Set min_recovery_apply_delay to force a delay in recovery apply for commit and
restore point WAL records. Other records are replayed immediately. Delay is
measured between WAL record time and local standby time.

Robert Haas, Fabrízio de Royes Mello and Simon Riggs
Detailed review by Mitsumasa Kondo
2013-12-12 10:53:20 +00:00
Heikki Linnakangas
108e3992cd Display old and new values in pg_resetxlog -n output.
For extra clarity.

Rajeev Rastogi, reviewed by Amit Kapila
2013-12-12 11:57:18 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
e5dc4cc24d PL/Perl: Add event trigger support
From: Dimitri Fontaine <dimitri@2ndQuadrant.fr>
2013-12-11 08:11:59 -05:00
Robert Haas
6bea96dd49 Add a new option, -g, to createuser, to add membership in a role.
Chistopher Browne, reviewed by Sameer Thakur, Amit Kapila, and
Peter Eisentraut.
2013-12-11 07:50:36 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
a06af43695 doc: Fix DocBook table column count declaration
This was broken in d6464fdc0a.
2013-12-10 21:47:45 -05:00
Robert Haas
e55704d8b2 Add new wal_level, logical, sufficient for logical decoding.
When wal_level=logical, we'll log columns from the old tuple as
configured by the REPLICA IDENTITY facility added in commit
07cacba983.  This makes it possible
a properly-configured logical replication solution to correctly
follow table updates even if they change the chosen key columns,
or, with REPLICA IDENTITY FULL, even if the table has no key at
all.  Note that updates which do not modify the replica identity
column won't log anything extra, making the choice of a good key
(i.e. one that will rarely be changed) important to performance
when wal_level=logical is configured.

Each insert, update, or delete to a catalog table will also log
the CMIN and/or CMAX values of stamped by the current transaction.
This is necessary because logical decoding will require access to
historical snapshots of the catalog in order to decode some data
types, and the CMIN/CMAX values that we may need in order to judge
row visibility may have been overwritten by the time we need them.

Andres Freund, reviewed in various versions by myself, Heikki
Linnakangas, KONDO Mitsumasa, and many others.
2013-12-10 19:01:40 -05:00
Noah Misch
53685d7981 Rename TABLE() to ROWS FROM().
SQL-standard TABLE() is a subset of UNNEST(); they deal with arrays and
other collection types.  This feature, however, deals with set-returning
functions.  Use a different syntax for this feature to keep open the
possibility of implementing the standard TABLE().
2013-12-10 09:34:37 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
01cc1fecfd pgcrypto docs: update cpu type used in duration testing 2013-12-09 16:12:24 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
d6464fdc0a pgcrypto docs: update encryption timings and add relative times
Miles Elam
2013-12-09 16:10:47 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
54aa5ef7f2 Fix a couple of typos
Noted by Peter Geoghegan
2013-12-07 23:08:17 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
3164721462 SSL: Support ECDH key exchange
This sets up ECDH key exchange, when compiling against OpenSSL that
supports EC.  Then the ECDHE-RSA and ECDHE-ECDSA cipher suites can be
used for SSL connections.  The latter one means that EC keys are now
usable.

The reason for EC key exchange is that it's faster than DHE and it
allows to go to higher security levels where RSA will be horribly slow.

There is also new GUC option ssl_ecdh_curve that specifies the curve
name used for ECDH.  It defaults to "prime256v1", which is the most
common curve in use in HTTPS.

From: Marko Kreen <markokr@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Adrian Klaver <adrian.klaver@gmail.com>
2013-12-07 15:11:44 -05:00
Fujii Masao
91484409bd Expose qurey ID in pg_stat_statements view.
The query ID is the internal hash identifier of the statement,
and was not available in pg_stat_statements view so far.

Daniel Farina, Sameer Thakur and Peter Geoghegan, reviewed by me.
2013-12-08 02:06:02 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
ef3267523d SSL: Add configuration option to prefer server cipher order
By default, OpenSSL (and SSL/TLS in general) lets the client cipher
order take priority.  This is OK for browsers where the ciphers were
tuned, but few PostgreSQL client libraries make the cipher order
configurable.  So it makes sense to have the cipher order in
postgresql.conf take priority over client defaults.

This patch adds the setting "ssl_prefer_server_ciphers" that can be
turned on so that server cipher order is preferred.  Per discussion,
this now defaults to on.

From: Marko Kreen <markokr@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Adrian Klaver <adrian.klaver@gmail.com>
2013-12-07 08:13:50 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
8fe3d90d34 docs: update partition encryption options
Text from Adam Vande More
2013-12-06 09:47:39 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
fa4add50c4 docs: clarify SSL certificate authority chain docs
Previously, the requirements of how intermediate certificates were
handled and their chain to root certificates was unclear.
2013-12-06 09:42:08 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
5043fc8251 doc: split long query into multiple lines
Report from Erik Rijkers
2013-12-04 10:03:13 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
9e0a97f1c8 libpq: change PQconndefaults() to ignore invalid service files
Previously missing or invalid service files returned NULL.  Also fix
pg_upgrade to report "out of memory" for a null return from
PQconndefaults().

Patch by Steve Singer, rewritten by me
2013-12-03 11:12:25 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
95e3d50539 doc: Refine documentation about recovery command exist status
Add more documentation about how different exit codes and signals are
handled in each case.

Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@heroku.com>
2013-12-02 22:31:41 -05:00
Tom Lane
02bb4bbc66 Update release notes for 9.3.2, 9.2.6, 9.1.11, 9.0.15, 8.4.19. 2013-12-02 15:53:55 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
54916b99f7 doc: update wording of ineffective SET and ABORT commands
Wording by Alvaro Herrera
2013-12-02 12:51:58 -05:00
Tom Lane
b8b7b723f2 Improve draft release notes.
Per suggestions from Andres Freund.  Also fix spelling of
Sergey Burladyan's name.
2013-12-02 12:17:46 -05:00
Tom Lane
23e796de15 Draft release notes for 9.3.2.
I'm putting these up for review before I start to extract the relevant
subsets for the older branches.  It'll be easier to make any suggested
wording improvements at this stage.
2013-12-01 18:46:16 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
3c81b5c1d2 doc: Disable preface.autolabel in XSLT
The makes the output more consistent with the existing DSSSL setup.
2013-12-01 17:13:23 -05:00
Tom Lane
4796035402 Editorial corrections to the October 2013 minor-release notes.
This is mostly to fix incorrect migration instructions: since the preceding
minor releases advised reindexing some GIST indexes, it's important that
we back-link to that advice rather than earlier instances.

Also improve some bug descriptions and fix a few typos.

No back-patch yet; these files will get copied into the back branches
later in the release process.
2013-11-30 16:57:25 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
1eafea5d1b doc: Simplify handling of variablelists in XSLT build
The previously used custom template is no longer necessary because
parameters provided by the standard style sheet can achieve the same
outcome.
2013-11-29 22:42:47 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
50107ee7a5 doc: Enhance documentation of ssl_ciphers setting a bit 2013-11-29 09:06:28 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
384eb1d40d doc: Allow selecting web site CSS style sheet in XSLT HTML build 2013-11-28 22:45:08 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
b6ecde8ed4 doc: Set chunk.first.sections in XSLT, for consistency with DSSSL output 2013-11-27 22:42:04 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
9ef780d4d7 pg_buffercache docs: adjust order of fields
Adjust order of fields to match view order.

Jaime Casanova
2013-11-27 22:33:59 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
a607b6903e doc: Put data types in alphabetical order
From: Andreas Karlsson <andreas@proxel.se>
2013-11-27 21:50:27 -05:00
Kevin Grittner
89ba815092 Minor correction of READ COMMITTED isolation level docs.
Per report from AK
2013-11-27 14:34:12 -06:00
Michael Meskes
2390f2b2d3 Documentation fix for ecpg.
The latest fixes removed a limitation that was still in the docs, so Zoltan updated the docs, too.
2013-11-27 11:03:59 +01:00
Fujii Masao
d1b88f6b36 Add --xlogdir option to pg_basebackup, for specifying the pg_xlog directory.
Haribabu kommi, slightly modified by me.
2013-11-27 14:00:16 +09:00
Fujii Masao
551c78281b Fix typo in release note.
Backpatch to 9.1.

Josh Kupershmidt
2013-11-27 13:48:01 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
85ed91ee7d Implement information_schema.parameters.parameter_default column
Reviewed-by: Ali Dar <ali.munir.dar@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Khandekar <amit.khandekar@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Rodolfo Campero <rodolfo.campero@anachronics.com>
2013-11-26 23:21:35 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
3803ff985c doc: Add id to index in XSLT build
That way, the HTML file name of the index will be the same as currently
for the DSSSL build.
2013-11-26 23:02:40 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
a6542a4b68 Change SET LOCAL/CONSTRAINTS/TRANSACTION and ABORT behavior
Change SET LOCAL/CONSTRAINTS/TRANSACTION behavior outside of a
transaction block from error (post-9.3) to warning.  (Was nothing in <=
9.3.)  Also change ABORT outside of a transaction block from notice to
warning.
2013-11-25 19:19:40 -05:00
Michael Meskes
05b476c298 More improvement to comment parsing in ecpg.
ECPG is not supposed to allow and output nested comments in C. These comments
are only allowed in the SQL parts and must not be written into the C file.
Also the different handling of different comments is documented.
2013-11-25 15:38:09 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
a5036ca998 PL/Tcl: Add event trigger support
From: Dimitri Fontaine <dimitri@2ndQuadrant.fr>
2013-11-23 21:32:00 -05:00
Tom Lane
784e762e88 Support multi-argument UNNEST(), and TABLE() syntax for multiple functions.
This patch adds the ability to write TABLE( function1(), function2(), ...)
as a single FROM-clause entry.  The result is the concatenation of the
first row from each function, followed by the second row from each
function, etc; with NULLs inserted if any function produces fewer rows than
others.  This is believed to be a much more useful behavior than what
Postgres currently does with multiple SRFs in a SELECT list.

This syntax also provides a reasonable way to combine use of column
definition lists with WITH ORDINALITY: put the column definition list
inside TABLE(), where it's clear that it doesn't control the ordinality
column as well.

Also implement SQL-compliant multiple-argument UNNEST(), by turning
UNNEST(a,b,c) into TABLE(unnest(a), unnest(b), unnest(c)).

The SQL standard specifies TABLE() with only a single function, not
multiple functions, and it seems to require an implicit UNNEST() which is
not what this patch does.  There may be something wrong with that reading
of the spec, though, because if it's right then the spec's TABLE() is just
a pointless alternative spelling of UNNEST().  After further review of
that, we might choose to adopt a different syntax for what this patch does,
but in any case this functionality seems clearly worthwhile.

Andrew Gierth, reviewed by Zoltán Böszörményi and Heikki Linnakangas, and
significantly revised by me
2013-11-21 19:37:20 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
22967d8003 docs: update page format to specify page checksum field
Backpatch to 9.3

Per report from Steffen Hildebrandt
2013-11-19 16:54:42 -05:00
Tom Lane
f901bb50e3 Add make_date() and make_time() functions.
Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Jeevan Chalke and Atri Sharma
2013-11-17 15:06:50 -05:00
Tom Lane
6cb86143e8 Allow aggregates to provide estimates of their transition state data size.
Formerly the planner had a hard-wired rule of thumb for guessing the amount
of space consumed by an aggregate function's transition state data.  This
estimate is critical to deciding whether it's OK to use hash aggregation,
and in many situations the built-in estimate isn't very good.  This patch
adds a column to pg_aggregate wherein a per-aggregate estimate can be
provided, overriding the planner's default, and infrastructure for setting
the column via CREATE AGGREGATE.

It may be that additional smarts will be required in future, perhaps even
a per-aggregate estimation function.  But this is already a step forward.

This is extracted from a larger patch to improve the performance of numeric
and int8 aggregates.  I (tgl) thought it was worth reviewing and committing
this infrastructure separately.  In this commit, all built-in aggregates
are given aggtransspace = 0, so no behavior should change.

Hadi Moshayedi, reviewed by Pavel Stehule and Tomas Vondra
2013-11-16 16:03:40 -05:00
Robert Haas
71dd54ada9 doc: Restore proper alphabetical order.
Colin 't Hart
2013-11-15 08:46:12 -05:00
Tom Lane
5d924f067c Clarify CREATE FUNCTION documentation about handling of typmods.
The previous text was a bit misleading, as well as unnecessarily vague
about what information would be discarded.  Per gripe from Craig Skinner.
2013-11-13 13:30:15 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
cd8115e009 docs: clarify MVCC introduction to allow for per-statement snapshots 2013-11-13 10:14:08 -05:00
Robert Haas
9cab81b572 doc: Fix typo.
Reported by Thom Brown.
2013-11-12 10:24:43 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
001e114b8d Fix whitespace issues found by git diff --check, add gitattributes
Set per file type attributes in .gitattributes to fine-tune whitespace
checks.  With the associated cleanups, the tree is now clean for git
2013-11-10 14:48:29 -05:00
Robert Haas
636b868f17 doc: Clarify under what circumstances pg_dump needs superuser access.
Inspired by, but different from, a patch from Ivan Lezhnjov IV
2013-11-08 15:08:11 -05:00
Robert Haas
07cacba983 Add the notion of REPLICA IDENTITY for a table.
Pending patches for logical replication will use this to determine
which columns of a tuple ought to be considered as its candidate key.

Andres Freund, with minor, mostly cosmetic adjustments by me
2013-11-08 12:30:43 -05:00
Tom Lane
bb45c64041 Support default arguments and named-argument notation for window functions.
These things didn't work because the planner omitted to do the necessary
preprocessing of a WindowFunc's argument list.  Add the few dozen lines
of code needed to handle that.

Although this sounds like a feature addition, it's really a bug fix because
the default-argument case was likely to crash previously, due to lack of
checking of the number of supplied arguments in the built-in window
functions.  It's not a security issue because there's no way for a
non-superuser to create a window function definition with defaults that
refers to a built-in C function, but nonetheless people might be annoyed
that it crashes rather than producing a useful error message.  So
back-patch as far as the patch applies easily, which turns out to be 9.2.
I'll put a band-aid in earlier versions as a separate patch.

(Note that these features still don't work for aggregates, and fixing that
case will be harder since we represent aggregate arg lists as target lists
not bare expression lists.  There's no crash risk though because CREATE
AGGREGATE doesn't accept defaults, and we reject named-argument notation
when parsing an aggregate call.)
2013-11-06 13:33:09 -05:00
Tom Lane
920c8261d5 Improve the error message given for modifying a window with frame clause.
For rather inscrutable reasons, SQL:2008 disallows copying-and-modifying a
window definition that has any explicit framing clause.  The error message
we gave for this only made sense if the referencing window definition
itself contains an explicit framing clause, which it might well not.
Moreover, in the context of an OVER clause it's not exactly obvious that
"OVER (windowname)" implies copy-and-modify while "OVER windowname" does
not.  This has led to multiple complaints, eg bug #5199 from Iliya
Krapchatov.  Change to a hopefully more intelligible error message, and
in the case where we have just "OVER (windowname)", add a HINT suggesting
that omitting the parentheses will fix it.  Also improve the related
documentation.  Back-patch to all supported branches.
2013-11-05 21:58:08 -05:00
Tom Lane
45f64f1bbf Remove CTimeZone/HasCTZSet, root and branch.
These variables no longer have any useful purpose, since there's no reason
to special-case brute force timezones now that we have a valid
session_timezone setting for them.  Remove the variables, and remove the
SET/SHOW TIME ZONE code that deals with them.

The user-visible impact of this is that SHOW TIME ZONE will now show a
POSIX-style zone specification, in the form "<+-offset>-+offset", rather
than an interval value when a brute-force zone has been set.  While perhaps
less intuitive, this is a better definition than before because it's
actually possible to give that string back to SET TIME ZONE and get the
same behavior, unlike what used to happen.

We did not previously mention the angle-bracket syntax when describing
POSIX timezone specifications; add some documentation so that people
can figure out what these strings do.  (There's still quite a lot of
undocumented functionality there, but anybody who really cares can
go read the POSIX spec to find out about it.  In practice most people
seem to prefer Olsen-style city names anyway.)
2013-11-01 13:57:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
c2b51cf190 Improve documentation about usage of FDW validator functions.
SGML documentation, as well as code comments, failed to note that an FDW's
validator will be applied to foreign-table options for foreign tables using
the FDW.

Etsuro Fujita
2013-10-28 10:28:35 -04:00
Tom Lane
438df52df9 Suppress duplicate-index-entry warning introduced by previous commit.
We don't need two index entries for lo_create pointing at the same section.
It's a bit pedantic for the toolchain to warn about this, but warn it does.
2013-10-28 10:00:28 -04:00
Noah Misch
c50b7c09d8 Add large object functions catering to SQL callers.
With these, one need no longer manipulate large object descriptors and
extract numeric constants from header files in order to read and write
large object contents from SQL.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Rushabh Lathia.
2013-10-27 22:56:54 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
75fdcec145 Improve documentation of random() function.
Move random() and setseed() to a separate table, to have them grouped
together. Also add a notice that random() is not cryptographically secure.

Original patch by Honza Horak, although I didn't use his version.
2013-10-24 15:40:23 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
a5963efa8f doc: Improve setup for documentation building with FOP
Add a makefile rule for building PDFs with FOP.  Two new build targets
in doc/src/sgml are postgres-A4-fop.pdf and postgres-US-fop.pdf.

Run .fo output through xmllint for reformatting, so that errors are
easier to find.  (The default output has hardly any line breaks, so you
might be looking for an error in column 20000.)

Set some XSLT parameters to optimize for building with FOP.

Remove some redundant or somewhat useless chapterinfo/author
information, because it renders strangely with the FO stylesheet.

Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com>
2013-10-21 06:43:08 -04:00
Robert Haas
cab5dc5daf Allow only some columns of a view to be auto-updateable.
Previously, unless all columns were auto-updateable, we wouldn't
inserts, updates, or deletes, or at least not without a rule or trigger;
now, we'll allow inserts and updates that target only the auto-updateable
columns, and deletes even if there are no auto-updateable columns at
all provided the view definition is otherwise suitable.

Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Marko Tiikkaja
2013-10-18 10:35:36 -04:00
Robert Haas
523beaa11b Provide a reliable mechanism for terminating a background worker.
Although previously-introduced APIs allow the process that registers a
background worker to obtain the worker's PID, there's no way to prevent
a worker that is not currently running from being restarted.  This
patch introduces a new API TerminateBackgroundWorker() that prevents
the background worker from being restarted, terminates it if it is
currently running, and causes it to be unregistered if or when it is
not running.

Patch by me.  Review by Michael Paquier and KaiGai Kohei.
2013-10-18 10:23:11 -04:00
Robert Haas
ea91a6be89 Remove IRIX port.
Development of IRIX has been discontinued, and support is scheduled
to end in December of 2013.  Therefore, there will be no supported
versions of this operating system by the time PostgreSQL 9.4 is
released.  Furthermore, we have no maintainer for this platform.
2013-10-18 08:14:21 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
ed632ab21e doc: Configure TOC generation in XSLT HTML build
The default table of contents in the XSLT HTML build is much too big and
deep.  Configure it to look more like the one that is currently being
produced by the DSSSL build.
2013-10-17 22:00:27 -04:00
Robert Haas
81051a86bc Remove spinlock support for SINIX, Sun3, and NS32K.
All of these platforms are very much obsolete.

As far as I can determine, the last version of SINIX, later renamed
Reliant, occurred some time between 2002 and 2005.

The last release of SunOS that would run on a sun3 was released in
November of 1991; the last release of OpenBSD which supported that
platform was in 2001.  The highest clock speed of any processor in
the family was 25MHz.

The NS32K (national semiconductor 320xx) architecture was retired
in 1990.

Support can be re-added if a maintainer emerges for any of these
platforms, but it seems unlikely.

Reviewed by Andres Freund.
2013-10-17 12:02:05 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
90c7b7d16b doc: Enable book index in XSLT builds
The XSLT toolchain requires an empty <index> element where the index is
supposed to appear.  Add that with conditionals to hide it from the
DSSSL build.
2013-10-15 22:54:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f918c52f65 docs: correct 9.1 and 9.2 release note mention of timeline switch fix
Backpatch through 9.1.

KONDO Mitsumasa
2013-10-15 10:34:05 -04:00
Robert Haas
05a0283e7a Fix details missed by dynamic shared memory patch.
Additional documentation update, and a comment fix.

Both issues reported by Amit Kapila.
2013-10-14 08:00:26 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
956f2db490 doc: Move check-tabs target into html target
The previous plan of having the check-tabs target a prerequisite of
"all" and "distprep" caused make distcheck to fail because make -q
distprep would never be satisfied.  Put check-tabs into the html target
instead, so it is only called when a build actually happens.
2013-10-10 21:53:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
8238d1ed8f doc: Fix table column number declaration 2013-10-10 21:17:31 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
92c2d2ba3a doc: Handle additional character entities for SGML/XML conversion 2013-10-10 21:14:33 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5dd41f3574 Remove maintainer-check target, fold into normal build
make maintainer-check was obscure and rarely called in practice, and
many breakages were missed.  Fold everything that make maintainer-check
used to do into the normal build.  Specifically:

- Call duplicate_oids when genbki.pl is called.

- Check for tabs in SGML files when the documentation is built.

- Run msgfmt with the -c option during the regular build.  Add an
  additional configure check to see whether we are using the GNU
  version.  (make maintainer-check probably used to fail with non-GNU
  msgfmt.)

Keep maintainer-check as around as phony target for the time being in
case anyone is calling it.  But it won't do anything anymore.
2013-10-10 20:11:56 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
4d212bac17 json_typeof function.
Andrew Tipton.
2013-10-10 12:21:59 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
261c7d4b65 Revive line type
Change the input/output format to {A,B,C}, to match the internal
representation.

Complete the implementations of line_in, line_out, line_recv, line_send.
Remove comments and error messages about the line type not being
implemented.  Add regression tests for existing line operators and
functions.

Reviewed-by: rui hua <365507506hua@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Jeevan Chalke <jeevan.chalke@enterprisedb.com>
2013-10-09 22:34:38 -04:00
Robert Haas
0ac5e5a7e1 Allow dynamic allocation of shared memory segments.
Patch by myself and Amit Kapila.  Design help from Noah Misch.  Review
by Andres Freund.
2013-10-09 21:05:02 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
f566515192 Add record_image_ops opclass for matview concurrent refresh.
REFRESH MATERIALIZED VIEW CONCURRENTLY was broken for any matview
containing a column of a type without a default btree operator
class.  It also did not produce results consistent with a non-
concurrent REFRESH or a normal view if any column was of a type
which allowed user-visible differences between values which
compared as equal according to the type's default btree opclass.
Concurrent matview refresh was modified to use the new operators
to solve these problems.

Documentation was added for record comparison, both for the
default btree operator class for record, and the newly added
operators.  Regression tests now check for proper behavior both
for a matview with a box column and a matview containing a citext
column.

Reviewed by Steve Singer, who suggested some of the doc language.
2013-10-09 14:26:09 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
1cccce50f3 doc: fix typo in release notes
Backpatch through 8.4

Per suggestion by Amit Langote
2013-10-09 08:44:52 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
3e5a9eee8a doc: Fix typo in effective_cache_size patch 2013-10-08 19:02:37 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9c29138c75 docs: clarify references to md5 hash and md5 crypt in pgcrypto docs
Suggestion from Richard Neill
2013-10-08 12:24:02 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ee1e5662d8 Auto-tune effective_cache size to be 4x shared buffers 2013-10-08 12:12:24 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1732ce4906 docs: update release notes for 8.4.18, 9.0.14, 9.1.10, 9.2.5, 9.3.1 2013-10-07 21:35:02 -04:00
Robert Haas
689746c045 plpgsql: Add new option print_strict_params.
This option provides more detailed error messages when STRICT is used
and the number of rows returned is not one.

Marko Tiikkaja, reviewed by Ian Lawrence Barwick
2013-10-07 15:38:49 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
2e1cb733f9 Document support for VPATH builds of extensions.
Cédric Villemain and me.
2013-10-06 22:57:16 -04:00
Noah Misch
2d6c0f10ef pgbench: Elaborate latency reporting.
Isolate transaction latency (elapsed time between submitting first
command and receiving response to last command) from client-side delays
pertaining to the --rate schedule.  Under --rate, report schedule lag as
defined in the documentation.  Report latency standard deviation
whenever we collect the measurements to do so.  All of these changes
affect --progress messages and the final report.

Fabien COELHO, reviewed by Pavel Stehule.
2013-10-05 17:33:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
85fa8293ad pg_upgrade doc: link mode additions
Mention that link mode uses less disk space, and uses junction points on
Windows.

Backpatch to 9.3.
2013-10-05 10:18:25 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
a54141aebc Issue error on SET outside transaction block in some cases
Issue error for SET LOCAL/CONSTRAINTS/TRANSACTION outside a transaction
block, as they have no effect.

Per suggestion from Morten Hustveit
2013-10-04 13:50:28 -04:00
Robert Haas
4655b607f3 doc: Add missing words to bgworker docs.
Maciek Sakrejda
2013-10-04 11:13:50 -04:00
Robert Haas
d90ced8bb2 Add DISCARD SEQUENCES command.
DISCARD ALL will now discard cached sequence information, as well.

Fabrízio de Royes Mello, reviewed by Zoltán Böszörményi, with some
further tweaks by me.
2013-10-03 16:23:31 -04:00
Robert Haas
c64e68fd9f psql: Make \pset without arguments show all settings.
Gilles Darold, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2013-10-03 15:18:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
627882d0d8 doc: Correct psycopg URL 2013-10-02 21:33:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
eb5d87e5f3 doc: fix hstore_to_json_loose() doc wording 2013-10-02 19:25:30 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
542131c9e7 Fix copy/paste error 2013-10-02 16:43:33 +02:00
Robert Haas
4334639f4b Allow printf-style padding specifications in log_line_prefix.
David Rowley, after a suggestion from Heikki Linnakangas.  Reviewed by
Albe Laurenz, and further edited by me.
2013-09-26 17:56:31 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
d70f8d5f1b Fix erroneous statements about multiply specified JSON columns.
The behaviour in json_populate_record() and json_populate_recordset()
was changed during development but the docs were not.
2013-09-26 17:39:28 -04:00
Noah Misch
825da2aba8 pgbench: Tweak documentation.
Fabien COELHO
2013-09-23 15:49:21 -04:00
Robert Haas
54990af616 doc: Clarify that file_fdw options require values.
Mike Blackwell and Robert Haas
2013-09-23 14:57:01 -04:00
Robert Haas
ba3d39c969 Don't allow system columns in CHECK constraints, except tableoid.
Previously, arbitray system columns could be mentioned in table
constraints, but they were not correctly checked at runtime, because
the values weren't actually set correctly in the tuple.  Since it
seems easy enough to initialize the table OID properly, do that,
and continue allowing that column, but disallow the rest unless and
until someone figures out a way to make them work properly.

No back-patch, because this doesn't seem important enough to take the
risk of destabilizing the back branches.  In fact, this will pose a
dump-and-reload hazard for those upgrading from previous versions:
constraints that were accepted before but were not correctly enforced
will now either be enforced correctly or not accepted at all.  Either
could result in restore failures, but in practice I think very few
users will notice the difference, since the use case is pretty
marginal anyway and few users will be relying on features that have
not historically worked.

Amit Kapila, reviewed by Rushabh Lathia, with doc changes by me.
2013-09-23 13:31:22 -04:00
Robert Haas
eb3b79ffd4 Documentation correction.
Etsuro Fujita
2013-09-18 09:05:10 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
0892ecbc01 Add a GUC to report whether data page checksums are enabled.
Bernd Helmle
2013-09-16 14:36:01 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
cdeb79adcf Fix typos 2013-09-15 11:01:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2885006afc docs: Update libpq and testlo examples
Josh Kupershmidt
2013-09-10 21:03:11 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
b34f8f409b Show schemas in information_schema.schemata that the current has access to
Before, it would only show schemas that the current user owns.  Per
discussion, the new behavior is more useful and consistent for PostgreSQL.
2013-09-09 22:25:37 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
277607d600 Eliminate pg_rewrite.ev_attr column and related dead code.
Commit 95ef6a3448 removed the
ability to create rules on an individual column as of 7.3, but
left some residual code which has since been useless.  This cleans
up that dead code without any change in behavior other than
dropping the useless column from the catalog.
2013-09-05 14:03:43 -05:00
Jeff Davis
be6fcb671e Improve Range Types and Exclusion Constraints example.
Make the examples self-contained to avoid confusion. Per bug report
8367 from KOIZUMI Satoru.
2013-09-04 23:30:27 -07:00
Tom Lane
546f7c2e38 Don't fail for bad GUCs in CREATE FUNCTION with check_function_bodies off.
The previous coding attempted to activate all the GUC settings specified
in SET clauses, so that the function validator could operate in the GUC
environment expected by the function body.  However, this is problematic
when restoring a dump, since the SET clauses might refer to database
objects that don't exist yet.  We already have the parameter
check_function_bodies that's meant to prevent forward references in
function definitions from breaking dumps, so let's change CREATE FUNCTION
to not install the SET values if check_function_bodies is off.

Authors of function validators were already advised not to make any
"context sensitive" checks when check_function_bodies is off, if indeed
they're checking anything at all in that mode.  But extend the
documentation to point out the GUC issue in particular.

(Note that we still check the SET clauses to some extent; the behavior
with !check_function_bodies is now approximately equivalent to what ALTER
DATABASE/ROLE have been doing for awhile with context-dependent GUCs.)

This problem can be demonstrated in all active branches, so back-patch
all the way.
2013-09-03 18:32:20 -04:00
Tom Lane
0d3f4406df Allow aggregate functions to be VARIADIC.
There's no inherent reason why an aggregate function can't be variadic
(even VARIADIC ANY) if its transition function can handle the case.
Indeed, this patch to add the feature touches none of the planner or
executor, and little of the parser; the main missing stuff was DDL and
pg_dump support.

It is true that variadic aggregates can create the same sort of ambiguity
about parameters versus ORDER BY keys that was complained of when we
(briefly) had both one- and two-argument forms of string_agg().  However,
the policy formed in response to that discussion only said that we'd not
create any built-in aggregates with varying numbers of arguments, not that
we shouldn't allow users to do it.  So the logical extension of that is
we can allow users to make variadic aggregates as long as we're wary about
shipping any such in core.

In passing, this patch allows aggregate function arguments to be named, to
the extent of remembering the names in pg_proc and dumping them in pg_dump.
You can't yet call an aggregate using named-parameter notation.  That seems
like a likely future extension, but it'll take some work, and it's not what
this patch is really about.  Likewise, there's still some work needed to
make window functions handle VARIADIC fully, but I left that for another
day.

initdb forced because of new aggvariadic field in Aggref parse nodes.
2013-09-03 17:08:46 -04:00
Tom Lane
7489eb4d3b Docs: wording improvements in discussion of timestamp arithmetic.
I started out just to fix the broken markup in commit
1c20857661, but got distracted by
copy-editing.  I see Bruce already fixed the markup, but I'll
commit the wordsmithing anyway.
2013-09-03 16:28:56 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b642bc55fa doc: Fix SGML markup for date patch 2013-09-03 16:06:24 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1c20857661 Docs: add paragraph about date/timestamp subtraction
per suggestion from Francisco Olart
2013-09-03 13:24:39 -04:00
Robert Haas
9d323bda2e docs: Clarify that we also support Solaris versions greater than 10.
MauMau
2013-09-03 11:16:37 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
f002dc3d4d Fix relfrozenxid query in docs to include TOAST tables.
The original query ignored TOAST tables which could result in tables
needing a vacuum not being reported.

Backpatch to all live branches.
2013-09-02 14:38:12 -04:00
Tom Lane
244c8b466a Update "Using EXPLAIN" documentation examples using current code.
It seems like a good idea to update these examples since some fairly
basic planner behaviors have changed in 9.3; notably that the startup cost
for an indexscan plan node is no longer invariably estimated at 0.00.
2013-09-01 19:43:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
f49f8de074 Update 9.3 release notes.
Some corrections, a lot of copy-editing.

Set projected release date as 2013-09-09.
2013-08-31 23:53:24 -04:00
Robert Haas
090d0f2050 Allow discovery of whether a dynamic background worker is running.
Using the infrastructure provided by this patch, it's possible either
to wait for the startup of a dynamically-registered background worker,
or to poll the status of such a worker without waiting.  In either
case, the current PID of the worker process can also be obtained.
As usual, worker_spi is updated to demonstrate the new functionality.

Patch by me.  Review by Andres Freund.
2013-08-28 14:08:13 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
da85fb4747 Accept multiple -I, -P, -T and -n options in pg_restore.
We already did this for -t (--table) in 9.3, but missed the other similar
options. For consistency, allow all of them to be specified multiple times.

Unfortunately it's too late to sneak this into 9.3, so commit to master
only.
2013-08-28 09:43:34 +03:00
Robert Haas
8d00ab6306 doc: Explain that ereport doesn't return for ERROR or higher levels.
Christophe Pettus
2013-08-26 14:27:43 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5dcc48c2c7 docs: Remove second 'trim' index reference
Per suggestion from Vik Fearing
2013-08-21 07:32:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b3cc173e19 release notes: update link to 9.3 PL/pgSQL constraint error info
Backpatch to 9.3.

Pavel Stehule
2013-08-20 09:39:08 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1bc5935b67 release notes: remove username from 9.3 major item
Etsuro Fujita
2013-08-19 12:26:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
175ec8de47 release notes: update 9.3 major feature list
Backpatch to 9.3.
2013-08-16 18:01:05 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e91f2bb3ee release notes: Update to 9.3 git current
Backpatch to 9.3, of course.
2013-08-16 16:54:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5368a23eeb docs: document TRIM "comma" syntax
This syntax is supported by the parser, but is non-standard.

_Not_ backpatched to 9.3 in case we change our minds.
2013-08-14 17:26:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b52cd9d022 9.3 release notes: move foreign table item
Move item about foreign data wrappers supporting inserts/updates/deletes
to object manipulation.

From Etsuro Fujita
2013-08-13 12:49:24 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f738156f51 docs: mention Julian is midnight _UTC_
(Yes, there was no UTC back then, but we compute it that way.)
Backpatch to 9.3.
2013-08-09 21:46:13 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
72039b1d8d Docs: Document to_*() Julian values are integers
Backpatch to 9.3.
Per request from Marc Dahn
2013-08-09 19:25:51 -04:00
Fujii Masao
0e65755c08 Document how auto_explain.log_timing can be changed. 2013-08-09 22:13:28 +09:00
Fujii Masao
ee08a78a81 Fix inaccurate description of tablespace.
Currently we don't need to update the pg_tablespace catalog
after redefining the symbolic links to the tablespaces
because pg_tablespace.spclocation column was removed in
PostgreSQL 9.2.

Back patch to 9.2 where pg_tablespace.spclocation was removed.

Ian Barwick, with minor change by me.
2013-07-31 22:35:12 +09:00
Greg Stark
c62736cc37 Add SQL Standard WITH ORDINALITY support for UNNEST (and any other SRF)
Author: Andrew Gierth, David Fetter
Reviewers: Dean Rasheed, Jeevan Chalke, Stephen Frost
2013-07-29 16:38:01 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
5691de6c95 pg_upgrade docs: don't use cluster for binary/lib
In a few cases, pg_upgrade said old/new cluster location when it meant
old/new Postgres install location, so fix those.
Per private email report
2013-07-26 13:52:01 -04:00
Tom Lane
3d13623d75 Prevent leakage of SPI tuple tables during subtransaction abort.
plpgsql often just remembers SPI-result tuple tables in local variables,
and has no mechanism for freeing them if an ereport(ERROR) causes an escape
out of the execution function whose local variable it is.  In the original
coding, that wasn't a problem because the tuple table would be cleaned up
when the function's SPI context went away during transaction abort.
However, once plpgsql grew the ability to trap exceptions, repeated
trapping of errors within a function could result in significant
intra-function-call memory leakage, as illustrated in bug #8279 from
Chad Wagner.

We could fix this locally in plpgsql with a bunch of PG_TRY/PG_CATCH
coding, but that would be tedious, probably slow, and prone to bugs of
omission; moreover it would do nothing for similar risks elsewhere.
What seems like a better plan is to make SPI itself responsible for
freeing tuple tables at subtransaction abort.  This patch attacks the
problem that way, keeping a list of live tuple tables within each SPI
function context.  Currently, such freeing is automatic for tuple tables
made within the failed subtransaction.  We might later add a SPI call to
mark a tuple table as not to be freed this way, allowing callers to opt
out; but until someone exhibits a clear use-case for such behavior, it
doesn't seem worth bothering.

A very useful side-effect of this change is that SPI_freetuptable() can
now defend itself against bad calls, such as duplicate free requests;
this should make things more robust in many places.  (In particular,
this reduces the risks involved if a third-party extension contains
now-redundant SPI_freetuptable() calls in error cleanup code.)

Even though the leakage problem is of long standing, it seems imprudent
to back-patch this into stable branches, since it does represent an API
semantics change for SPI users.  We'll patch this in 9.3, but live with
the leakage in older branches.
2013-07-25 16:46:14 -04:00
Robert Haas
fd27b99919 pgstattuple: Doc update for previous commit.
In my previous change to make pgstattuple use SnapshotDirty rather
than SnapshotNow, I failed to notice that the documenation also
needed to be updated to match.  Fix.
2013-07-25 16:36:49 -04:00
Stephen Frost
8312832567 Add GET DIAGNOSTICS ... PG_CONTEXT in PL/PgSQL
This adds the ability to get the call stack as a string from within a
PL/PgSQL function, which can be handy for logging to a table, or to
include in a useful message to an end-user.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Rushabh Lathia and rather heavily whacked
around by Stephen Frost.
2013-07-24 18:53:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
2f1fa75a0c doc: Remove tab from SGML file 2013-07-22 21:02:12 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
fc9f4e9f8c Add --rate option.
This controls the target transaction rate to certain tps, rather than
maximum. Patch contributed by Fabien COELHO, reviewed by Greg Smith,
and slight editing by me.
2013-07-23 08:40:22 +09:00
Robert Haas
f40a318eea Remove bgw_sighup and bgw_sigterm.
Per discussion on pgsql-hackers, these aren't really needed.  Interim
versions of the background worker patch had the worker starting with
signals already unblocked, which would have made this necessary.
But the final version does not, so we don't really need it; and it
doesn't work well with the new facility for starting dynamic background
workers, so just rip it out.

Also per discussion on pgsql-hackers, back-patch this change to 9.3.
It's best to get the API break out of the way before we do an
official release of this facility, to avoid more pain for extension
authors later.
2013-07-22 14:13:00 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
0aeb5ae204 Silence compiler warning on an unused variable
Also, tweak wording in comments (per Andres) and documentation (myself)
to point out that it's the database's default tablespace that can be
passed as 0, not DEFAULTTABLESPACE_OID.  Robert Haas noticed the bug in
the code, but didn't update the accompanying prose.
2013-07-22 13:15:13 -04:00
Robert Haas
f01d1ae3a1 Add infrastructure for mapping relfilenodes to relation OIDs.
Future patches are expected to introduce logical replication that
works by decoding WAL.  WAL contains relfilenodes rather than relation
OIDs, so this infrastructure will be needed to find the relation OID
based on WAL contents.

If logical replication does not make it into this release, we probably
should consider reverting this, since it will add some overhead to DDL
operations that create new relations.  One additional index insert per
pg_class row is not a large overhead, but it's more than zero.
Another way of meeting the needs of logical replication would be to
the relation OID to WAL, but that would burden DML operations, not
only DDL.

Andres Freund, with some changes by me.  Design review, in earlier
versions, by Álvaro Herrera.
2013-07-22 11:09:10 -04:00
Robert Haas
c8fb821afc doc: Fix typos in conversion names.
David Christensen
2013-07-19 10:53:41 -04:00
Stephen Frost
4cbe3ac3e8 WITH CHECK OPTION support for auto-updatable VIEWs
For simple views which are automatically updatable, this patch allows
the user to specify what level of checking should be done on records
being inserted or updated.  For 'LOCAL CHECK', new tuples are validated
against the conditionals of the view they are being inserted into, while
for 'CASCADED CHECK' the new tuples are validated against the
conditionals for all views involved (from the top down).

This option is part of the SQL specification.

Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2013-07-18 17:10:16 -04:00
Fujii Masao
1dc118660b Fix pgstattuple functions to use regclass-type as the argument.
This allows us to specify the target relation with several expressions,
'relname', 'schemaname.relname' and OID in all pgstattuple functions.
pgstatindex() and pg_relpages() could not accept OID as the argument
so far.

Per discussion on -hackers, we decided to keep two types of interfaces,
with regclass-type and TEXT-type argument, for each pgstattuple
function because of the backward-compatibility issue. The functions
which have TEXT-type argument will be deprecated in the future release.

Patch by Satoshi Nagayasu, reviewed by Rushabh Lathia and Fujii Masao.
2013-07-19 03:50:20 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
e8b1d1befe doc: Remove tab from SGML file 2013-07-17 19:41:45 -04:00
Fujii Masao
750f43685b Fix typo in previous pgbench --progress patch. 2013-07-18 01:21:30 +09:00
Stephen Frost
f2719f6975 Use correct parameter name for view_option_value
The documentation for ALTER VIEW had a minor copy-and-paste error in
defining the parameters.  Noticed when reviewing the WITH CHECK OPTION
patch.

Backpatch to 9.2 where this was first introduced.
2013-07-17 10:50:39 -04:00
Noah Misch
b560ec1b0d Implement the FILTER clause for aggregate function calls.
This is SQL-standard with a few extensions, namely support for
subqueries and outer references in clause expressions.

catversion bump due to change in Aggref and WindowFunc.

David Fetter, reviewed by Dean Rasheed.
2013-07-16 20:15:36 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
4a87f308b3 Add --progress option to show progress report
Patch contributed by Fabien COELHO, reviewed by KONDO Mitsumasa.
2013-07-17 08:05:37 +09:00
Kevin Grittner
cc1965a99b Add support for REFRESH MATERIALIZED VIEW CONCURRENTLY.
This allows reads to continue without any blocking while a REFRESH
runs.  The new data appears atomically as part of transaction
commit.

Review questioned the Assert that a matview was not a system
relation.  This will be addressed separately.

Reviewed by Hitoshi Harada, Robert Haas, Andres Freund.
Merged after review with security patch f3ab5d4.
2013-07-16 12:55:44 -05:00
Robert Haas
7f7485a0cd Allow background workers to be started dynamically.
There is a new API, RegisterDynamicBackgroundWorker, which allows
an ordinary user backend to register a new background writer during
normal running.  This means that it's no longer necessary for all
background workers to be registered during processing of
shared_preload_libraries, although the option of registering workers
at that time remains available.

When a background worker exits and will not be restarted, the
slot previously used by that background worker is automatically
released and becomes available for reuse.  Slots used by background
workers that are configured for automatic restart can't (yet) be
released without shutting down the system.

This commit adds a new source file, bgworker.c, and moves some
of the existing control logic for background workers there.
Previously, there was little enough logic that it made sense to
keep everything in postmaster.c, but not any more.

This commit also makes the worker_spi contrib module into an
extension and adds a new function, worker_spi_launch, which can
be used to demonstrate the new facility.
2013-07-16 13:02:15 -04:00
Noah Misch
01337d46eb Document the OVER keyword as being unreserved.
It became so in commit 5893ffa79c.

David Fetter, extracted from a larger patch.
2013-07-14 19:49:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
070518ddab Add session_preload_libraries configuration parameter
This is like shared_preload_libraries except that it takes effect at
backend start and can be changed without a full postmaster restart.  It
is like local_preload_libraries except that it is still only settable by
a superuser.  This can be a better way to load modules such as
auto_explain.

Since there are now three preload parameters, regroup the documentation
a bit.  Put all parameters into one section, explain common
functionality only once, update the descriptions to reflect current and
future realities.

Reviewed-by: Dimitri Fontaine <dimitri@2ndQuadrant.fr>
2013-07-12 21:23:50 -04:00
Noah Misch
f3ab5d4696 Switch user ID to the object owner when populating a materialized view.
This makes superuser-issued REFRESH MATERIALIZED VIEW safe regardless of
the object's provenance.  REINDEX is an earlier example of this pattern.
As a downside, functions called from materialized views must tolerate
running in a security-restricted operation.  CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW
need not change user ID.  Nonetheless, avoid creation of materialized
views that will invariably fail REFRESH by making it, too, start a
security-restricted operation.

Back-patch to 9.3 so materialized views have this from the beginning.

Reviewed by Kevin Grittner.
2013-07-12 18:21:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
886c05d8e8 pg_upgrade: document possible pg_hba.conf options
Previously, pg_upgrade docs recommended using .pgpass if using MD5
authentication to avoid being prompted for a password.  Turns out pg_ctl
never prompts for a password, so MD5 requires .pgpass --- document that.
Also recommend 'peer' for authentication too.
Backpatch back to 9.1.
2013-07-11 09:43:22 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f02b14f787 doc: Replace link to pgFouine with pgBadger
From: Ian Lawrence Barwick <barwick@gmail.com>
2013-07-10 22:40:41 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
12fbe2b3dd Fix mention of htup.h in pageinspect docs
It's htup_details.h now.

Jeff Janes
2013-07-08 17:13:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
27aa1b960a pg_upgrade: document link options
Document that tablespaces and pg_xlog can be on different file systems
for pg_upgrade --link mode.
Backpatch to 9.3.
2013-07-07 15:58:15 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7919398bac PL/Python: Convert numeric to Decimal
The old implementation converted PostgreSQL numeric to Python float,
which was always considered a shortcoming.  Now numeric is converted to
the Python Decimal object.  Either the external cdecimal module or the
standard library decimal module are supported.

From: Szymon Guz <mabewlun@gmail.com>
From: Ronan Dunklau <rdunklau@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Steve Singer <steve@ssinger.info>
2013-07-05 22:41:25 -04:00
Noah Misch
02d2b694ee Update messages, comments and documentation for materialized views.
All instances of the verbiage lagging the code.  Back-patch to 9.3,
where materialized views were introduced.
2013-07-05 15:37:51 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
8800d8061d Remove stray | character
Erikjan Rijkers
2013-07-05 16:21:08 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
c3cb14de33 Fix spelling error
Reported by Kevin Hale Boyes
2013-07-05 16:19:16 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
c87ff71f37 Expose the estimation of number of changed tuples since last analyze
This value, now pg_stat_all_tables.n_mod_since_analyze, was already
tracked and used by autovacuum, but not exposed to the user.

Mark Kirkwood, review by Laurenz Albe
2013-07-05 15:10:15 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
20a1b9e71b Add contrib function references in the doc index
Backpatch to 9.3.
Idea from Craig Ringer
2013-07-04 11:33:11 -04:00
Robert Haas
6bc8ef0b7f Add new GUC, max_worker_processes, limiting number of bgworkers.
In 9.3, there's no particular limit on the number of bgworkers;
instead, we just count up the number that are actually registered,
and use that to set MaxBackends.  However, that approach causes
problems for Hot Standby, which needs both MaxBackends and the
size of the lock table to be the same on the standby as on the
master, yet it may not be desirable to run the same bgworkers in
both places.  9.3 handles that by failing to notice the problem,
which will probably work fine in nearly all cases anyway, but is
not theoretically sound.

A further problem with simply counting the number of registered
workers is that new workers can't be registered without a
postmaster restart.  This is inconvenient for administrators,
since bouncing the postmaster causes an interruption of service.
Moreover, there are a number of applications for background
processes where, by necessity, the background process must be
started on the fly (e.g. parallel query).  While this patch
doesn't actually make it possible to register new background
workers after startup time, it's a necessary prerequisite.

Patch by me.  Review by Michael Paquier.
2013-07-04 11:24:24 -04:00
Robert Haas
5cbe935c9d docs: Clarify flag dependencies for background workers.
BGWORKER_BACKEND_DATABASE_CONNECTION can only be used if
BGWORKER_SHMEM_ACCESS is also used.

Michael Paquier, with some tweaks by me.
2013-07-04 11:15:12 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0d1795680d doc: Fix typo in event trigger documentation
From: Dimitri Fontaine <dimitri@2ndQuadrant.fr>
2013-07-04 10:27:33 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0fe21ad8aa doc: Add event trigger C API documentation
From: Dimitri Fontaine <dimitri@2ndQuadrant.fr>
2013-07-03 21:06:20 -04:00
Fujii Masao
2ef085d0e6 Get rid of pg_class.reltoastidxid.
Treat TOAST index just the same as normal one and get the OID
of TOAST index from pg_index but not pg_class.reltoastidxid.
This change allows us to handle multiple TOAST indexes, and
which is required infrastructure for upcoming
REINDEX CONCURRENTLY feature.

Patch by Michael Paquier, reviewed by Andres Freund and me.
2013-07-04 03:24:09 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
f71939cd1a pg_buffercache: document column meanings
Improve documentation for usagecount and relforknumber.
Backpatch to 9.3.
Suggestion from Satoshi Nagayasu
2013-07-03 14:19:44 -04:00
Noah Misch
7cd9b1371d Expose object name error fields in PL/pgSQL.
Specifically, permit attaching them to the error in RAISE and retrieving
them from a caught error in GET STACKED DIAGNOSTICS.  RAISE enforces
nothing about the content of the fields; for its purposes, they are just
additional string fields.  Consequently, clarify in the protocol and
libpq documentation that the usual relationships between error fields,
like a schema name appearing wherever a table name appears, are not
universal.  This freedom has other applications; consider a FDW
propagating an error from an RDBMS having no schema support.

Back-patch to 9.3, where core support for the error fields was
introduced.  This prevents the confusion of having a release where libpq
exposes the fields and PL/pgSQL does not.

Pavel Stehule, lexical revisions by Noah Misch.
2013-07-03 07:29:56 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
69e4fd4541 doc: Remove i18ngurus.com link
The web site is dead, and the Wayback Machine shows that it didn't have
much useful content before.
2013-07-02 20:32:09 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5ecfa1f6a3 doc: Arrange See Also links in more consistent order 2013-07-02 20:12:58 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
148326b994 Mention extra_float_digits in floating point docs
Make it easier for readers of the FP docs to find out about possibly
truncated values.

Per complaint from Tom Duffey in message
F0E0F874-C86F-48D1-AA2A-0C5365BF5118@trillitech.com

Author: Albe Laurenz
Reviewed by: Abhijit Menon-Sen
2013-07-02 13:12:52 -04:00
Robert Haas
568d4138c6 Use an MVCC snapshot, rather than SnapshotNow, for catalog scans.
SnapshotNow scans have the undesirable property that, in the face of
concurrent updates, the scan can fail to see either the old or the new
versions of the row.  In many cases, we work around this by requiring
DDL operations to hold AccessExclusiveLock on the object being
modified; in some cases, the existing locking is inadequate and random
failures occur as a result.  This commit doesn't change anything
related to locking, but will hopefully pave the way to allowing lock
strength reductions in the future.

The major issue has held us back from making this change in the past
is that taking an MVCC snapshot is significantly more expensive than
using a static special snapshot such as SnapshotNow.  However, testing
of various worst-case scenarios reveals that this problem is not
severe except under fairly extreme workloads.  To mitigate those
problems, we avoid retaking the MVCC snapshot for each new scan;
instead, we take a new snapshot only when invalidation messages have
been processed.  The catcache machinery already requires that
invalidation messages be sent before releasing the related heavyweight
lock; else other backends might rely on locally-cached data rather
than scanning the catalog at all.  Thus, making snapshot reuse
dependent on the same guarantees shouldn't break anything that wasn't
already subtly broken.

Patch by me.  Review by Michael Paquier and Andres Freund.
2013-07-02 09:47:01 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
605b4c5a6b pg_dump docs: use escaped double-quotes, for Windows
On Unix, you can embed double-quotes in single-quotes, and via versa.
However, on Windows, you can only escape double-quotes in double-quotes,
so use that in the pg_dump -t/table example.
Backpatch to 9.3.
Report from Mike Toews
2013-07-01 14:52:59 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7408c5d29b Add timezone offset output option to to_char()
Add ability for to_char() to output the timezone's UTC offset (OF).  We
already have the ability to return the timezone abbeviation (TZ/tz).
Per request from Andrew Dunstan
2013-07-01 13:40:32 -04:00
Simon Riggs
f177cbfe67 ALTER TABLE ... ALTER CONSTRAINT for FKs
Allow constraint attributes to be altered,
so the default setting of NOT DEFERRABLE
can be altered to DEFERRABLE and back.

Review by Abhijit Menon-Sen
2013-06-29 00:27:30 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
e029275cde pg_upgrade: remove -h option
-h (help) is not needed;  pg_upgrade already supports --help and -?,
which is consistent with other tools.
2013-06-28 18:10:13 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
fb771f9086 pg_upgrade: trim down --help and doc option descriptions
Previous code had old/new prefixes on option values, e.g.
--old-datadir=OLDDATADIR.  Remove them, for simplicity;  now:
--old-datadir=DATADIR.  Also update docs to do the same.
2013-06-28 18:01:49 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
82233ce7ea Send SIGKILL to children if they don't die quickly in immediate shutdown
On immediate shutdown, or during a restart-after-crash sequence,
postmaster used to send SIGQUIT (and then abandon ship if shutdown); but
this is not a good strategy if backends don't die because of that
signal.  (This might happen, for example, if a backend gets tangled
trying to malloc() due to gettext(), as in an example illustrated by
MauMau.)  This causes problems when later trying to restart the server,
because some processes are still attached to the shared memory segment.

Instead of just abandoning such backends to their fates, we now have
postmaster hang around for a little while longer, send a SIGKILL after
some reasonable waiting period, and then exit.  This makes immediate
shutdown more reliable.

There is disagreement on whether it's best for postmaster to exit after
sending SIGKILL, or to stick around until all children have reported
death.  If this controversy is resolved differently than what this patch
implements, it's an easy change to make.

Bug reported by MauMau in message 20DAEA8949EC4E2289C6E8E58560DEC0@maumau

MauMau and Álvaro Herrera
2013-06-28 17:49:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
457d6cf049 pg_upgrade: change -u to -U, for consistency
Change -u (user) option to -U, for consistency with other tools like
pg_dump and psql.  Also expand --user to --username, again for
consistency.
BACKWARD INCOMPATIBILITY
2013-06-28 17:27:43 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
9db4ad44eb Update pg_resetxlog's documentation on multixacts
I added some more functionality to it in 0ac5ad5134 but neglected to
add it to the docs.

Per Peter Eisentraut in message
1367112171.32604.4.camel@vanquo.pezone.net
2013-06-27 15:32:58 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
863fad1bcc Document relminmxid and datminmxid
I introduced these new fields in 0ac5ad5134 but neglected to add them
to the system catalogs section of the docs.

Per Thom Brown in message
CAA-aLv7UiO=Whiq3MVbsEqSyQRthuX8Tb_RLyBuQt0KQBp=6EQ@mail.gmail.com
2013-06-27 15:32:58 -04:00
Michael Meskes
a2769a4e21 Fixed incorrect description of EXEC SQL VAR command.
Thanks to MauMau <maumau307@gmail.com> for finding and fixing this.
2013-06-27 17:07:03 +02:00
Robert Haas
79cddb1841 pgbench: Add long options for all existing short options.
Fabien Coelho, reviewed by Fabrízio de Royes Mello, with some further
changes by me
2013-06-27 08:57:27 -04:00
Tom Lane
a03ae56e40 Tweak wording in sequence-function docs to avoid PDF build failures.
Adjust the wording in the first para of "Sequence Manipulation Functions"
so that neither of the link phrases in it break across line boundaries,
in either A4- or US-page-size PDF output.  This fixes a reported build
failure for the 9.3beta2 A4 PDF docs, and future-proofs this particular
para against causing similar problems in future.  (Perhaps somebody will
fix this issue in the SGML/TeX documentation tool chain someday, but I'm
not holding my breath.)

Back-patch to all supported branches, since the same problem could rise up
to bite us in future updates if anyone changes anything earlier than this
in func.sgml.
2013-06-27 00:23:37 -04:00
Noah Misch
d53f7cf116 Document effect of constant folding on CASE.
Back-patch to all supported versions.

Laurenz Albe
2013-06-26 19:51:56 -04:00
Simon Riggs
4f14c86d74 Reverting previous commit, pending investigation
of sporadic seg faults from various build farm members.
2013-06-24 21:21:18 +01:00
Simon Riggs
b577a57d41 ALTER TABLE ... ALTER CONSTRAINT for FKs
Allow constraint attributes to be altered,
so the default setting of NOT DEFERRABLE
can be altered to DEFERRABLE and back.

Review by Abhijit Menon-Sen
2013-06-24 20:07:41 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
dab1603e52 doc: Fix date in EPUB manifest
If there is no <date> element, the publication date for the EPUB
manifest is taken from the copyright year.  But something like
"1996-2013" is not a legal date specification.  So the EPUB output
currently fails epubcheck.

Put in a separate <date> element with the current year.  Put it in
legal.sgml, because copyright.pl already instructs to update that
manually, so it hopefully won't be missed.
2013-06-21 22:48:06 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7dfd5cd21c Clarify terminology standalone backend vs. single-user mode
Most of the documentation uses "single-user mode", so use that in the
code as well.  Adjust the documentation to match the new error message
wording.  Also add a documentation index entry for "single-user mode".

Based-on-patch-by: Jeff Janes <jeff.janes@gmail.com>
2013-06-20 23:03:18 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4c54e87a86 Further update CREATE FUNCTION documentation about argument names
More languages than SQL and PL/pgSQL actually support parameter names.
2013-06-19 22:29:13 -04:00
Fujii Masao
bab54e383d Support TB (terabyte) memory unit in GUC variables.
Patch by Simon Riggs, reviewed by Jeff Janes and me.
2013-06-20 08:17:14 +09:00
Simon Riggs
073d7cb513 Fix docs on lock level for ALTER TABLE VALIDATE
ALTER TABLE .. VALIDATE CONSTRAINT previously
gave incorrect details about lock levels and
therefore incomplete reasons to use the option.

Initial bug report and fix from Marko Tiikkaja
Reworded by me to include comments by Kevin Grittner
2013-06-18 12:09:39 +01:00
Fujii Masao
2bc4ab4f9c Fix description of archive format which pg_restore -j supports. 2013-06-16 09:38:18 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
b23160889c Add :client_id automatic variable for custom pgbench scripts.
This makes it easier to write custom scripts that have different logic for
each client.

Gurjeet Singh, with some changes by me.
2013-06-14 23:31:44 +03:00
Tom Lane
58ae1f4577 Stamp HEAD as 9.4devel.
Let the hacking begin ...
2013-06-14 14:41:28 -04:00
Tom Lane
dc3eb56383 Improve updatability checking for views and foreign tables.
Extend the FDW API (which we already changed for 9.3) so that an FDW can
report whether specific foreign tables are insertable/updatable/deletable.
The default assumption continues to be that they're updatable if the
relevant executor callback function is supplied by the FDW, but finer
granularity is now possible.  As a test case, add an "updatable" option to
contrib/postgres_fdw.

This patch also fixes the information_schema views, which previously did
not think that foreign tables were ever updatable, and fixes
view_is_auto_updatable() so that a view on a foreign table can be
auto-updatable.

initdb forced due to changes in information_schema views and the functions
they rely on.  This is a bit unfortunate to do post-beta1, but if we don't
change this now then we'll have another API break for FDWs when we do
change it.

Dean Rasheed, somewhat editorialized on by Tom Lane
2013-06-12 17:53:33 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
78ed8e03c6 Fix unescaping of JSON Unicode escapes, especially for non-UTF8.
Per discussion  on -hackers. We treat Unicode escapes when unescaping
them similarly to the way we treat them in PostgreSQL string literals.
Escapes in the ASCII range are always accepted, no matter what the
database encoding. Escapes for higher code points are only processed in
UTF8 databases, and attempts to process them in other databases will
result in an error. \u0000 is never unescaped, since it would result in
an impermissible null byte.
2013-06-12 13:35:24 -04:00
Robert Haas
c1d729b419 Improve description of loread/lowrite.
Patch by me, reviewed by Tatsuo Ishii.
2013-06-12 12:20:59 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
ecdec470e7 Add description that loread()/lowrite() are corresponding to
lo_read()/lo_write() in libpq to avoid confusion.
2013-06-11 14:25:58 +09:00
Tom Lane
f3839ea117 Remove ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES' requirement of schema CREATE permissions.
Per discussion, this restriction isn't needed for any real security reason,
and it seems to confuse people more often than it helps them.  It could
also result in some database states being unrestorable.  So just drop it.

Back-patch to 9.0, where ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES was introduced.
2013-06-09 15:26:40 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
94e3311b97 Handle Unicode surrogate pairs correctly when processing JSON.
In 9.2, Unicode escape sequences are not analysed at all other than
to make sure that they are in the form \uXXXX. But in 9.3 many of the
new operators and functions try to turn JSON text values into text in
the server encoding, and this includes de-escaping Unicode escape
sequences. This processing had not taken into account the possibility
that this might contain a surrogate pair to designate a character
outside the BMP. That is now handled correctly.

This also enforces correct use of surrogate pairs, something that is not
done by the type's input routines. This fact is noted in the docs.
2013-06-08 09:12:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c99d5d1bcc doc: Fix <synopsis> in <term> markup
Although the DTD technically allows this, the resulting HTML is invalid
because it puts block elements inside inline elements.  DocBook 5.0 also
doesn't allow it anymore, so it's fair to assume that this was never
really intended to work.  Replace <synopsis> with <literal>, which is
the markup used elsewhere in the documentation in similar cases.
2013-06-07 22:00:59 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
734fbbd1d2 Correct the documentation of pg_rewrite.ev_attr.
It claimed the value was always zero; it is really always -1.

Per report from Hari Babu
2013-06-07 08:04:22 -05:00
Tom Lane
7b1e893acd Minor docs wordsmithing.
Swap the order of a couple of phrases to clarify what the adjective
"subsequent" applies to.

Joshua Tolley
2013-06-07 00:08:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
58617e4dc1 doc: Clarify description of VALUES command
Greg Smith
2013-06-06 21:03:04 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e2c84bc9f5 pg_upgrade: document that --link should be used with --check
Backpatch to 9.2.
2013-06-06 10:13:55 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
22b36412c7 Another man page whitespace fix 2013-06-01 22:22:02 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
93874ce064 Fix whitespace issues in the man pages
See 00b0c73f1f for an explanation.
2013-06-01 22:08:26 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
dedf7e9919 doc: Remove paragraph about typesetting conventions
They no longer match reality with the web site style sheets, and it is
difficult to keep the up to date in a CSS world.
2013-05-31 22:45:03 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
eff8055afb doc: Fix claim that query is passed as ASCII text
Ian Lawrence Barwick
2013-05-30 21:09:27 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
8b5a3998a1 Remove whitespace from end of lines 2013-05-30 21:05:07 -04:00
Robert Haas
07ab261ef3 Document auto_explain.log_timing.
Tomas Vondra
2013-05-29 07:12:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f80e55054b pg_upgrade docs: mention need to set parameters for vacuumdb. 2013-05-28 22:54:28 -04:00
Stephen Frost
05624220c4 Documentation fix for ALTER TYPE .. RENAME
The documentation for ALTER TYPE .. RENAME claimed to support a
RESTRICT/CASCADE option at the 'type' level, which wasn't implemented
and doesn't make a whole lot of sense to begin with.  What is supported,
and previously undocumented, is

ALTER TYPE .. RENAME ATTRIBUTE .. RESTRICT/CASCADE.

I've updated the documentation and back-patched this to 9.1 where it was
first introduced.
2013-05-27 11:12:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
bc41ef4791 9.3 release notes: improve cached plan mention
Per suggestion from Tom Lane.
2013-05-21 16:42:29 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8955dac251 9.3 release notes: fix SGML markup for DROP TABLE IF EXISTS 2013-05-21 08:06:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
efc7952c89 9.3 release docs: fix DROP TABLE IF EXISTS
Patch from Joe Abbate.
2013-05-20 22:38:42 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
256f6ba78a Documentation spell checking and markup improvements 2013-05-20 21:13:13 -04:00
Tom Lane
2af0971f35 Clarify documentation of EXPLAIN (TIMING OFF) option.
Clarify that this option doesn't suppress measurement of the statement's
total runtime.

Greg Smith
2013-05-19 22:03:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f472012a32 release docs: mention PL/pgSQL as supporting event triggers in PG 9.3 2013-05-18 11:01:55 -04:00
Tom Lane
e7bfc7e42c Fix some uses of "the quick brown fox".
If we're going to quote a well-known pangram, we should quote it
accurately.  Per gripe from Thom Brown.
2013-05-16 12:30:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a2a480af88 doc: Add \dm command to psql man page 2013-05-14 21:12:34 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
a9bb274f90 doc: Fix some whitespace issues in the man pages 2013-05-13 21:59:39 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
bd17102487 doc: Fix order of options on pgbench man page 2013-05-13 21:37:01 -04:00
Tom Lane
c263f16a20 Update CREATE FUNCTION documentation about argument names.
The 9.2 patch that added argument name support in SQL-language functions
missed updating a parenthetical comment about that in the CREATE FUNCTION
reference page.  Noted by Erwin Brandstetter.
2013-05-11 12:07:47 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
cda7acee5f Update key words table for 9.3 2013-05-09 22:26:04 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
df9d764186 pg_upgrade docs: give tips on automation
Document that post-upgrade steps are likely to be the same for all
clusters with the same DDL/schemas;  this should help automated
upgrades.
2013-05-09 16:05:26 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
2ffa66f497 Fix walsender failure at promotion.
If a standby server has a cascading standby server connected to it, it's
possible that WAL has already been sent up to the next WAL page boundary,
splitting a WAL record in the middle, when the first standby server is
promoted. Don't throw an assertion failure or error in walsender if that
happens.

Also, fix a variant of the same bug in pg_receivexlog: if it had already
received WAL on previous timeline up to a segment boundary, when the
upstream standby server is promoted so that the timeline switch record falls
on the previous segment, pg_receivexlog would miss the segment containing
the timeline switch. To fix that, have walsender send the position of the
timeline switch at end-of-streaming, in addition to the next timeline's ID.
It was previously assumed that the switch happened exactly where the
streaming stopped.

Note: this is an incompatible change in the streaming protocol. You might
get an error if you try to stream over timeline switches, if the client is
running 9.3beta1 and the server is more recent. It should be fine after a
reconnect, however.

Reported by Fujii Masao.
2013-05-08 20:30:17 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
cb953d8b1b Use the term "radix tree" instead of "suffix tree" for SP-GiST text opclass.
What we have implemented is a radix tree (or a radix trie or a patricia
trie), but the docs and code comments incorrectly called it a "suffix tree".

Alexander Korotkov
2013-05-08 14:34:26 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
20c00ca668 doc: Add IDs to link targets used by phpPgAdmin
Karl O. Pinc
2013-05-07 21:23:21 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
7f03a791fa Stress that backup_label file is critical in the docs.
It is surprisingly common mistake to leave out backup_label file from a base
backup. Say more explicitly that it must be included.

Jeff Janes, with minor rewording by me.
2013-05-07 16:58:10 +03:00
Tom Lane
817a89423f Stamp 9.3beta1. 2013-05-06 16:57:06 -04:00
Tom Lane
f1ff90cfb1 Desultory copy-editing of the 9.3 release notes.
I had time for a quick review of the notes, so here are some fixes.
2013-05-06 16:02:37 -04:00
Tom Lane
1d6c72a55b Move materialized views' is-populated status into their pg_class entries.
Previously this state was represented by whether the view's disk file had
zero or nonzero size, which is problematic for numerous reasons, since it's
breaking a fundamental assumption about heap storage.  This was done to
allow unlogged matviews to revert to unpopulated status after a crash
despite our lack of any ability to update catalog entries post-crash.
However, this poses enough risk of future problems that it seems better to
not support unlogged matviews until we can find another way.  Accordingly,
revert that choice as well as a number of existing kluges forced by it
in favor of creating a pg_class.relispopulated flag column.
2013-05-06 13:27:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
3223b25ff7 Disallow unlogged materialized views.
The initial implementation of this feature was really unsupportable,
because it's relying on the physical size of an on-disk file to carry the
relation's populated/unpopulated state, which is at least a modularity
violation and could have serious long-term consequences.  We could say that
an unlogged matview goes to empty on crash, but not everybody likes that
definition, so let's just remove the feature for 9.3.  We can add it back
when we have a less klugy implementation.

I left the grammar and tab-completion support for CREATE UNLOGGED
MATERIALIZED VIEW in place, since it's harmless and allows delivering a
more specific error message about the unsupported feature.

I'm committing this separately to ease identification of what should be
reverted when/if we are able to re-enable the feature.
2013-05-06 12:00:06 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c29866073b 9.3 release notes: use "restoration"
Andrew Dunstan
2013-05-06 10:57:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2fbffc0ddf 9.3 release notes: Add cache of local locks
Mention this also helps in the restoring of pg_dumps.

Jeff Janes
2013-05-06 10:56:27 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c750aa90f2 9.3 release notes: update from Amit Kapila
No need to mention wal_receiver_status_interval.
2013-05-06 10:47:31 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8b06e6aba8 Revert idea of zer-padding padding session id in log_line_prefix
Removal of doc adjustment and release note mention as well.
2013-05-06 08:59:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
083d8fa79d docs: Improve log_line_prefix session_id query 2013-05-04 13:23:04 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f87f214b7c docs: log_line_prefix session id fix
Restore 4-byte designation for docs.  Fix 9.3 doc query to properly pad
to four digits.

Backpatch to all active branches

Per suggestions from Ian Lawrence Barwick
2013-05-04 13:15:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
75d1406a19 9.3 docs: wording fixes
From Erik Rijkers
2013-05-04 11:52:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
262a362997 docs: fix log_line_prefix session id docs
Backpatch to 9.2.

Report from Ian Lawrence Barwick
2013-05-04 11:05:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c008ca6015 9.3 release notes: adjustments
Fixes from Peter Geoghegan, Ian Lawrence Barwick, Marti Raudsepp
2013-05-04 10:44:49 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2497dc0867 9.3 release notes: move compatibility items into their own section 2013-05-03 21:11:35 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1136d7a74d 9.3 release notes: Add markup for pg_backup_start_time() 2013-05-03 20:55:03 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
15f27aebbb 9.3 release notes: Add links to SGML sections 2013-05-03 19:40:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
14c7a74b6e 9.3 release notes: add markup for text
Still need to add links for new features.
2013-05-03 14:48:24 -04:00
Tom Lane
c091c43197 Improve SPI documentation about null-flags arrays.
Clarify the description of nulls[] arguments, and use the same wording
for all SPI functions with this type of argument.  Per gripe from Yuriy
Rusinov.
2013-05-03 14:39:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5fcf944c23 9.3 release notes: update for current commits
Also, remove broken link in release.sgml.
2013-05-03 13:30:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c8f61ebdc6 9.3 release notes: suggested improvements from Jeff Janes and Josh Berkus 2013-05-02 19:14:23 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
187ca5e8e9 Revert "pg_ctl: Add idempotent option"
This reverts commit 8730618458.  The
behavior in certain cases is still being debated, and it's too late to
solve this before beta.
2013-04-29 21:55:12 -04:00
Robert Haas
91fa8532f4 Attempt to fix error recovery in COPY BOTH mode.
Previously, libpq and the backend had opposite ideas about whether
it was necessary for the client to send a CopyDone message after
receiving an ErrorResponse, making it impossible to cleanly exit
COPY BOTH mode.  Fix libpq so that works correctly, adopting the
backend's notion that an ErrorResponse kills the copy in both
directions.

Adjust receivelog.c to avoid a degradation in the quality of the
resulting error messages.  libpqwalreceiver.c is already doing
the right thing, so no adjustment needed there.

Add an explicit statement to the documentation explaining how
this part of the protocol is supposed to work, in the hopes of
avoiding future confusion in this area.

Since the consequences of all this confusion are very limited,
especially in the back-branches where no client ever attempts
to exit COPY BOTH mode without closing the connection entirely,
no back-patch.
2013-04-29 06:29:32 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
4d67961110 PL/pgSQL doc: Add example for RETURN QUERY
Erwin Brandstetter and Pavel Stěhule
2013-04-24 21:54:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
173c252bb2 9.3 release notes: adjustments per Alvaro 2013-04-23 23:21:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
2d3edce6b3 9.3 release note updates from Dean Rasheed, Jov, Heikki Linnakangas,
Erikjan Rijkers
2013-04-23 17:06:17 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
98a1e7a735 9.3 release notes: add diacritics
Alvaro Herrera
2013-04-22 17:17:00 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e35388451b 9.3 release notes: adjustments per Alvaro and Robert 2013-04-22 16:05:10 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ae7363999f Mention in docs that you can create SP-GiST indexes on range types.
This is new in 9.3devel.
2013-04-22 21:51:14 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
4f8799a948 9.3 release notes: apply fixes suggested by Alvaro 2013-04-22 14:33:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
beaa823bea 9.3 release notes: update streaming replication speedups
Andres Freund
2013-04-22 10:22:49 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e7d5ffe8ea doc: Improve example formatting
Erwin Brandstetter
2013-04-21 22:22:10 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
53ecfddceb doc: Fix syntax in example
LANGUAGE 'plpgsql' no longer works.  The single quotes need to be
removed.

Erwin Brandstetter
2013-04-21 22:22:10 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c3ab4ea27d In 9.3 release notes, split up items
Split log shipping speed improvement and fail-over speed improvement items.

Per request from Simon
2013-04-21 21:05:31 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4be535e2e4 9.3 release note adjustments per request from Andres Freund 2013-04-21 10:08:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1f2236edd1 Remove 9.3 item about fixing DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY
Already fixed in back branch.
2013-04-21 09:16:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ac96e6a8c2 9.3 release note fixes
Move commit_delay, fix Zoltan's name, and adjust range type histogram
text.
2013-04-21 09:14:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
864ec2f0cd Adjust 9.3 release notes per request from Simon 2013-04-21 09:05:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ef3defcf0d Reorder 9.3 release note items
Typo fix from David Fetter.
2013-04-21 00:57:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f0922cbdcc More 9.3 release note reorderings 2013-04-20 17:31:06 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
488eb9055d Fix Gilles Darold's name in 9.3 release notes. 2013-04-20 17:09:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
61b962345d Reorder some 9.3 release item entries
More to go.
2013-04-20 16:50:56 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
22f956f50c Push 9.3 release SGML file
Forgotten in previous commit.
2013-04-20 16:32:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e9a35c2082 Publish draft 9.3 release notes
No links added yet.
2013-04-20 16:29:58 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
540ec93e33 doc: Mention SATA alongside IDE for Linux
suggested by Jov
2013-04-20 15:56:22 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
acd5803053 Standardize spelling of "nonblocking"
Only adjusted the user-exposed messages and documentation,  not all
source code comments.
2013-04-18 23:35:19 -04:00
Robert Haas
f050457978 sepgsql: Minor improvement to test script, doc fix.
KaiGai Kohei
2013-04-17 09:55:24 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
b9bdaf3964 doc: Update PQgetssl() documentation
The return type of PQgetssl() was changed from SSL* to void* a long time
ago, but the documentation was not updated.
2013-04-16 21:42:10 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
8730618458 pg_ctl: Add idempotent option
This changes the behavior of the start and stop actions to exit
successfully if the server was already started or stopped.

This changes the default behavior of the start action:  Before, if the
server was already running, it would print a message and succeed.  Now,
that situation will result in an error.  When running in idempotent
mode, no message is printed and pg_ctl exits successfully.

It was considered to just make the idempotent behavior the default and
only option, but pg_upgrade needs the old behavior.
2013-04-13 23:42:42 -04:00
Robert Haas
f8a54e936b sepgsql: Enforce db_procedure:{execute} permission.
To do this, we add an additional object access hook type,
OAT_FUNCTION_EXECUTE.

KaiGai Kohei
2013-04-12 08:58:01 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
82b55c9769 doc: Update DTrace information
The old web site link no longer worked, and some information was
outdated.
2013-04-10 23:06:19 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
d334b337b4 Update the description for the graphical installers
Remove references to "one click", as we're not supposed to call
them that anymore.
2013-04-10 21:37:49 +02:00
Tom Lane
6f5b8beb64 Make contrib/pg_trgm also support regex searches with GiST indexes.
This wasn't addressed in the original patch, but it doesn't take very
much additional code to cover the case, so let's get it done.

Since pg_trgm 1.1 hasn't been released yet, I just changed the definition
of what's in it, rather than inventing a 1.2.
2013-04-10 13:31:02 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
66c01707c6 Fix hstore_to_json_loose example in docs.
Marti Raudsepp.
2013-04-10 09:26:46 -04:00
Tom Lane
3ccae48f44 Support indexing of regular-expression searches in contrib/pg_trgm.
This works by extracting trigrams from the given regular expression,
in generally the same spirit as the previously-existing support for
LIKE searches, though of course the details are far more complicated.

Currently, only GIN indexes are supported.  We might be able to make
it work with GiST indexes later.

The implementation includes adding API functions to backend/regex/
to provide a view of the search NFA created from a regular expression.
These functions are meant to be generic enough to be supportable in
a standalone version of the regex library, should that ever happen.

Alexander Korotkov, reviewed by Heikki Linnakangas and Tom Lane
2013-04-09 01:06:54 -04:00
Robert Haas
e965e6344c sepgsql: Enforce db_schema:search permission.
KaiGai Kohei, with comment and doc wordsmithing by me
2013-04-05 08:51:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
52f436b807 Improve documentation about the relationship of extensions and schemas.
There's been some confusion expressed about this point, so clarify.
Extended version of a patch by David Wheeler.
2013-04-04 22:37:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
e3f719c367 doc: Fix number of columns in table 2013-04-04 21:07:05 -04:00
Tom Lane
c6a3fce7dd Add \watch [SEC] command to psql.
This allows convenient re-execution of commands.

Will Leinweber, reviewed by Peter Eisentraut, Daniel Farina, and Tom Lane
2013-04-04 19:56:59 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
d7d5832012 Fix a few thinkos in the JSON functions docs.
Dickson S. Guedes
2013-04-04 10:41:29 -04:00
Tom Lane
0f1345d38b Fix typo in FDW docs.
Laurenz Albe
2013-04-03 10:26:18 -04:00
Tom Lane
89b661bab9 Update release notes for 9.2.4, 9.1.9, 9.0.13, 8.4.17.
Security: CVE-2013-1899, CVE-2013-1901
2013-04-01 14:11:11 -04:00
Tom Lane
e48a7bd527 Update release notes for changes through today. 2013-03-31 18:59:35 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
64f890905f Add pkg-config files for libpq and ecpg libraries
This will hopefully be easier to use than pg_config for users who are
already used to the pkg-config interface.  It also works better for
multi-arch installations.

reviewed by Tom Lane
2013-03-31 16:58:40 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b015558091 Remove tab from SGML file. 2013-03-29 23:19:03 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
6caf759f3f Fix page title for JSON Functions and Operators. 2013-03-29 16:56:22 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
a570c98d7f Add new JSON processing functions and parser API.
The JSON parser is converted into a recursive descent parser, and
exposed for use by other modules such as extensions. The API provides
hooks for all the significant parser event such as the beginning and end
of objects and arrays, and providing functions to handle these hooks
allows for fairly simple construction of a wide variety of JSON
processing functions. A set of new basic processing functions and
operators is also added, which use this API, including operations to
extract array elements, object fields, get the length of arrays and the
set of keys of a field, deconstruct an object into a set of key/value
pairs, and create records from JSON objects and arrays of objects.

Catalog version bumped.

Andrew Dunstan, with some documentation assistance from Merlin Moncure.
2013-03-29 14:12:13 -04:00
Tom Lane
9ad27c2153 Document encode(bytea, 'escape')'s behavior correctly.
I changed this in commit fd15dba543, but
missed the fact that the SGML documentation of the function specified
exactly what it did.  Well, one of the two places where it's specified
documented that --- probably I looked at the other place and thought
nothing needed to be done.  Sync the two places where encode() and
decode() are described.
2013-03-28 23:14:54 -04:00
Tom Lane
29505a894e Draft release notes for 9.2.4, 9.1.9, 9.0.13, 8.4.17.
Covers commits through today.  Not back-patching into back branches
yet, since this is just for people to review in advance.
2013-03-28 21:40:19 -04:00
Robert Haas
2a3db8cec2 sepgsql: Documentation improvements.
Fixes by me, per griping by Thom Brown.
2013-03-28 15:56:35 -04:00
Robert Haas
0f05840bf4 Allow sepgsql labels to depend on object name.
The main change here is to call security_compute_create_name_raw()
rather than security_compute_create_raw().  This ups the minimum
requirement for libselinux from 2.0.99 to 2.1.10, but it looks
like most distributions will have picked that up before 9.3 is out.

KaiGai Kohei
2013-03-28 15:41:38 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
473ab40c8b Add sql_drop event for event triggers
This event takes place just before ddl_command_end, and is fired if and
only if at least one object has been dropped by the command.  (For
instance, DROP TABLE IF EXISTS of a table that does not in fact exist
will not lead to such a trigger firing).  Commands that drop multiple
objects (such as DROP SCHEMA or DROP OWNED BY) will cause a single event
to fire.  Some firings might be surprising, such as
ALTER TABLE DROP COLUMN.

The trigger is fired after the drop has taken place, because that has
been deemed the safest design, to avoid exposing possibly-inconsistent
internal state (system catalogs as well as current transaction) to the
user function code.  This means that careful tracking of object
identification is required during the object removal phase.

Like other currently existing events, there is support for tag
filtering.

To support the new event, add a new pg_event_trigger_dropped_objects()
set-returning function, which returns a set of rows comprising the
objects affected by the command.  This is to be used within the user
function code, and is mostly modelled after the recently introduced
pg_identify_object() function.

Catalog version bumped due to the new function.

Dimitri Fontaine and Álvaro Herrera
Review by Robert Haas, Tom Lane
2013-03-28 13:05:48 -03:00
Simon Riggs
593c39d156 Revoke bc5334d867 2013-03-28 09:18:02 +00:00
Kevin Grittner
40e873d854 Fix pasto which broke docs build.
Commit bc5334d867 accidentally
included a second <variablelist> tag for a new list item.
2013-03-27 16:11:46 -05:00
Robert Haas
1cea9bbb21 sepgsql: Support for new post-ALTER access hook.
KaiGai Kohei
2013-03-27 08:14:19 -04:00
Simon Riggs
bc5334d867 Allow external recovery_config_directory
If required, recovery.conf can now be located outside of the data directory.
Server needs read/write permissions on this directory.
2013-03-27 11:45:42 +00:00
Heikki Linnakangas
d298b50a3b Make pg_basebackup work with pre-9.3 servers, and add server version check.
A new 'starttli' field was added to the response of BASE_BACKUP command.
Make pg_basebackup tolerate the case that it's missing, so that it still
works with older servers.

Add an explicit check for the server version, so that you get a nicer error
message if you try to use it with a pre-9.1 server.

The streaming protocol message format changed in 9.3, so -X stream still won't
work with pre-9.3 servers. I added a version check to ReceiveXLogStream()
earlier, but write that slightly differently, so that in 9.4, it will still
work with a 9.3 server. (In 9.4, the error message needs to be adjusted to
"9.3 or above", though). Also, if the version check fails, don't retry.
2013-03-25 19:44:11 +02:00
Andrew Dunstan
9e257a181c Add parallel pg_dump option.
New infrastructure is added which creates a set number of workers
(threads on Windows, forked processes on Unix). Jobs are then
handed out to these workers by the master process as needed.
pg_restore is adjusted to use this new infrastructure in place of the
old setup which created a new worker for each step on the fly. Parallel
dumps acquire a snapshot clone in order to stay consistent, if
available.

The parallel option is selected by the -j / --jobs command line
parameter of pg_dump.

Joachim Wieland, lightly editorialized by Andrew Dunstan.
2013-03-24 11:27:20 -04:00
Tom Lane
cdc67938c0 Don't put <indexterm> before <term> in <varlistentry> items.
Doing that results in a broken index entry in PDF output.  We had only
a few like that, which is probably why nobody noticed before.
Standardize on putting the <term> first.

Josh Kupershmidt
2013-03-23 14:06:33 -04:00
Tom Lane
5b86fedfb5 Document cross-version compatibility issues for contrib/postgres_fdw.
One of the use-cases for postgres_fdw is extracting data from older PG
servers, so cross-version compatibility is important.  Document what we
can do here, and further annotate some of the coding choices that create
compatibility constraints.  In passing, remove one unnecessary
incompatibility with old servers, namely assuming that we didn't need to
quote the timezone name 'UTC'.
2013-03-22 17:22:31 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
549dae0352 Fix problems with incomplete attempt to prohibit OIDS with MVs.
Problem with assertion failure in restoring from pg_dump output
reported by Joachim Wieland.

Review and suggestions by Tom Lane and Robert Haas.
2013-03-22 13:27:34 -05:00
Tom Lane
82b945c097 Update commit_delay documentation.
Commit 13fe298ca0 changed this GUC to be
PGC_SUSET, but neglected to update the documentation to match.

While at it, edit and rearrange the text a little for clarity.
2013-03-22 11:39:15 -04:00
Simon Riggs
96ef3b8ff1 Allow I/O reliability checks using 16-bit checksums
Checksums are set immediately prior to flush out of shared buffers
and checked when pages are read in again. Hint bit setting will
require full page write when block is dirtied, which causes various
infrastructure changes. Extensive comments, docs and README.

WARNING message thrown if checksum fails on non-all zeroes page;
ERROR thrown but can be disabled with ignore_checksum_failure = on.

Feature enabled by an initdb option, since transition from option off
to option on is long and complex and has not yet been implemented.
Default is not to use checksums.

Checksum used is WAL CRC-32 truncated to 16-bits.

Simon Riggs, Jeff Davis, Greg Smith
Wide input and assistance from many community members. Thank you.
2013-03-22 13:54:07 +00:00
Kevin Grittner
08af1a0a2a Eliminate trivial whitespace inconsistency in docs sample code. 2013-03-21 10:34:47 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
f8348ea32e Allow extracting machine-readable object identity
Introduce pg_identify_object(oid,oid,int4), which is similar in spirit
to pg_describe_object but instead produces a row of machine-readable
information to uniquely identify the given object, without resorting to
OIDs or other internal representation.  This is intended to be used in
the event trigger implementation, to report objects being operated on;
but it has usefulness of its own.

Catalog version bumped because of the new function.
2013-03-20 18:19:19 -03:00
Simon Riggs
1a091002cf Clarify assumption of filesystem metadata integrity.
Jeff Davis
2013-03-19 08:57:29 +00:00
Simon Riggs
8c3b87ca10 Correction that 2pc state files use CRC-32.
Jeff Davis
2013-03-19 08:51:35 +00:00
Simon Riggs
2266db392c Add reliability docs about storage/memory corruptions.
Add section to the Reliability section about what is and is not protected for
various file types.
Further edits welcome.

Designed to allow 1-2 line change when/if checksums are committed.

Inspired by docs written by Jeff Davis, though completely different from his
patch.
2013-03-18 22:38:07 +00:00
Tom Lane
e39feb1006 Improve documentation of EXTRACT(WEEK).
The docs showed that early-January dates can be considered part of the
previous year for week-counting purposes, but failed to say explicitly
that late-December dates can also be considered part of the next year.
Fix that, and add a cross-reference to the "isoyear" field.  Per bug
#7967 from Pawel Kobylak.
2013-03-18 13:34:15 -04:00
Simon Riggs
bb7cc2623f Remove PageSetTLI and rename pd_tli to pd_checksum
Remove use of PageSetTLI() from all page manipulation functions
and adjust README to indicate change in the way we make changes
to pages. Repurpose those bytes into the pd_checksum field and
explain how that works in comments about page header.

Refactoring ahead of actual feature patch which would make use
of the checksum field, arriving later.

Jeff Davis, with comments and doc changes by Simon Riggs
Direction suggested by Robert Haas; many others providing
review comments.
2013-03-18 13:46:42 +00:00
Tom Lane
d43837d030 Add lock_timeout configuration parameter.
This GUC allows limiting the time spent waiting to acquire any one
heavyweight lock.

In support of this, improve the recently-added timeout infrastructure
to permit efficiently enabling or disabling multiple timeouts at once.
That reduces the performance hit from turning on lock_timeout, though
it's still not zero.

Zoltán Böszörményi, reviewed by Tom Lane,
Stephen Frost, and Hari Babu
2013-03-16 23:22:57 -04:00
Tom Lane
70ec2f8f43 Improve the documentation about commit_delay.
Clarify the docs explaining what commit_delay does, and add a
recommendation about a useful value for it, namely half of the single-page
fsync time reported by pg_test_fsync.  This is informed by testing of
the new-in-9.3 implementation of commit_delay; in prior versions it
was far harder to arrive at a useful setting.

In passing, do some wordsmithing and markup-fixing in the same general
area.

Also, change pg_test_fsync's default time-per-test from 2 seconds to 5.
The old value was about the minimum at which the results could be taken
seriously at all, and so seems a tad optimistic as a default.

Peter Geoghegan, reviewed by Noah Misch; some additional editing by me
2013-03-15 17:41:47 -04:00
Tom Lane
73e7025bd8 Extend format() to handle field width and left/right alignment.
This change adds some more standard sprintf() functionality to format().

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Dean Rasheed and Kyotaro Horiguchi
2013-03-14 22:56:56 -04:00
Tom Lane
209f675f0f Fix documentation oversight.
Mention that PlanForeignModify's result must be copiable by copyObject.
2013-03-12 19:06:43 -04:00
Tom Lane
a0c6dfeecf Allow default expressions to be attached to columns of foreign tables.
There's still some discussion about exactly how postgres_fdw ought to
handle this case, but there seems no debate that we want to allow defaults
to be used for inserts into foreign tables.  So remove the core-code
restrictions that prevented it.

While at it, get rid of the special grammar productions for CREATE FOREIGN
TABLE, and instead add explicit FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED error checks for the
disallowed cases.  This makes the grammar a shade smaller, and more
importantly results in much more intelligible error messages for
unsupported cases.  It's also one less thing to fix if we ever start
supporting constraints on foreign tables.
2013-03-12 17:37:07 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
1ba0119308 Fix orthotypographical mistake
Apparently I lost some of the edits I had done on this page for commit
0ac5ad5134.

Per note from Etsuro Fujita, although I didn't use his patch.

Make some of the wording in the affected section a bit more complete,
too.
2013-03-12 12:28:50 -03:00
Andrew Dunstan
38fb4d978c JSON generation improvements.
This adds the following:

    json_agg(anyrecord) -> json
    to_json(any) -> json
    hstore_to_json(hstore) -> json (also used as a cast)
    hstore_to_json_loose(hstore) -> json

The last provides heuristic treatment of numbers and booleans.

Also, in json generation, if any non-builtin type has a cast to json,
that function is used instead of the type's output function.

Andrew Dunstan, reviewed by Steve Singer.

Catalog version bumped.
2013-03-10 17:35:36 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
dd28c410f7 doc: Add note about checkpoint_warning vs checkpoint_timeout
suggested by Tianyin Xu
2013-03-10 17:16:18 -04:00
Tom Lane
21734d2fb8 Support writable foreign tables.
This patch adds the core-system infrastructure needed to support updates
on foreign tables, and extends contrib/postgres_fdw to allow updates
against remote Postgres servers.  There's still a great deal of room for
improvement in optimization of remote updates, but at least there's basic
functionality there now.

KaiGai Kohei, reviewed by Alexander Korotkov and Laurenz Albe, and rather
heavily revised by Tom Lane.
2013-03-10 14:16:02 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
71877c18a8 Fix typo in docs for ALTER MATERIALIZED VIEW.
Fujii Masao
2013-03-07 11:39:36 -06:00
Kevin Grittner
5141603ebd Add docs for pg_matviews, which were missed in the initial MV commit. 2013-03-06 15:35:59 -06:00
Peter Eisentraut
0ea1f6e98f psql: Let \l accept a pattern
reviewed by Satoshi Nagayasu
2013-03-04 15:17:40 +00:00
Kevin Grittner
3bf3ab8c56 Add a materialized view relations.
A materialized view has a rule just like a view and a heap and
other physical properties like a table.  The rule is only used to
populate the table, references in queries refer to the
materialized data.

This is a minimal implementation, but should still be useful in
many cases.  Currently data is only populated "on demand" by the
CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW and REFRESH MATERIALIZED VIEW statements.
It is expected that future releases will add incremental updates
with various timings, and that a more refined concept of defining
what is "fresh" data will be developed.  At some point it may even
be possible to have queries use a materialized in place of
references to underlying tables, but that requires the other
above-mentioned features to be working first.

Much of the documentation work by Robert Haas.
Review by Noah Misch, Thom Brown, Robert Haas, Marko Tiikkaja
Security review by KaiGai Kohei, with a decision on how best to
implement sepgsql still pending.
2013-03-03 18:23:31 -06:00
Peter Eisentraut
891869c352 doc: Small tweak for consistency
submitted by "Lyle"
2013-03-03 08:58:34 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
743b73bdf5 doc: A few awkward phrasing fixes
Josh Kupershmidt
2013-03-03 08:49:49 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
7d6b8f7158 Remove spurious "the", and add a missing one.
Thom Brown and me.
2013-02-27 21:50:15 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
3d009e45bd Add support for piping COPY to/from an external program.
This includes backend "COPY TO/FROM PROGRAM '...'" syntax, and corresponding
psql \copy syntax. Like with reading/writing files, the backend version is
superuser-only, and in the psql version, the program is run in the client.

In the passing, the psql \copy STDIN/STDOUT syntax is subtly changed: if you
the stdin/stdout is quoted, it's now interpreted as a filename. For example,
"\copy foo from 'stdin'" now reads from a file called 'stdin', not from
standard input. Before this, there was no way to specify a filename called
stdin, stdout, pstdin or pstdout.

This creates a new function in pgport, wait_result_to_str(), which can
be used to convert the exit status of a process, as returned by wait(3),
to a human-readable string.

Etsuro Fujita, reviewed by Amit Kapila.
2013-02-27 18:22:31 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
8337e3b457 doc: Fix markup typo 2013-02-25 17:58:14 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
3dee636e04 Add -d option to pg_dumpall, for specifying a connection string.
Like with pg_basebackup and pg_receivexlog, it's a bit strange to call the
option -d/--dbname, when in fact you cannot pass a database name in it.

Original patch by Amit Kapila, heavily modified by me.
2013-02-25 19:39:10 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
691e595dd9 Add -d/--dbname option to pg_dump.
You could already pass a database name just by passing it as the last
option, without -d. This is an alias for that, like the -d/--dbname option
in psql and many other client applications. For consistency.
2013-02-25 19:39:04 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
aa05c37e82 Add -d option to pg_basebackup and pg_receivexlog, for connection string.
Without this, there's no way to pass arbitrary libpq connection parameters
to these applications. It's a bit strange that the option is called
-d/--dbname, when in fact you can *not* pass a database name in it, but it's
consistent with other client applications where a connection string is also
passed using -d.

Original patch by Amit Kapila, heavily modified by me.
2013-02-25 14:59:33 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
3163baa6d2 doc: Remove PostgreSQL version number from xml2 deprecation notice
It is obviously no longer true.
2013-02-24 15:38:07 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
8e8d0f7e80 doc: Add more compatibility information for triggers
Louis-Claude Canon and Josh Kupershmidt
2013-02-23 00:28:33 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
4591933549 Fix some typos and grammatical mistakes
... as well a update copyrights statements to 2013.

Noted by Thom Brown and Peter Geoghegan
2013-02-22 18:52:59 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
639ed4e84b Add pg_xlogdump contrib program
This program relies on rm_desc backend routines and the xlogreader
infrastructure to emit human-readable rendering of WAL records.

Author: Andres Freund, with many reworks by Álvaro
Reviewed (in a much earlier version) by Peter Eisentraut
2013-02-22 16:56:55 -03:00
Tom Lane
d0d75c4022 Add postgres_fdw contrib module.
There's still a lot of room for improvement, but it basically works,
and we need this to be present before we can do anything much with the
writable-foreign-tables patch.  So let's commit it and get on with testing.

Shigeru Hanada, reviewed by KaiGai Kohei and Tom Lane
2013-02-21 05:27:16 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
9475db3a4e Add ALTER ROLE ALL SET command
This generalizes the existing ALTER ROLE ... SET and ALTER DATABASE
... SET functionality to allow creating settings that apply to all users
in all databases.

reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2013-02-17 23:45:36 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
ff64fd49ce doc: Add make target to produce EPUB from DocBook 2013-02-13 23:12:21 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
62401db45c Support unlogged GiST index.
The reason this wasn't supported before was that GiST indexes need an
increasing sequence to detect concurrent page-splits. In a regular WAL-
logged GiST index, the LSN of the page-split record is used for that
purpose, and in a temporary index, we can get away with a backend-local
counter. Neither of those methods works for an unlogged relation.

To provide such an increasing sequence of numbers, create a "fake LSN"
counter that is saved and restored across shutdowns. On recovery, unlogged
relations are blown away, so the counter doesn't need to survive that
either.

Jeevan Chalke, based on discussions with Robert Haas, Tom Lane and me.
2013-02-11 23:07:09 +02:00
Tom Lane
3a1f8cdfa9 Add an example of attaching a default value to an updatable view.
This is probably the single most useful thing that ALTER VIEW can do,
particularly now that we have auto-updatable views.  So show an explicit
example.
2013-02-09 11:43:48 -05:00
Tom Lane
c61e26ee3e Add support for ALTER RULE ... RENAME TO.
Ali Dar, reviewed by Dean Rasheed.
2013-02-08 23:58:40 -05:00
Tom Lane
335c5e9206 doc: Fix mistakes in the most recent set of release notes.
Improve description of the vacuum_freeze_table_age bug (it's much more
serious than we realized at the time the fix was committed), and correct
attribution of pg_upgrade -O/-o fix (Marti Raudsepp contributed that,
but Bruce forgot to credit him in the commit log).

No need to back-patch right now, it'll happen when the next set of
release notes are prepared.
2013-02-08 10:41:15 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
858ef718ba doc: Rewrite how to get the source code
Instead of hardcoding a specific link, give a general link to the
download section of the web site.  This gives the user more download
options and the sysadmins more flexibility.  Also, the previously
presented link didn't work for devel versions.
2013-02-07 23:28:42 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
e1c1e21732 Enable building with Microsoft Visual Studio 2012.
Backpatch to release 9.2

Brar Piening and Noah Misch, reviewed by Craig Ringer.
2013-02-06 14:52:29 -05:00
Tom Lane
ab0f7b6089 Prevent execution of enum_recv() from SQL.
This function was misdeclared to take cstring when it should take internal.
This at least allows crashing the server, and in principle an attacker
might be able to use the function to examine the contents of server memory.

The correct fix is to adjust the system catalog contents (and fix the
regression tests that should have caught this but failed to).  However,
asking users to correct the catalog contents in existing installations
is a pain, so as a band-aid fix for the back branches, install a check
in enum_recv() to make it throw error if called with a cstring argument.
We will later revert this in HEAD in favor of correcting the catalogs.

Our thanks to Sumit Soni (via Secunia SVCRP) for reporting this issue.

Security: CVE-2013-0255
2013-02-04 16:25:01 -05:00
Tom Lane
318db6b2a0 Update release notes for 9.2.3, 9.1.8, 9.0.12, 8.4.16, 8.3.23. 2013-02-04 15:50:42 -05:00
Simon Riggs
f480e29449 Reset vacuum_defer_cleanup_age to PGC_SIGHUP.
Revert commit 84725aa5ef
2013-02-04 16:39:55 +00:00
Simon Riggs
bd56e74127 Reset master xmin when hot_standby_feedback disabled.
If walsender has xmin of standby then ensure we
reset the value to 0 when we change from hot_standby_feedback=on
to hot_standby_feedback=off.
2013-02-04 10:29:22 +00:00
Tom Lane
62e666400d Perform line wrapping and indenting by default in ruleutils.c.
This patch changes pg_get_viewdef() and allied functions so that
PRETTY_INDENT processing is always enabled.  Per discussion, only the
PRETTY_PAREN processing (that is, stripping of "unnecessary" parentheses)
poses any real forward-compatibility risk, so we may as well make dump
output look as nice as we safely can.

Also, set the default wrap length to zero (i.e, wrap after each SELECT
or FROM list item), since there's no very principled argument for the
former default of 80-column wrapping, and most people seem to agree this
way looks better.

Marko Tiikkaja, reviewed by Jeevan Chalke, further hacking by Tom Lane
2013-02-03 15:56:45 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
330ed4ac6c PL/Python: Add result object str handler
This is intended so that say plpy.debug(rv) prints something useful for
debugging query execution results.

reviewed by Steve Singer
2013-02-03 00:31:01 -05:00
Tom Lane
d2d153fdb0 Create a psql command \gset to store query results into psql variables.
This eases manipulation of query results in psql scripts.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Piyush Newe, Shigeru Hanada, and Tom Lane
2013-02-02 17:06:38 -05:00
Tom Lane
101d6ae755 Prevent "\g filename" from affecting subsequent commands after an error.
In the previous coding, psql's state variable saying that output should
go to a file was only reset after successful completion of a query
returning tuples.  Thus for example,

regression=# select 1/0
regression-# \g somefile
ERROR:  division by zero
regression=# select 1/2;
regression=#

... huh, I wonder where that output went.  Even more oddly, the state
was not reset even if it's the file that's causing the failure:

regression=# select 1/2 \g /foo
/foo: Permission denied
regression=# select 1/2;
/foo: Permission denied
regression=# select 1/2;
/foo: Permission denied

This seems to me not to satisfy the principle of least surprise.
\g is certainly not documented in a way that suggests its effects are
at all persistent.

To fix, adjust the code so that the flag is reset at exit from SendQuery
no matter what happened.

Noted while reviewing the \gset patch, which had comparable issues.
Arguably this is a bug fix, but I'll refrain from back-patching for now.
2013-02-02 14:22:17 -05:00
Simon Riggs
84725aa5ef Mark vacuum_defer_cleanup_age as PGC_POSTMASTER.
Following bug analysis of #7819 by Tom Lane
2013-02-02 18:49:54 +00:00
Peter Eisentraut
f4987049ef doc: Tiny whitespace fix 2013-02-01 21:44:22 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
5839052693 Add CREATE RECURSIVE VIEW syntax
This is specified in the SQL standard.  The CREATE RECURSIVE VIEW
specification is transformed into a normal CREATE VIEW statement with a
WITH RECURSIVE clause.

reviewed by Abhijit Menon-Sen and Stephen Frost
2013-01-31 22:31:58 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
a11e15c7b6 pg_upgrade docs: mention modification of postgresql.conf in new cluster
Mention it might be necessary to modify postgresql.conf in the new
cluster to match the old cluster.

Backpatch to 9.2.

Suggested by user.
2013-01-31 16:32:35 -05:00
Tatsuo Ishii
6a651d85eb Add --aggregate-interval option.
The new option specifies length of aggregation interval (in
seconds). May be used only together with -l. With this option, the log
contains per-interval summary (number of transactions, min/max latency
and two additional fields useful for variance estimation).

Patch contributed by Tomas Vondra, reviewed by Pavel Stehule. Slight
change by Tatsuo Ishii, suggested by Robert Hass to emit an error
message indicating that the option is not currently supported on
Windows.
2013-01-31 15:53:58 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
574f764321 pg_regress: Allow overriding diff options
By setting the environment variable PG_REGRESS_DIFF_OPTS, custom diff
options can be passed.

reviewed by Jeevan Chalke
2013-01-29 22:59:45 -05:00
Tom Lane
991f3e5ab3 Provide database object names as separate fields in error messages.
This patch addresses the problem that applications currently have to
extract object names from possibly-localized textual error messages,
if they want to know for example which index caused a UNIQUE_VIOLATION
failure.  It adds new error message fields to the wire protocol, which
can carry the name of a table, table column, data type, or constraint
associated with the error.  (Since the protocol spec has always instructed
clients to ignore unrecognized field types, this should not create any
compatibility problem.)

Support for providing these new fields has been added to just a limited set
of error reports (mainly, those in the "integrity constraint violation"
SQLSTATE class), but we will doubtless add them to more calls in future.

Pavel Stehule, reviewed and extensively revised by Peter Geoghegan, with
additional hacking by Tom Lane.
2013-01-29 17:08:26 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
89d00cbe01 Allow pgbench to use a scale larger than 21474.
Beyond 21474, the number of accounts exceed the range for int4. Change the
initialization code to use bigint for account id columns when scale is large
enough, and switch to using int64s for the variables in pgbench code. The
threshold where we switch to bigints is set at 20000, because that's easier
to remember and document than 21474, and ensures that there is some headroom
when int4s are used.

Greg Smith, with various changes by Euler Taveira de Oliveira, Gurjeet
Singh and Satoshi Nagayasu.
2013-01-29 12:05:55 +02:00
Alvaro Herrera
ee22c55f5a REASSIGN OWNED: handle shared objects, too
Give away ownership of shared objects (databases, tablespaces) along
with local objects, per original code intention.  Try to make the
documentation clearer, too.

Per discussion about DROP OWNED's brokenness, in bug #7748.

This is not backpatched because it'd require some refactoring of the
ALTER/SET OWNER code for databases and tablespaces.
2013-01-28 18:45:50 -03:00
Alvaro Herrera
ec41b8edc1 DROP OWNED: don't try to drop tablespaces/databases
My "fix" for bugs #7578 and #6116 on DROP OWNED at fe3b5eb08a not only
misstated that it applied to REASSIGN OWNED (which it did not affect),
but it also failed to fix the problems fully, because I didn't test the
case of owned shared objects.  Thus I created a new bug, reported by
Thomas Kellerer as #7748, which would cause DROP OWNED to fail with a
not-for-user-consumption error message.  The code would attempt to drop
the database, which not only fails to work because the underlying code
does not support that, but is a pretty dangerous and undesirable thing
to be doing as well.

This patch fixes that bug by having DROP OWNED only attempt to process
shared objects when grants on them are found, ignoring ownership.

Backpatch to 8.3, which is as far as the previous bug was backpatched.
2013-01-28 18:40:51 -03:00
Tom Lane
2378d79ab2 Make LATERAL implicit for functions in FROM.
The SQL standard does not have general functions-in-FROM, but it does
allow UNNEST() there (see the <collection derived table> production),
and the semantics of that are defined to include lateral references.
So spec compliance requires allowing lateral references within UNNEST()
even without an explicit LATERAL keyword.  Rather than making UNNEST()
a special case, it seems best to extend this flexibility to any
function-in-FROM.  We'll still allow LATERAL to be written explicitly
for clarity's sake, but it's now a noise word in this context.

In theory this change could result in a change in behavior of existing
queries, by allowing what had been an outer reference in a function-in-FROM
to be captured by an earlier FROM-item at the same level.  However, all
pre-9.3 PG releases have a bug that causes them to match variable
references to earlier FROM-items in preference to outer references (and
then throw an error).  So no previously-working query could contain the
type of ambiguity that would risk a change of behavior.

Per a suggestion from Andrew Gierth, though I didn't use his patch.
2013-01-26 16:18:42 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
4deb57de7d Issue ERROR if FREEZE mode can't be honored by COPY
Previously non-honored FREEZE mode was ignored.  This also issues an
appropriate error message based on the cause of the failure, per
suggestion from Tom.  Additional regression test case added.
2013-01-26 13:33:24 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
7c83619b50 doc: revert 80c20fcf3d and
0e93959a70

Revert patch that modified doc index mentions of search_path

Per Peter E.
2013-01-25 21:01:17 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
bb1e504951 doc: mention commit_delay is only honored if fsync is enabled
per Tianyin Xu
2013-01-25 15:54:28 -05:00
Tom Lane
0d5fbdc157 Change plan caching to honor, not resist, changes in search_path.
In the initial implementation of plan caching, we saved the active
search_path when a plan was first cached, then reinstalled that path
anytime we needed to reparse or replan.  The idea of that was to try to
reselect the same referenced objects, in somewhat the same way that views
continue to refer to the same objects in the face of schema or name
changes.  Of course, that analogy doesn't bear close inspection, since
holding the search_path fixed doesn't cope with object drops or renames.
Moreover sticking with the old path seems to create more surprises than
it avoids.  So instead of doing that, consider that the cached plan depends
on search_path, and force reparse/replan if the active search_path is
different than it was when we last saved the plan.

This gets us fairly close to having "transparency" of plan caching, in the
sense that the cached statement acts the same as if you'd just resubmitted
the original query text for another execution.  There are still some corner
cases where this fails though: a new object added in the search path
schema(s) might capture a reference in the query text, but we'd not realize
that and force a reparse.  We might try to fix that in the future, but for
the moment it looks too expensive and complicated.
2013-01-25 14:14:41 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
d309be0fb7 doc: merge ecpg username/password example into C comment
Backpatch to 9.2

per Tom Lane
2013-01-25 13:46:38 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
0e93959a70 doc: adjust search_path secondary index mention
per Tom Lane
2013-01-25 13:45:09 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
80c20fcf3d doc: split search_path index entries into separate secondaries
Karl O. Pinc
2013-01-25 12:49:29 -05:00
Robert Haas
a37e83c0a9 Make it easy to time out pg_isready, and make the default 3 seconds.
Along the way, add a missing line to the help message.

Phil Sorber, reviewed by Fujii Masao
2013-01-25 12:03:37 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
88886c79cc docs: In ecpg, clarify how username/password colon parameters are used
Backpatch to 9.2.

Patch from Alan B
2013-01-25 11:18:57 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
8936867627 Add prosecdef to \df+ output.
Jon Erdman, reviewed by Phil Sorber and Stephen Frost.
2013-01-25 17:22:26 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
7441b49d19 doc: improve wording of "foreign data server" in file-fdw docs
Backpatch to 9.2

Shigeru HANADA
2013-01-25 10:14:03 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
be926474be Make pg_dump exclude unlogged table data on hot standby slaves
Noted by Joe Van Dyk
2013-01-25 09:46:07 +01:00
Tom Lane
760f3c043a Fix concat() and format() to handle VARIADIC-labeled arguments correctly.
Previously, the VARIADIC labeling was effectively ignored, but now these
functions act as though the array elements had all been given as separate
arguments.

Pavel Stehule
2013-01-25 00:19:56 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
56a6317bf5 doc: add mention of ssi read anomolies to mvcc docs
From Jeff Davis, modified by Kevin Grittner
2013-01-24 21:44:54 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
9971f6f517 doc: correct sepgsql doc about permission checking of CASCADE
Backpatch to 9.2.

Patch from Kohei KaiGai
2013-01-24 21:21:50 -05:00
Tom Lane
2ddc600f8f Fix SPI documentation for new handling of ExecutorRun's count parameter.
Since 9.0, the count parameter has only limited the number of tuples
actually returned by the executor.  It doesn't affect the behavior of
INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE unless RETURNING is specified, because without
RETURNING, the ModifyTable plan node doesn't return control to execMain.c
for each tuple.  And we only check the limit at the top level.

While this behavioral change was unintentional at the time, discussion of
bug #6572 led us to the conclusion that we prefer the new behavior anyway,
and so we should just adjust the docs to match rather than change the code.
Accordingly, do that.  Back-patch as far as 9.0 so that the docs match the
code in each branch.
2013-01-24 18:34:00 -05:00
Simon Riggs
f64315c6e6 Docs shouldn't say HOT Standby.
Not an acronym.

Jeff Janes
2013-01-24 08:01:16 +00:00
Robert Haas
40ed59b286 Clarify that connection parameters aren't totally meaningless for PQping.
Per discussion with Phil Sorber.
2013-01-23 11:05:15 -05:00
Robert Haas
ac2e967362 pg_isready
New command-line utility to test whether a server is ready to
accept connections.

Phil Sorber, reviewed by Michael Paquier and Peter Eisentraut
2013-01-23 11:01:20 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
0ac5ad5134 Improve concurrency of foreign key locking
This patch introduces two additional lock modes for tuples: "SELECT FOR
KEY SHARE" and "SELECT FOR NO KEY UPDATE".  These don't block each
other, in contrast with already existing "SELECT FOR SHARE" and "SELECT
FOR UPDATE".  UPDATE commands that do not modify the values stored in
the columns that are part of the key of the tuple now grab a SELECT FOR
NO KEY UPDATE lock on the tuple, allowing them to proceed concurrently
with tuple locks of the FOR KEY SHARE variety.

Foreign key triggers now use FOR KEY SHARE instead of FOR SHARE; this
means the concurrency improvement applies to them, which is the whole
point of this patch.

The added tuple lock semantics require some rejiggering of the multixact
module, so that the locking level that each transaction is holding can
be stored alongside its Xid.  Also, multixacts now need to persist
across server restarts and crashes, because they can now represent not
only tuple locks, but also tuple updates.  This means we need more
careful tracking of lifetime of pg_multixact SLRU files; since they now
persist longer, we require more infrastructure to figure out when they
can be removed.  pg_upgrade also needs to be careful to copy
pg_multixact files over from the old server to the new, or at least part
of multixact.c state, depending on the versions of the old and new
servers.

Tuple time qualification rules (HeapTupleSatisfies routines) need to be
careful not to consider tuples with the "is multi" infomask bit set as
being only locked; they might need to look up MultiXact values (i.e.
possibly do pg_multixact I/O) to find out the Xid that updated a tuple,
whereas they previously were assured to only use information readily
available from the tuple header.  This is considered acceptable, because
the extra I/O would involve cases that would previously cause some
commands to block waiting for concurrent transactions to finish.

Another important change is the fact that locking tuples that have
previously been updated causes the future versions to be marked as
locked, too; this is essential for correctness of foreign key checks.
This causes additional WAL-logging, also (there was previously a single
WAL record for a locked tuple; now there are as many as updated copies
of the tuple there exist.)

With all this in place, contention related to tuples being checked by
foreign key rules should be much reduced.

As a bonus, the old behavior that a subtransaction grabbing a stronger
tuple lock than the parent (sub)transaction held on a given tuple and
later aborting caused the weaker lock to be lost, has been fixed.

Many new spec files were added for isolation tester framework, to ensure
overall behavior is sane.  There's probably room for several more tests.

There were several reviewers of this patch; in particular, Noah Misch
and Andres Freund spent considerable time in it.  Original idea for the
patch came from Simon Riggs, after a problem report by Joel Jacobson.
Most code is from me, with contributions from Marti Raudsepp, Alexander
Shulgin, Noah Misch and Andres Freund.

This patch was discussed in several pgsql-hackers threads; the most
important start at the following message-ids:
	AANLkTimo9XVcEzfiBR-ut3KVNDkjm2Vxh+t8kAmWjPuv@mail.gmail.com
	1290721684-sup-3951@alvh.no-ip.org
	1294953201-sup-2099@alvh.no-ip.org
	1320343602-sup-2290@alvh.no-ip.org
	1339690386-sup-8927@alvh.no-ip.org
	4FE5FF020200002500048A3D@gw.wicourts.gov
	4FEAB90A0200002500048B7D@gw.wicourts.gov
2013-01-23 12:04:59 -03:00
Robert Haas
f925c79b9f Further documentation tweaks for event triggers.
Per discussion between Dimitri Fontaine, myself, and others.
2013-01-23 09:17:20 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
21c87a0d46 doc: Fix declared number of columns in table
This was broken in 841a5150c5.
2013-01-22 21:51:02 -05:00
Robert Haas
4c97731928 Fix CREATE EVENT TRIGGER syntax synopsis in documentation.
Dimitri Fontaine, per a report from Thom Brown
2013-01-22 18:52:26 -05:00
Robert Haas
9917a491fd Typo fixes.
Noted by Thom Brown.
2013-01-21 22:35:45 -05:00
Robert Haas
841a5150c5 Add ddl_command_end support for event triggers.
Dimitri Fontaine, with slight changes by me
2013-01-21 18:00:24 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
693eb9dfd9 doc: Fix syntax of a URL
Leading white space before the "http:" is apparently treated as a
relative link at least by some browsers.
2013-01-20 19:43:29 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
0a2da5282a Clarify that streaming replication can be both async and sync
Josh Kupershmidt
2013-01-20 16:10:12 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
fb197290c1 libpq doc: Clarify what commands return PGRES_TUPLES_OK
The old text claimed that INSERT and UPDATE always return
PGRES_COMMAND_OK, but INSERT/UPDATE with RETURNING return
PGRES_TUPLES_OK.

Josh Kupershmidt
2013-01-18 22:36:54 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
74a82bafe4 psql latex fixes
Remove extra line at bottom of table for new 'latex' mode border=3.
Also update 'latex'-longtable 'tableattr' docs to say
'whitespace-separated' instead of 'space'.
2013-01-18 08:30:31 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
0b6329130e Make pg_receivexlog and pg_basebackup -X stream work across timeline switches.
This mirrors the changes done earlier to the server in standby mode. When
receivelog reaches the end of a timeline, as reported by the server, it
fetches the timeline history file of the next timeline, and restarts
streaming from the new timeline by issuing a new START_STREAMING command.

When pg_receivexlog crosses a timeline, it leaves the .partial suffix on the
last segment on the old timeline. This helps you to tell apart a partial
segment left in the directory because of a timeline switch, and a completed
segment. If you just follow a single server, it won't make a difference, but
it can be significant in more complicated scenarios where new WAL is still
generated on the old timeline.

This includes two small changes to the streaming replication protocol:
First, when you reach the end of timeline while streaming, the server now
sends the TLI of the next timeline in the server's history to the client.
pg_receivexlog uses that as the next timeline, so that it doesn't need to
parse the timeline history file like a standby server does. Second, when
BASE_BACKUP command sends the begin and end WAL positions, it now also sends
the timeline IDs corresponding the positions.
2013-01-17 20:23:00 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
b14f81bc9a Add a latex-longtable output format to psql
latex longtable is more powerful than the 'tabular' output format
'latex' uses.  Also add border=3 support to 'latex'.
2013-01-17 11:39:38 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
f3af53441e Support multiple -t/--table arguments for more commands
On top of the previous support in pg_dump, add support to specify
multiple tables (by using the -t option multiple times) to
pg_restore, clsuterdb, reindexdb and vacuumdb.

Josh Kupershmidt, reviewed by Karl O. Pinc
2013-01-17 11:24:47 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
a89c46f9bc Allow parallel copy/link in pg_upgrade
This patch implements parallel copying/linking of files by tablespace
using the --jobs option in pg_upgrade.
2013-01-09 08:57:47 -05:00
Tatsuo Ishii
cf03ff6c4e Add new "-q" logging option (quiet mode) while in initialize mode
(-i), producing only one progress message per 5 seconds along with
elapsed time and estimated remaining time.  Also add elapsed time and
estimated remaining time to the default logging(prints one message
each 100000 rows).
Patch contributed by Tomas Vondra, reviewed by Jeevan Chalke and
Tatsuo Ishii.
2013-01-07 11:13:44 +09:00
Magnus Hagander
915a29a10c Add support for generating minimal recovery.conf when doing base backups
Adds commandline option -R to pg_basebackup that creates a recovery.conf which
enables standby mode using the same parameters that pg_basebackup used to
connect to the master, and writes it into the output directory (or injects it
in the tar file when tar format is used).

Zoltan Boszormenyi, modified by Magnus Hagander, reviewed by Amit Kapila & Fujii Masao
2013-01-05 16:54:06 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
9e6df60619 doc: Update CREATE FUNCTION compatibility information
Parameter defaults are actually in the SQL standard, while it was
previously claimed they were not.
2013-01-05 08:29:18 -05:00
Tom Lane
94afbd5831 Invent a "one-shot" variant of CachedPlans for better performance.
SPI_execute() and related functions create a CachedPlan, execute it once,
and immediately discard it, so that the functionality offered by
plancache.c is of no value in this code path.  And performance measurements
show that the extra data copying and invalidation checking done by
plancache.c slows down simple queries by 10% or more compared to 9.1.
However, enough of the SPI code is shared with functions that do need plan
caching that it seems impractical to bypass plancache.c altogether.
Instead, let's invent a variant version of cached plans that preserves
99% of the API but doesn't offer any of the actual functionality, nor the
overhead.  This puts SPI_execute() performance back on par, or maybe even
slightly better, than it was before.  This change should resolve recent
complaints of performance degradation from Dong Ye, Pavel Stehule, and
others.

By avoiding data copying, this change also reduces the amount of memory
needed to execute many-statement SPI_execute() strings, as for instance in
a recent complaint from Tomas Vondra.

An additional benefit of this change is that multi-statement SPI_execute()
query strings are now processed fully serially, that is we complete
execution of earlier statements before running parse analysis and planning
on following ones.  This eliminates a long-standing POLA violation, in that
DDL that affects the behavior of a later statement will now behave as
expected.

Back-patch to 9.2, since this was a performance regression compared to 9.1.
(In 9.2, place the added struct fields so as to avoid changing the offsets
of existing fields.)

Heikki Linnakangas and Tom Lane
2013-01-04 17:42:19 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
bd61a623ac Update copyrights for 2013
Fully update git head, and update back branches in ./COPYRIGHT and
legal.sgml files.
2013-01-01 17:15:01 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
a266f7dd93 Winflex binary on FTP site doesn't work on 64-bit Windows, update docs.
Plus some other minor clarifications to Windows build instructions.

Craig Ringer, with minor editorialization by me.
2013-01-01 18:09:31 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
f1abee6bc6 Fix descrition of pg_resetxlog -l parameter
This was changed in commit 038f3a0509, including
the description in the docs, but the reference was missed.

Fujii Masao
2013-01-01 16:16:20 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
7eb559a86d doc: Correct description of ldapurl
The ldapurl option doesn't actually support specifying a user name and
password.

Albe Laurenz
2012-12-31 00:24:16 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
103cc89362 doc: Correct description of LDAP authentication
Parts of the description had claimed incorrect pg_hba.conf option names
for LDAP authentication.

Albe Laurenz
2012-12-29 22:58:07 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
925ce77c03 doc: Replace "NOTE" with proper markup 2012-12-26 23:48:35 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
6f1b9e4efd Add pg_upgrade --jobs parameter
Add pg_upgrade --jobs, which allows parallel dump/restore of databases,
which improves performance.
2012-12-26 19:26:30 -05:00
Tom Lane
3f88b08003 Fix some minor issues in view pretty-printing.
Code review for commit 2f582f76b1: don't use
a static variable for what ought to be a deparse_context field, fix
non-multibyte-safe test for spaces, avoid useless and potentially O(N^2)
(though admittedly with a very small constant) calculations of wrap
positions when we aren't going to wrap.
2012-12-24 17:52:19 -05:00
Tom Lane
eb03506812 Fix documentation typo.
"GetForeignTableColumnOptions" should be "GetForeignColumnOptions".
Noted by Metin Döşlü.
2012-12-22 15:01:29 -05:00
Tom Lane
343c2a865b Fix pg_extension_config_dump() to handle update cases more sanely.
If pg_extension_config_dump() is executed again for a table already listed
in the extension's extconfig, the code was blindly making a new array entry.
This does not seem useful.  Fix it to replace the existing array entry
instead, so that it's possible for extension update scripts to alter the
filter conditions for configuration tables.

In addition, teach ALTER EXTENSION DROP TABLE to check for an extconfig
entry for the target table, and remove it if present.  This is not a 100%
solution because it's allowed for an extension update script to just
summarily DROP a member table, and that code path doesn't go through
ExecAlterExtensionContentsStmt.  We could probably make that case clean
things up if we had to, but it would involve sticking a very ugly wart
somewhere in the guts of dependency.c.  Since on the whole it seems quite
unlikely that extension updates would want to remove pre-existing
configuration tables, making the case possible with an explicit command
seems sufficient.

Per bug #7756 from Regina Obe.  Back-patch to 9.1 where extensions were
introduced.
2012-12-20 16:31:42 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
8d2e9a9dbd doc: Put PL/pgSQL RAISE USING keywords into a list
Karl O. Pinc
2012-12-17 22:45:20 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
c2e32d5a6c doc: Remove extra table column
Not all system catalog description tables have the same number of
columns, and the patch to add oid columns did one bit too much
copy-and-pasting.
2012-12-16 03:51:05 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
160701f6a9 doc: Add oid columns to system catalog documentation
Karl O. Pinc and Jeff Davis
2012-12-15 00:42:47 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
79a457dca7 doc: Add pg_stat_reset and related functions to index 2012-12-15 00:30:53 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
a301eb99c9 doc: Improve search_path mentions in index
Karl O. Pinc
2012-12-13 23:00:42 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
abfd192b1b Allow a streaming replication standby to follow a timeline switch.
Before this patch, streaming replication would refuse to start replicating
if the timeline in the primary doesn't exactly match the standby. The
situation where it doesn't match is when you have a master, and two
standbys, and you promote one of the standbys to become new master.
Promoting bumps up the timeline ID, and after that bump, the other standby
would refuse to continue.

There's significantly more timeline related logic in streaming replication
now. First of all, when a standby connects to primary, it will ask the
primary for any timeline history files that are missing from the standby.
The missing files are sent using a new replication command TIMELINE_HISTORY,
and stored in standby's pg_xlog directory. Using the timeline history files,
the standby can follow the latest timeline present in the primary
(recovery_target_timeline='latest'), just as it can follow new timelines
appearing in an archive directory.

START_REPLICATION now takes a TIMELINE parameter, to specify exactly which
timeline to stream WAL from. This allows the standby to request the primary
to send over WAL that precedes the promotion. The replication protocol is
changed slightly (in a backwards-compatible way although there's little hope
of streaming replication working across major versions anyway), to allow
replication to stop when the end of timeline reached, putting the walsender
back into accepting a replication command.

Many thanks to Amit Kapila for testing and reviewing various versions of
this patch.
2012-12-13 19:17:32 +02:00
Tom Lane
cd3413ec36 Disable event triggers in standalone mode.
Per discussion, this seems necessary to allow recovery from broken event
triggers, or broken indexes on pg_event_trigger.

Dimitri Fontaine
2012-12-11 19:28:31 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
8e48d77cab doc: Remove blastwave.org link
Apparently, this service has been dead since 2008.
2012-12-10 22:40:47 -05:00
Tom Lane
b46c92112b Fix assorted bugs in privileges-for-types patch.
Commit 729205571e added privileges on data
types, but there were a number of oversights.  The implementation of
default privileges for types missed a few places, and pg_dump was
utterly innocent of the whole concept.  Per bug #7741 from Nathan Alden,
and subsequent wider investigation.
2012-12-09 00:08:23 -05:00
Tom Lane
a99c42f291 Support automatically-updatable views.
This patch makes "simple" views automatically updatable, without the need
to create either INSTEAD OF triggers or INSTEAD rules.  "Simple" views
are those classified as updatable according to SQL-92 rules.  The rewriter
transforms INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE commands on such views directly into an
equivalent command on the underlying table, which will generally have
noticeably better performance than is possible with either triggers or
user-written rules.  A view that has INSTEAD OF triggers or INSTEAD rules
continues to operate the same as before.

For the moment, security_barrier views are not considered simple.
Also, we do not support WITH CHECK OPTION.  These features may be
added in future.

Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Amit Kapila
2012-12-08 18:26:21 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
d12d9f595e Update iso.org page link
The old one is responding with 404.
2012-12-08 07:37:11 -05:00
Simon Riggs
1eb6cee499 Clarify that COPY FREEZE is not a hard rule.
Remove message when FREEZE not honoured,
clarify reasons in comments and docs.
2012-12-07 12:59:05 +00:00
Tom Lane
31a891857a Improve pl/pgsql to support composite-type expressions in RETURN.
For some reason lost in the mists of prehistory, RETURN was only coded to
allow a simple reference to a composite variable when the function's return
type is composite.  Allow an expression instead, while preserving the
efficiency of the original code path in the case where the expression is
indeed just a composite variable's name.  Likewise for RETURN NEXT.

As is true in various other places, the supplied expression must yield
exactly the number and data types of the required columns.  There was some
discussion of relaxing that for pl/pgsql, but no consensus yet, so this
patch doesn't address that.

Asif Rehman, reviewed by Pavel Stehule
2012-12-06 23:09:52 -05:00
Alvaro Herrera
da07a1e856 Background worker processes
Background workers are postmaster subprocesses that run arbitrary
user-specified code.  They can request shared memory access as well as
backend database connections; or they can just use plain libpq frontend
database connections.

Modules listed in shared_preload_libraries can register background
workers in their _PG_init() function; this is early enough that it's not
necessary to provide an extra GUC option, because the necessary extra
resources can be allocated early on.  Modules can install more than one
bgworker, if necessary.

Care is taken that these extra processes do not interfere with other
postmaster tasks: only one such process is started on each ServerLoop
iteration.  This means a large number of them could be waiting to be
started up and postmaster is still able to quickly service external
connection requests.  Also, shutdown sequence should not be impacted by
a worker process that's reasonably well behaved (i.e. promptly responds
to termination signals.)

The current implementation lets worker processes specify their start
time, i.e. at what point in the server startup process they are to be
started: right after postmaster start (in which case they mustn't ask
for shared memory access), when consistent state has been reached
(useful during recovery in a HOT standby server), or when recovery has
terminated (i.e. when normal backends are allowed).

In case of a bgworker crash, actions to take depend on registration
data: if shared memory was requested, then all other connections are
taken down (as well as other bgworkers), just like it were a regular
backend crashing.  The bgworker itself is restarted, too, within a
configurable timeframe (which can be configured to be never).

More features to add to this framework can be imagined without much
effort, and have been discussed, but this seems good enough as a useful
unit already.

An elementary sample module is supplied.

Author: Álvaro Herrera

This patch is loosely based on prior patches submitted by KaiGai Kohei,
and unsubmitted code by Simon Riggs.

Reviewed by: KaiGai Kohei, Markus Wanner, Andres Freund,
Heikki Linnakangas, Simon Riggs, Amit Kapila
2012-12-06 17:47:30 -03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
357cbaaeae Add pgstatginindex() function to get the size of the GIN pending list.
Fujii Masao, reviewed by Kyotaro Horiguchi.
2012-12-05 09:58:03 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
aa2fec0a18 Add support for LDAP URLs
Allow specifying LDAP authentication parameters as RFC 4516 LDAP URLs.
2012-12-03 23:31:02 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
630cd14426 Add initdb --sync-only option to sync the data directory to durable
storage.

Have pg_upgrade use it, and enable server options fsync=off and
full_page_writes=off.

Document that users turning fsync from off to on should run initdb
--sync-only.

[ Previous commit was incorrectly applied as a git merge. ]
2012-12-03 22:47:59 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
25d1ed04a2 Revert initdb --sync-only patch that had incorrect commit messages. 2012-12-03 22:46:51 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
2da3005a18 dummy commit 2012-12-03 22:45:02 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
d854c7dc6c dummy commit 2012-12-03 22:45:02 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
cd7569a546 dummy commit 2012-12-03 22:45:02 -05:00
Tom Lane
7510bec607 Update release notes for 9.2.2, 9.1.7, 9.0.11, 8.4.15, 8.3.22. 2012-12-03 15:09:59 -05:00
Tom Lane
bdd5d410b7 Fix documentation of path(polygon) function.
Obviously, this returns type "path", but somebody made a copy-and-pasteo
long ago.

Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
2012-12-03 11:08:50 -05:00
Tom Lane
d8262b6c9b Recommend triggers, not rules, in the CREATE VIEW reference page.
We've generally recommended use of INSTEAD triggers over rules since that
feature was added; but this old text in the CREATE VIEW reference page
didn't get the memo.  Noted by Thomas Kellerer.
2012-12-02 16:17:53 -05:00
Simon Riggs
8de72b66a2 COPY FREEZE and mark committed on fresh tables.
When a relfilenode is created in this subtransaction or
a committed child transaction and it cannot otherwise
be seen by our own process, mark tuples committed ahead
of transaction commit for all COPY commands in same
transaction. If FREEZE specified on COPY
and pre-conditions met then rows will also be frozen.
Both options designed to avoid revisiting rows after commit,
increasing performance of subsequent commands after
data load and upgrade. pg_restore changes later.

Simon Riggs, review comments from Heikki Linnakangas, Noah Misch and design
input from Tom Lane, Robert Haas and Kevin Grittner
2012-12-01 12:54:20 +00:00
Peter Eisentraut
44c03efee3 doc: Fix broken links to DocBook wiki 2012-12-01 01:52:23 -05:00
Magnus Hagander
65c3bf19fd Add libpq function PQconninfo()
This allows a caller to get back the exact conninfo array that was
used to create a connection, including parameters read from the
environment.

In doing this, restructure how options are copied from the conninfo
to the actual connection.

Zoltan Boszormenyi and Magnus Hagander
2012-11-30 15:11:08 +09:00
Tom Lane
3c84046490 Fix assorted bugs in CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY.
Commit 8cb53654db, which introduced DROP
INDEX CONCURRENTLY, managed to break CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY via a poor
choice of catalog state representation.  The pg_index state for an index
that's reached the final pre-drop stage was the same as the state for an
index just created by CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY.  This meant that the
(necessary) change to make RelationGetIndexList ignore about-to-die indexes
also made it ignore freshly-created indexes; which is catastrophic because
the latter do need to be considered in HOT-safety decisions.  Failure to
do so leads to incorrect index entries and subsequently wrong results from
queries depending on the concurrently-created index.

To fix, add an additional boolean column "indislive" to pg_index, so that
the freshly-created and about-to-die states can be distinguished.  (This
change obviously is only possible in HEAD.  This patch will need to be
back-patched, but in 9.2 we'll use a kluge consisting of overloading the
formerly-impossible state of indisvalid = true and indisready = false.)

In addition, change CREATE/DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY so that the pg_index
flag changes they make without exclusive lock on the index are made via
heap_inplace_update() rather than a normal transactional update.  The
latter is not very safe because moving the pg_index tuple could result in
concurrent SnapshotNow scans finding it twice or not at all, thus possibly
resulting in index corruption.  This is a pre-existing bug in CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY, which was copied into the DROP code.

In addition, fix various places in the code that ought to check to make
sure that the indexes they are manipulating are valid and/or ready as
appropriate.  These represent bugs that have existed since 8.2, since
a failed CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY could leave a corrupt or invalid
index behind, and we ought not try to do anything that might fail with
such an index.

Also fix RelationReloadIndexInfo to ensure it copies all the pg_index
columns that are allowed to change after initial creation.  Previously we
could have been left with stale values of some fields in an index relcache
entry.  It's not clear whether this actually had any user-visible
consequences, but it's at least a bug waiting to happen.

In addition, do some code and docs review for DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY;
some cosmetic code cleanup but mostly addition and revision of comments.

This will need to be back-patched, but in a noticeably different form,
so I'm committing it to HEAD before working on the back-patch.

Problem reported by Amit Kapila, diagnosis by Pavan Deolassee,
fix by Tom Lane and Andres Freund.
2012-11-28 21:26:01 -05:00
Tom Lane
532994299e Revert patch for taking fewer snapshots.
This reverts commit d573e239f0, "Take fewer
snapshots".  While that seemed like a good idea at the time, it caused
execution to use a snapshot that had been acquired before locking any of
the tables mentioned in the query.  This created user-visible anomalies
that were not present in any prior release of Postgres, as reported by
Tomas Vondra.  While this whole area could do with a redesign (since there
are related cases that have anomalies anyway), it doesn't seem likely that
any future patch would be reasonably back-patchable; and we don't want 9.2
to exhibit a behavior that's subtly unlike either past or future releases.
Hence, revert to prior code while we rethink the problem.
2012-11-26 15:55:43 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
6b6633ad6c doc: Put pg_temp into documentation index
Karl O. Pinc
2012-11-17 18:08:13 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
817c186ea3 doc: Put commas in the right place on pg_restore reference page
Karl O. Pinc
2012-11-15 00:04:23 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
8f40ad1f4e doc: Add link to CREATE TABLE AS on CREATE TABLE reference page
Karl O. Pinc
2012-11-12 22:26:43 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
9b3ac49e5a Use a stamp file for the XSLT HTML doc build
This way it works more like the DSSSL build, and dependencies are
tracked better by make.

Also copy the CSS stylesheet to the html directory.  This was forgotten
when the output directory was changed.
2012-11-12 21:42:25 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
42218f29af doc: "only relevant" -> "relevant only"
Karl O. Pinc
2012-11-11 22:50:24 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
732740e7d4 XSLT stylesheet: Add slash to directory name
Some versions of the XSLT stylesheets don't handle the missing slash
correctly (they concatenate directory and file name without the slash).
This might never have worked correctly.
2012-11-08 23:55:36 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
a9dad56441 Teach pg_basebackup and pg_receivexlog to reply to server keepalives.
Without this, the connection will be killed after timeout if
wal_sender_timeout is set in the server.

Original patch by Amit Kapila, modified by me to fit recent changes in the
code.
2012-11-08 10:28:52 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
c90dcd6d2c In pg_upgrade docs, mention using base backup as part of rsync for
logical replication upgrades.

Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-11-07 13:36:12 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
add6c3179a Make the streaming replication protocol messages architecture-independent.
We used to send structs wrapped in CopyData messages, which works as long as
the client and server agree on things like endianess, timestamp format and
alignment. That's good enough for running a standby server, which has to run
on the same platform anyway, but it's useful for tools like pg_receivexlog
to work across platforms.

This breaks protocol compatibility of streaming replication, but we never
promised that to be compatible across versions, anyway.
2012-11-07 19:09:13 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
4bb106ef4f Fix typo 2012-11-01 22:58:36 -04:00
Tom Lane
e774b7649c Document that TCP keepalive settings read as 0 on Unix-socket connections.
Per bug #7631 from Rob Johnson.  The code is operating as designed, but the
docs didn't explain it.
2012-10-31 14:26:20 -04:00
Tom Lane
5a39114fe7 In pg_dump, dump SEQUENCE SET items in the data not pre-data section.
Represent a sequence's current value as a separate TableDataInfo dumpable
object, so that it can be dumped within the data section of the archive
rather than in pre-data.  This fixes an undesirable inconsistency between
the meanings of "--data-only" and "--section=data", and also fixes dumping
of sequences that are marked as extension configuration tables, as per a
report from Marko Kreen back in July.  The main cost is that we do one more
SQL query per sequence, but that's probably not very meaningful in most
databases.

Back-patch to 9.1, since it has the extension configuration issue even
though not the --section switch.
2012-10-26 12:12:42 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
f4c4335a4a Add context info to OAT_POST_CREATE security hook
... and have sepgsql use it to determine whether to check permissions
during certain operations.  Indexes that are being created as a result
of REINDEX, for instance, do not need to have their permissions checked;
they were already checked when the index was created.

Author: KaiGai Kohei, slightly revised by me
2012-10-23 18:24:24 -03:00
Tom Lane
edef20f6e1 Fix pg_dump's handling of DROP DATABASE commands in --clean mode.
In commit 4317e0246c, I accidentally broke
this behavior while rearranging code to ensure that --create wouldn't
affect whether a DATABASE entry gets put into archive-format output.
Thus, 9.2 would issue a DROP DATABASE command in --clean mode, which is
either useless or dangerous depending on the usage scenario.
It should not do that, and no longer does.

A bright spot is that this refactoring makes it easy to allow the
combination of --clean and --create to work sensibly, ie, emit DROP
DATABASE then CREATE DATABASE before reconnecting.  Ordinarily we'd
consider that a feature addition and not back-patch it, but it seems
silly to not include the extra couple of lines required in the 9.2
version of the code.

Per report from Guillaume Lelarge, though this is slightly more extensive
than his proposed patch.
2012-10-20 16:58:32 -04:00
Simon Riggs
f862a326ef Fix typo in previous commit 2012-10-17 10:29:30 +01:00
Simon Riggs
9f9695a0cd Clarify hash index caution and copy to CREATE INDEX docs 2012-10-17 08:14:29 +01:00
Heikki Linnakangas
6f60fdd701 Improve replication connection timeouts.
Rename replication_timeout to wal_sender_timeout, and add a new setting
called wal_receiver_timeout that does the same at the walreceiver side.
There was previously no timeout in walreceiver, so if the network went down,
for example, the walreceiver could take a long time to notice that the
connection was lost. Now with the two settings, both sides of a replication
connection will detect a broken connection similarly.

It is no longer necessary to manually set wal_receiver_status_interval to
a value smaller than the timeout. Both wal sender and receiver now
automatically send a "ping" message if more than 1/2 of the configured
timeout has elapsed, and it hasn't received any messages from the other end.

Amit Kapila, heavily edited by me.
2012-10-11 17:48:08 +03:00
Tom Lane
8255566f9d Create an improved FDW option validator function for contrib/dblink.
dblink now has its own validator function dblink_fdw_validator(), which is
better than the core function postgresql_fdw_validator() because it gets
the list of legal options from libpq instead of having a hard-wired list.

Make the dblink extension module provide a standard foreign data wrapper
dblink_fdw that encapsulates use of this validator, and recommend use of
that wrapper instead of making up wrappers on the fly.

Unfortunately, because ad-hoc wrappers *were* recommended practice
previously, it's not clear when we can get rid of postgresql_fdw_validator
without causing upgrade problems.  But this is a step in the right
direction.

Shigeru Hanada, reviewed by KaiGai Kohei
2012-10-10 16:53:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
392b2e5010 Update obsolete text in fdwhandler.sgml.
Etsuro Fujita, with some wording adjustment by me.
2012-10-10 13:55:21 -04:00
Simon Riggs
2190377113 Use tablespace_option consistently on doc page
Fujii Masao
2012-10-09 08:29:37 +01:00
Simon Riggs
82e429794b Add microsecs/op display to pg_test_fsync utility
e.g. fsync  2103.613 ops/sec (   475 microsecs/op)

Peter Geoghegan
2012-10-09 08:15:23 +01:00
Tom Lane
0e924c007d Fix lo_read, lo_write, lo_truncate to cope with "size_t" length parameters.
libpq defines these functions as accepting "size_t" lengths ... but the
underlying backend functions expect signed int32 length parameters, and so
will misinterpret any value exceeding INT_MAX.  Fix the libpq side to throw
error rather than possibly doing something unexpected.

This is a bug of long standing, but I doubt it's worth back-patching.  The
problem is really pretty academic anyway with lo_read/lo_write, since any
caller expecting sane behavior would have to have provided a multi-gigabyte
buffer.  It's slightly more pressing with lo_truncate, but still we haven't
supported large objects over 2GB until now.
2012-10-08 21:19:53 -04:00
Tom Lane
1503333f8f Improve documentation about large-object functions.
Copy-editing for previous patch, plus fixing some longstanding markup
issues and oversights (like not mentioning that failures will set the
PQerrorMessage string).
2012-10-07 19:16:53 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
461ef73f09 Add API for 64-bit large object access. Now users can access up to
4TB large objects (standard 8KB BLCKSZ case).  For this purpose new
libpq API lo_lseek64, lo_tell64 and lo_truncate64 are added.  Also
corresponding new backend functions lo_lseek64, lo_tell64 and
lo_truncate64 are added. inv_api.c is changed to handle 64-bit
offsets.

Patch contributed by Nozomi Anzai (backend side) and Yugo Nagata
(frontend side, docs, regression tests and example program). Reviewed
by Kohei Kaigai. Committed by Tatsuo Ishii with minor editings.
2012-10-07 08:36:48 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
ae835c7d6e Improve LDAP authentication documentation
Use the terms "simple bind" and "search+bind" consistently do
distinguish the two modes (better than first mode and second mode in
any case).  They were already used in some places, now it's just more
prominent.

Split up the list of options into one for common options and one for
each mode, for clarity.

Add configuration examples for either mode.
2012-10-05 21:20:06 -04:00
Michael Meskes
1045af95e7 Removed sentence about not being able to retrieve more than one row at a time,
because it is not correct.
2012-10-05 17:49:24 +02:00
Tom Lane
7e389f73d1 Fix permissions explanations in CREATE DATABASE and CREATE SCHEMA docs.
These reference pages still claimed that you have to be superuser to create
a database or schema owned by a different role.  That was true before 8.1,
but it was changed in commits aa1110624c and
f91370cd2f to allow assignment of ownership
to any role you are a member of.  However, at the time we were thinking of
that primarily as a change to the ALTER OWNER rules, so the need to touch
these two CREATE ref pages got missed.
2012-10-04 13:41:01 -04:00
Tom Lane
fb34e94d21 Support CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS.
Per discussion, schema-element subcommands are not allowed together with
this option, since it's not very obvious what should happen to the element
objects.

Fabrízio de Royes Mello
2012-10-03 19:47:11 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
e1be1df51f Add --sampling-rate option to pgbench.
This allows logging only some fraction of transactions, greatly reducing
the amount of log generated.

Tomas Vondra, reviewed by Robert Haas and Jeff Janes.
2012-10-03 15:37:42 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
7ae1815961 Return the number of rows processed when COPY is executed through SPI.
You can now get the number of rows processed by a COPY statement in a
PL/pgSQL function with "GET DIAGNOSTICS x = ROW_COUNT".

Pavel Stehule, reviewed by Amit Kapila, with some editing by me.
2012-10-03 14:38:22 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
2ad881f054 The max shared_buffers value that initdb will choose was raised, update docs.
Jeff Janes
2012-10-01 09:23:06 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
db0af74af2 PL/Python: Convert oid to long/int
oid is a numeric type, so transform it to the appropriate Python
numeric type like the other ones.
2012-09-29 12:41:00 -04:00
Tom Lane
05b555d12b Fix tar files emitted by pg_dump and pg_basebackup to be POSIX conformant.
Both programs got the "magic" string wrong, causing standard-conforming tar
implementations to believe the output was just legacy tar format without
any POSIX extensions.  This doesn't actually matter that much, especially
since pg_dump failed to fill the POSIX fields anyway, but still there is
little point in emitting tar format if we can't be compliant with the
standard.  In addition, pg_dump failed to write the EOF marker correctly
(there should be 2 blocks of zeroes not just one), pg_basebackup put the
numeric group ID in the wrong place, and both programs had a pretty
brain-dead idea of how to compute the checksum.  Fix all that and improve
the comments a bit.

pg_restore is modified to accept either the correct POSIX-compliant "magic"
string or the previous value.  This part of the change will need to be
back-patched to avoid an unnecessary compatibility break when a previous
version tries to read tar-format output from 9.3 pg_dump.

Brian Weaver and Tom Lane
2012-09-28 15:19:15 -04:00
Tom Lane
7d8cbeb0c3 Fix examples of how to use "su" while starting the server.
The syntax "su -c 'command' username" is not accepted by all versions of
su, for example not OpenBSD's.  More portable is "su username -c
'command'".  So change runtime.sgml to recommend that syntax.  Also,
add a -D switch to the OpenBSD example script, for consistency with other
examples.  Per Denis Lapshin and Gábor Hidvégi.
2012-09-25 13:52:53 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
2a0c81a12c Add support for include_dir in config file.
This allows easily splitting configuration into many files, deployed in a
directory.

Magnus Hagander, Greg Smith, Selena Deckelmann, reviewed by Noah Misch.
2012-09-24 18:07:53 +03:00
Tom Lane
31510194cc Minor corrections for ALTER TYPE ADD VALUE IF NOT EXISTS patch.
Produce a NOTICE when the label already exists, for consistency with other
CREATE IF NOT EXISTS commands.  Also, fix the code so it produces something
more user-friendly than an index violation when the label already exists.
This not incidentally enables making a regression test that the previous
patch didn't make for fear of exposing an unpredictable OID in the results.
Also some wordsmithing on the documentation.
2012-09-22 18:35:22 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
fcc1576687 Fix docs typo 2012-09-22 13:57:40 -04:00
Andrew Dunstan
6d12b68cd7 Allow IF NOT EXISTS when add a new enum label.
If the label is already in the enum the statement becomes a no-op.
This will reduce the pain that comes from our not allowing this
operation inside a transaction block.

Andrew Dunstan, reviewed by Tom Lane and Magnus Hagander.
2012-09-22 12:53:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
4394fe3dcb Update release notes for 9.2.1, 9.1.6, 9.0.10, 8.4.14, 8.3.21. 2012-09-19 17:39:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
3c64342c86 Provide adequate documentation of the "table_name *" notation.
Somewhere along the line, somebody decided to remove all trace of this
notation from the documentation text.  It was still in the command syntax
synopses, or at least some of them, but with no indication what it meant.
This will not do, as evidenced by the confusion apparent in bug #7543;
even if the notation is now unnecessary, people will find it in legacy
SQL code and need to know what it does.
2012-09-17 14:59:31 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
327542645e Fix documentation reference to maximum allowed for autovacuum_freeze_max_age.
The documentation mentioned setting autovacuum_freeze_max_age to
"its maximum allowed value of a little less than two billion".
This led to a post asking about the exact maximum allowed value,
which is precisely two billion, not "a little less".

Based on question by Radovan Jablonovsky.  Backpatch to 8.3.
2012-09-16 11:59:50 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
7c328a9b04 Fix catalog docs to reflect connoinherit change in 09ff76f.
Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-09-12 14:23:50 -04:00
Kevin Grittner
4bc0d2e2cf Fix typo: lexemes misspelled in full text search docs.
Dan Scott
2012-09-11 19:46:17 -05:00
Robert Haas
dda589c96b Update syntax shown for \copy to match new syntax for COPY.
Etsuro Fujita
2012-09-06 17:00:03 -04:00
Tom Lane
25f4fe4e46 Fix typo in information_schema documentation.
Shigeru Hanada
2012-09-05 23:37:42 -04:00
Tom Lane
185b744ee6 Make one last copy-editing pass over the 9.2 release notes.
Also, set the release date to 2012-09-10, since we're pretty well
committed to that now.
2012-09-05 21:28:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
00a8eb61a2 Document that pg_upgrade requires PGHOST be set for any pre-9.1 servers
with a socket directory mismatch with the new server.

Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-09-04 09:17:30 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
4effe7a589 Mention basebackup-from-slave next to cascading replication 2012-09-04 14:37:14 +02:00
Tom Lane
f763b77193 Fix pg_upgrade to cope with non-default unix_socket_directory scenarios.
When starting either an old or new postmaster, force it to place its Unix
socket in the current directory.  This makes it even harder for accidental
connections to occur during pg_upgrade, and also works around some
scenarios where the default socket location isn't usable.  (For example,
if the default location is something other than "/tmp", it might not exist
during "make check".)

When checking an already-running old postmaster, find out its actual socket
directory location from postmaster.pid, if possible.  This dodges problems
with an old postmaster having a configured location different from the
default built into pg_upgrade's libpq.  We can't find that out if the old
postmaster is pre-9.1, so also document how to cope with such scenarios
manually.

In support of this, centralize handling of the connection-related command
line options passed to pg_upgrade's subsidiary programs, such as pg_dump.
This should make future changes easier.

Bruce Momjian and Tom Lane
2012-09-03 13:52:40 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7682c5947d Update URLs that pointed to sun.com; either repoint them or remove
them.
2012-09-02 09:16:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6c82a86c6f Add small doc mention that libpq is named after POSTQUEL. 2012-09-02 08:42:03 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
53fa0c6db8 Revert doc patch 305557984d as the values
are sometimes signed, sometimes unsigned.
2012-09-01 12:05:01 -04:00
Tom Lane
b8a4093b58 Fix broken link in installation.sgml.
Linking to other parts of the manual doesn't work when building the
standalone INSTALL document.
2012-09-01 10:43:50 -04:00
Robert Haas
e8d6c98c2f Cross-link to doc build requirements from install requirements.
Jeff Janes
2012-09-01 06:27:52 -04:00
Tom Lane
06310178ef More documentation updates for LATERAL.
Extend xfunc.sgml's discussion of set-returning functions to show an
example of using LATERAL, and recommend that over putting SRFs in the
targetlist.

In passing, reword func.sgml's section on set-returning functions so
that it doesn't claim that the functions listed therein are all the
built-in set-returning functions.  That hasn't been true for a long
time, and trying to make it so doesn't seem like it would be an
improvement.  (Perhaps we should rename that section?)

Both per suggestions from Merlin Moncure.
2012-09-01 00:40:25 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
5cad024524 psql: Reduce compatibility warning
Only warn when connecting to a newer server, since connecting to older
servers works pretty well nowadays.  Also update the documentation a
little about current psql/server compatibility expectations.
2012-08-31 23:28:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f789909b59 In pg_upgade, document that the port numbers must be different when
checking an old running server.
2012-08-31 16:56:05 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c36b06a70d Clarify FreeBSD instructions in pg_test_timing.
Josh Kupershmidt
2012-08-30 18:38:00 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b5dc7612a5 Properly document that SIGTERM is OK for users to use on a postgres
session, now that pg_terminate_backend() uses it.

Josh Kupershmidt
2012-08-30 17:58:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
39d0653d05 Revert 1fbc30f1dc because the
--enable-shared is about Plyton's configure, not ours.
2012-08-30 17:05:51 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1fbc30f1dc Remove doc mention of --enable-shared, per Tom. 2012-08-30 17:00:51 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
39b42ecb05 Document that max_locks_per_transaction might need to be increased for
queries on parent tables, per suggestion from Josh Berkus.
2012-08-30 16:56:23 -04:00
Robert Haas
9bedfbd02b Fix checkpoint_timeout documentation to reflect current behavior.
Jeff Janes
2012-08-30 15:08:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
83fbfec383 Document that log_autovacuum_min_duration can be used to monitor
autovacuum activity.

Per report from Marc Mamin
2012-08-30 14:44:46 -04:00
Robert Haas
35738b5906 Document how to prevent PostgreSQL itself from exhausting memory.
The existing documentation in Linux Memory Overcommit seemed to
assume that PostgreSQL itself could never be the problem, or at
least it didn't tell you what to do about it.

Per discussion with Craig Ringer and Kevin Grittner.
2012-08-30 14:24:07 -04:00
Robert Haas
b9ea8d20fd Document that COPY OUT requires an absolute pathname.
As suggested by Etsuro Fujita, but with somewhat different wording.
2012-08-30 13:18:23 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
48a9c7823e Remove old documentation warnings about the use of bigint. 2012-08-30 13:13:46 -04:00
Robert Haas
152525b5f3 Document that xslt-related RPMs may be needed to build docs. 2012-08-30 10:39:03 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9fe6da5c0d Document that NOTIFY events are visible to all users. 2012-08-29 21:45:31 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0f3351aacf Adjust pg_test_timing to show shortest test durations first, place
percentage column before count column.  Docs updated.
2012-08-28 12:57:13 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5ea6c9d798 Update doc mention of how to compute bigint advisory lock value, per Tom
Lane's correction.
2012-08-28 12:17:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
bf849af7f3 Document how to create advisory lock "bigint" values in SQL.
David E. Wheeler
2012-08-27 22:36:48 -04:00
Tom Lane
7417a8e3dd Improve a couple of 9.2 release note entries.
Clarify the compatibility notes about EXTRACT() and about statistics
timing columns.
2012-08-27 20:53:57 -04:00
Tom Lane
8770328784 Add section IDs to subsections of syntax.sgml that lacked them.
This is so that these sections will have stable HTML tags that one can
link to, rather than things like "AEN1902".  Perhaps we should mount a
campaign to do this everywhere, but I've found myself pointing at
syntax.sgml subsections often enough to be sure it's useful here.
2012-08-27 20:17:12 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
483c2c1071 Document the lack of reading the PGDATABASE environment variable in
pg_restore.
2012-08-27 15:27:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7a42dff47e Update FreeBSD kernel configuration documentation.
Brad Davis
2012-08-26 23:21:57 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
de87d47044 Clarify documentation that primary key and unique constraints are copied
for CREATE TABLE LIKE ... INCLUDING INDEXES.

Per report from david.sahagian@emc.com
2012-08-26 16:33:11 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f6752ee59a Document clearly that psql \! parameter interpretation limitations are
the same as \copy.
2012-08-25 19:11:21 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7514208fbb Some spelling adjustments in release notes 2012-08-24 22:50:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
8606e47e11 Normalize some British spellings 2012-08-24 22:50:43 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
406473b152 Put options on man page and in help output in slightly better order 2012-08-24 00:06:59 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
8b6b50a34d Fix typo in example. 2012-08-23 11:58:11 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
26a6267226 Add instructions for setting up documentation tool chain on Mac OS X 2012-08-23 02:29:21 -04:00
Tom Lane
6e2e12c947 Remove overly-pessimistic statement about constraint exclusion.
As of 9.2, constraint exclusion should work okay with prepared statements:
the planner will try custom plans with actual values of the parameters,
and observe that they are a lot cheaper than the generic plan, and thus
never fall back to using the generic plan.  Noted by Tatsuhito Kasahara.
2012-08-22 23:55:34 -04:00
Tom Lane
b33f611682 Make a cut at a major-features list for 9.2.
This is open to debate of course, but it's past time we had *something*
here.
2012-08-22 17:58:06 -04:00
Tom Lane
979f8f0431 Make an editorial pass over the 9.2 release notes.
A very large number of small improvements ...
2012-08-22 17:37:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
932a271956 Fix erroneous documentation of synchronous_commit = remote_write.
The docs claimed that this mode only waits for the standby to receive WAL
data, but actually it waits for the data to be written out to the standby's
OS; which is a pretty significant difference because it removes the risk of
crash of the walreceiver process.
2012-08-22 14:04:36 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
03af60c010 Fix typo. 2012-08-22 12:05:25 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7dff5b8edd Document that pg_reload_conf() is also an easy way to reload the
configuration file.
2012-08-22 12:01:27 -04:00
Tom Lane
0830cc9fe0 Update 9.2 release notes to reflect commits to date.
I was unable to entirely resist the temptation to copy-edit related
entries, but will save most of that for a separate pass.
2012-08-21 22:56:45 -04:00
Robert Haas
82ef3d3008 Add a note to the MVCC chapter that some things aren't transactional.
Craig Ringer, slightly edited by me.
2012-08-21 11:10:17 -04:00
Tom Lane
18226849ea Copy-editing for recent window-functions documentation rewrite.
Fix grammar, put back some removed information, rearrange for clarity.
2012-08-17 15:40:35 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
305557984d Update 'int' protocol documentation mention to be "signed", per request
from Dmitriy Igrishin
2012-08-16 22:07:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1037f2f646 Document that tab completation can interfere with some SQL commands. 2012-08-16 18:41:38 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c99016f1d0 Add warning about pg_ctl restart and the use of relative paths on the command-line. 2012-08-16 18:15:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c6ce4c1322 In docs, clarify that, without ORDER BY, the window frame is all rows in
the partition.
2012-08-16 11:32:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5c1b2f5daa Revert: In docs, change a few cases of "not important" to
"unimportant".

Per request from Heikki
2012-08-16 11:26:40 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
d5816d11af Rewrite window function reference section to more clearly explain
keywords and concepts, based on suggestions by Florian Pflug.
2012-08-16 10:42:42 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7c97f6a0cb In docs, change a few cases of "not important" to "unimportant". 2012-08-16 10:36:43 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
de3773d951 Fix SGML markup; missing tag. 2012-08-15 23:57:19 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
077908aed7 Document that PGDATA has to point to the configuration files, rather
than the actual data storage directory.

Per suggestion from Thom Brown
2012-08-15 22:59:37 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6ff55ebe3d Document that pg_ctl -w allows for the entry of an SSL passphase on
startup.

Per report from Thom Brown
2012-08-15 20:52:12 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
16d508ccbc Add CREATE FOREIGN TABLE doc reference to CREATE SERVER.
Per suggestion from Ray Stell
2012-08-15 20:38:01 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0729271adf Properly document that NEW is unassigned in plpgsql for DELETE (not
NULL), and OLD is unassigned for INSERT, and NEW/OLD are unassigned (not
NULL) for statement-level triggers.

Per report from Pavel Stehule
2012-08-15 20:29:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
083b9133aa On second thought, explain why date_trunc("week") on interval values is
not supported in the error message, rather than the docs.
2012-08-15 16:48:05 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
74f4881d7c Document why you can't use date_trunc("week") on intervals. 2012-08-15 16:03:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
fc5f20057f Document that foreign "version" and "type" values are only useful to
certain foreign data wrappers.
2012-08-15 11:47:02 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
a973296598 Properly escape usernames in initdb, so names with single-quotes are
supported.  Also add assert to catch future breakage.

Also, improve documentation that "double"-quotes must be used in
pg_hba.conf (not single quotes).
2012-08-15 11:23:15 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
864de654c8 Add more limited large object trigger example. 2012-08-14 23:25:20 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9e84cccff2 Add doc example of restricting large object trigger firing to only
updates of the column of interest.
2012-08-14 23:21:28 -04:00
Tom Lane
e45ae40181 Update release notes for 9.1.5, 9.0.9, 8.4.13, 8.3.20. 2012-08-14 18:33:51 -04:00
Tom Lane
adc97d03b9 Prevent access to external files/URLs via contrib/xml2's xslt_process().
libxslt offers the ability to read and write both files and URLs through
stylesheet commands, thus allowing unprivileged database users to both read
and write data with the privileges of the database server.  Disable that
through proper use of libxslt's security options.

Also, remove xslt_process()'s ability to fetch documents and stylesheets
from external files/URLs.  While this was a documented "feature", it was
long regarded as a terrible idea.  The fix for CVE-2012-3489 broke that
capability, and rather than expend effort on trying to fix it, we're just
going to summarily remove it.

While the ability to write as well as read makes this security hole
considerably worse than CVE-2012-3489, the problem is mitigated by the fact
that xslt_process() is not available unless contrib/xml2 is installed,
and the longstanding warnings about security risks from that should have
discouraged prudent DBAs from installing it in security-exposed databases.

Reported and fixed by Peter Eisentraut.

Security: CVE-2012-3488
2012-08-14 18:31:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1d96cf9404 In documentation, change "recommendable" to "recommended", per
consultation with word definitions.

Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-08-14 12:36:48 -04:00
Tom Lane
83af58f6b5 Add link from COPY ref page to psql \copy.
Jeff Janes
2012-08-11 13:51:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
c9b0cbe98b Support having multiple Unix-domain sockets per postmaster.
Replace unix_socket_directory with unix_socket_directories, which is a list
of socket directories, and adjust postmaster's code to allow zero or more
Unix-domain sockets to be created.

This is mostly a straightforward change, but since the Unix sockets ought
to be created after the TCP/IP sockets for safety reasons (better chance
of detecting a port number conflict), AddToDataDirLockFile needs to be
fixed to support out-of-order updates of data directory lockfile lines.
That's a change that had been foreseen to be necessary someday anyway.

Honza Horak, reviewed and revised by Tom Lane
2012-08-10 17:27:15 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
b3055ab4fb Fix upper limit of superuser_reserved_connections, add limit for wal_senders
Should be limited to the maximum number of connections excluding
autovacuum workers, not including.

Add similar check for max_wal_senders, which should never be higher than
max_connections.
2012-08-10 14:50:45 +02:00
Robert Haas
be690e291d Make psql -1 < file behave as expected.
Previously, the -1 option was silently ignored.

Also, emit an error if -1 is used in a context where it won't be
respected, to avoid user confusion.

Original patch by Fabien COELHO, but this version is quite different
from the original submission.
2012-08-09 10:02:50 -04:00
Simon Riggs
42020a89c7 Doc correction to point out that 9.2+ can overwrite pg_xlog files.
Noted by Noah Misch, patch by Fujii Masao
2012-08-08 22:34:46 +01:00
Tom Lane
5ebaaa4944 Implement SQL-standard LATERAL subqueries.
This patch implements the standard syntax of LATERAL attached to a
sub-SELECT in FROM, and also allows LATERAL attached to a function in FROM,
since set-returning function calls are expected to be one of the principal
use-cases.

The main change here is a rewrite of the mechanism for keeping track of
which relations are visible for column references while the FROM clause is
being scanned.  The parser "namespace" lists are no longer lists of bare
RTEs, but are lists of ParseNamespaceItem structs, which carry an RTE
pointer as well as some visibility-controlling flags.  Aside from
supporting LATERAL correctly, this lets us get rid of the ancient hacks
that required rechecking subqueries and JOIN/ON and function-in-FROM
expressions for invalid references after they were initially parsed.
Invalid column references are now always correctly detected on sight.

In passing, remove assorted parser error checks that are now dead code by
virtue of our having gotten rid of add_missing_from, as well as some
comments that are obsolete for the same reason.  (It was mainly
add_missing_from that caused so much fudging here in the first place.)

The planner support for this feature is very minimal, and will be improved
in future patches.  It works well enough for testing purposes, though.

catversion bump forced due to new field in RangeTblEntry.
2012-08-07 19:02:54 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ac78c4178b Fix to_char(), to_date(), and to_timestamp() to handle negative/BC
century specifications just like positive/AD centuries.  Previously the
behavior was either wrong or inconsistent with positive/AD handling.

Centuries without years now always assume the first year of the century,
which is now documented.
2012-08-07 13:34:44 -04:00
Robert Haas
b112df8421 Typo fixes for previous commit.
Noted by Thom Brown.
2012-08-06 16:12:17 -04:00
Robert Haas
95282d3522 Warn more vigorously about the non-transactional behavior of sequences.
Craig Ringer, edited fairly heavily by me
2012-08-06 15:19:31 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4639432597 Reword documentation for concurrent index rebuilds to be clearer.
Backpatch to 9.1 and 9.2.
2012-08-04 10:35:47 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
95e750520c Add link to synchronous_commit variables in high availability docs.
Backpatch to 9.2

Erik Rijkers
2012-08-03 16:33:20 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
9fb5952cdf Document that trying to exceed temp_file_limit causes a query cancel.
Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-08-03 15:15:27 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7b8c798362 Document that, for psql -c, only the result of the last command is
returned, per report from Aleksey Tsalolikhin

Backpatch to 9.2 and 9.1.
2012-08-03 14:02:22 -04:00
Tom Lane
7719ed04bc Update release notes for libpq feature change. 2012-08-02 13:21:19 -04:00
Tom Lane
41b9c8452b Replace libpq's "row processor" API with a "single row" mode.
After taking awhile to digest the row-processor feature that was added to
libpq in commit 92785dac2e, we've concluded
it is over-complicated and too hard to use.  Leave the core infrastructure
changes in place (that is, there's still a row processor function inside
libpq), but remove the exposed API pieces, and instead provide a "single
row" mode switch that causes PQgetResult to return one row at a time in
separate PGresult objects.

This approach incurs more overhead than proper use of a row processor
callback would, since construction of a PGresult per row adds extra cycles.
However, it is far easier to use and harder to break.  The single-row mode
still affords applications the primary benefit that the row processor API
was meant to provide, namely not having to accumulate large result sets in
memory before processing them.  Preliminary testing suggests that we can
probably buy back most of the extra cycles by micro-optimizing construction
of the extra results, but that task will be left for another day.

Marko Kreen
2012-08-02 13:10:30 -04:00
Tom Lane
7c0fecdaef Add documentation cross-reference for JSON functions.
Thom Brown
2012-08-01 00:41:41 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
2f29f011c8 pg_basebackup: stylistic adjustments
The most user-visible part of this is to change the long options
--statusint and --noloop to --status-interval and --no-loop,
respectively, per discussion.

Also, consistently enclose file names in double quotes, per our
conventions; and consistently use the term "transaction log file" to
talk about WAL segments.  (Someday we may need to go over this
terminology and make it consistent across the whole source code.)

Finally, reflow the code to better fit in 80 columns, and have pgindent
fix it up some more.
2012-07-31 11:02:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
04d2956f0d Now that the diskchecker.pl author has updated the download link on his
website, revert the separate link to the download git repository.

Backpatch from 9.0 to current.
2012-07-30 10:15:57 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c9a2532c83 Update doc mention of diskchecker.pl to add URL for script; retain URL
for description.

Patch to 9.0 and later, where script is mentioned.
2012-07-26 21:25:26 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
69451b0968 Document that the pg_upgrade user of rsync might want to skip some
files, like postmaster.pid.

Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-07-26 14:30:24 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
08d715a2d4 Document that pg_basebackup will create its output directory 2012-07-25 22:00:00 +03:00
Alvaro Herrera
d7b47e5155 Change syntax of new CHECK NO INHERIT constraints
The initially implemented syntax, "CHECK NO INHERIT (expr)" was not
deemed very good, so switch to "CHECK (expr) NO INHERIT" instead.  This
way it looks similar to SQL-standards compliant constraint attribute.

Backport to 9.2 where the new syntax and feature was introduced.

Per discussion.
2012-07-24 16:01:32 -04:00
Robert Haas
46b2b7e0ff Make pgbench vacuum before building indexes.
This is apparently faster than doing things the other way around when
the scale factor is large.

Along the way, adjust -n to suppress vacuuming during initialization
as well as during test runs.

Jeff Janes, with some small changes by me.
2012-07-23 14:42:35 -04:00
Robert Haas
3a0e4d36eb Make new event trigger facility actually do something.
Commit 3855968f32 added syntax, pg_dump,
psql support, and documentation, but the triggers didn't actually fire.
With this commit, they now do.  This is still a pretty basic facility
overall because event triggers do not get a whole lot of information
about what the user is trying to do unless you write them in C; and
there's still no option to fire them anywhere except at the very
beginning of the execution sequence, but it's better than nothing,
and a good building block for future work.

Along the way, add a regression test for ALTER LARGE OBJECT, since
testing of event triggers reveals that we haven't got one.

Dimitri Fontaine and Robert Haas
2012-07-20 11:39:01 -04:00
Robert Haas
3855968f32 Syntax support and documentation for event triggers.
They don't actually do anything yet; that will get fixed in a
follow-on commit.  But this gets the basic infrastructure in place,
including CREATE/ALTER/DROP EVENT TRIGGER; support for COMMENT,
SECURITY LABEL, and ALTER EXTENSION .. ADD/DROP EVENT TRIGGER;
pg_dump and psql support; and documentation for the anticipated
initial feature set.

Dimitri Fontaine, with review and a bunch of additional hacking by me.
Thom Brown extensively reviewed earlier versions of this patch set,
but there's not a whole lot of that code left in this commit, as it
turns out.
2012-07-18 10:16:16 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
d6ce58c010 Show step titles in the pg_upgrade man page
The upstream XSLT stylesheets missed that case.

found by Álvaro Herrera
2012-07-17 21:34:22 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
8e708e5e36 Add link to PEP 394 regarding python2 vs python3 naming 2012-07-14 13:06:09 +03:00
Tom Lane
b966dd6c42 Add fsync capability to initdb, and use sync_file_range() if available.
Historically we have not worried about fsync'ing anything during initdb
(in fact, initdb intentionally passes -F to each backend launch to prevent
it from fsync'ing).  But with filesystems getting more aggressive about
caching data, that's not such a good plan anymore.  Make initdb do a pass
over the finished data directory tree to fsync everything.  For testing
purposes, the -N/--nosync flag can be used to restore the old behavior.

Also, testing shows that on Linux, sync_file_range() is much faster than
posix_fadvise() for hinting to the kernel that an fsync is coming,
apparently because the latter blocks on a rather small request queue while
the former doesn't.  So use this function if available in initdb, and also
in the backend's pg_flush_data() (where it currently will affect only the
speed of CREATE DATABASE's cloning step).

We will later make pg_regress invoke initdb with the --nosync flag
to avoid slowing down cases such as "make check" in contrib.  But
let's not do so until we've shaken out any portability issues in this
patch.

Jeff Davis, reviewed by Andres Freund
2012-07-13 17:16:58 -04:00
Tom Lane
84a42560c8 Add array_remove() and array_replace() functions.
These functions support removing or replacing array element value(s)
matching a given search value.  Although intended mainly to support a
future array-foreign-key feature, they seem useful in their own right.

Marco Nenciarini and Gabriele Bartolini, reviewed by Alex Hunsaker
2012-07-11 13:59:35 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f9951252db Document that Log-Shipping Standby Servers cannot be upgraded by
pg_upgrade.

Backpatch to 9.2.
2012-07-10 23:08:19 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
042d9ffc28 Run newly-configured perltidy script on Perl files.
Run on HEAD and 9.2.
2012-07-04 21:47:49 -04:00
Robert Haas
d7c734841b Reduce messages about implicit indexes and sequences to DEBUG1.
Per recent discussion on pgsql-hackers, these messages are too
chatty for most users.
2012-07-04 20:35:29 -04:00
Robert Haas
0fc32c00d7 Fix sample INSTR function to return 0 if third arg is 0.
Albe Laurenz, per a report by Greg Smith that our sample function
doesn't quite match Oracle's behavior.
2012-07-04 17:19:23 -04:00
Robert Haas
248b5fce06 More doc cleanups for recent shared memory changes.
Josh Kupershmidt
2012-07-04 15:57:48 -04:00
Robert Haas
390bfc643d Documentation cleanups for recent shared memory changes. 2012-07-04 15:56:12 -04:00
Magnus Hagander
817d870cf9 Remove reference to default wal_buffers being 8
This hasn't been true since 9.1, when the default was changed to -1.
Remove the reference completely, keeping the discussion of the parameter
and it's shared memory effects on the config page.
2012-07-04 09:23:51 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
51fc406819 Remove references to pgfoundry as recommended hosting platform
pgfoundry is deprectaed and no longer accepting new projects,
so we really shouldn't be directing people there.
2012-07-04 08:59:35 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
d80785e6ed Remove references to PostgreSQL bundled on Solaris
Also remove special references to downloads off pgfoundry since they are
not correct - downloads are done through the main website.
2012-07-04 08:58:31 +02:00
Robert Haas
f11e8be3e8 Make commit_delay much smarter.
Instead of letting every backend participating in a group commit wait
independently, have the first one that becomes ready to flush WAL wait
for the configured delay, and let all the others wait just long enough
for that first process to complete its flush.  This greatly increases
the chances of being able to configure a commit_delay setting that
actually improves performance.

As a side consequence of this change, commit_delay now affects all WAL
flushes, rather than just commits.  There was some discussion on
pgsql-hackers about whether to rename the GUC to, say, wal_flush_delay,
but in the absence of consensus I am leaving it alone for now.

Peter Geoghegan, with some changes, mostly to the documentation, by me.
2012-07-02 10:26:31 -04:00
Robert Haas
7700b82e6b Update release notes for pg_terminate_backend changes. 2012-06-27 08:44:50 -04:00
Robert Haas
c60ca19de9 Allow pg_terminate_backend() to be used on backends with matching role.
A similar change was made previously for pg_cancel_backend, so now it
all matches again.

Dan Farina, reviewed by Fujii Masao, Noah Misch, and Jeff Davis,
with slight kibitzing on the doc changes by me.
2012-06-26 16:16:52 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
038f3a0509 Fix pg_upgrade, broken by the xlogid/segno -> 64-bit int refactoring.
The xlogid + segno representation of a particular WAL segment doesn't make
much sense in pg_resetxlog anymore, now that we don't use that anywhere
else. Use the WAL filename instead, since that's a convenient way to name a
particular WAL segment.

I did this partially for pg_resetxlog in the original xlogid/segno -> uint64
patch, but I neglected pg_upgrade and the docs. This should now be more
complete.
2012-06-26 07:49:02 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
b8b2e3b2de Replace int2/int4 in C code with int16/int32
The latter was already the dominant use, and it's preferable because
in C the convention is that intXX means XX bits.  Therefore, allowing
mixed use of int2, int4, int8, int16, int32 is obviously confusing.

Remove the typedefs for int2 and int4 for now.  They don't seem to be
widely used outside of the PostgreSQL source tree, and the few uses
can probably be cleaned up by the time this ships.
2012-06-25 01:51:46 +03:00
Robert Haas
6ef5baf8b1 Document that && can be used to search arrays.
Also, add some cross-links to the indexing documentation, so it's easier
to notice that && and other array operators have index support.

Ryan Kelly, edited by me.
2012-06-22 08:59:41 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
6753ced310 Make placeholders in SQL command help more consistent and precise
To avoid divergent names on related pages, avoid ambiguities, and
reduce translation work a little.
2012-06-22 01:06:14 +03:00
Tom Lane
afe1c51c9d Add pgbench option to add foreign key constraints to the standard scenario.
The option --foreign-keys, used at initialization time, will create foreign
key constraints for the columns that represent references to other tables'
primary keys.  This can help in benchmarking FK performance.

Jeff Janes
2012-06-19 18:33:59 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c521665bd7 Remove confusing half sentence from legal notice
pointed out by Stefan Kaltenbrunner
2012-06-20 00:12:05 +03:00
Tom Lane
c75be2ad60 Change ON UPDATE SET NULL/SET DEFAULT referential actions to meet SQL spec.
Previously, when executing an ON UPDATE SET NULL or SET DEFAULT action for
a multicolumn MATCH SIMPLE foreign key constraint, we would set only those
referencing columns corresponding to referenced columns that were changed.
This is what the SQL92 standard said to do --- but more recent versions
of the standard say that all referencing columns should be set to null or
their default values, no matter exactly which referenced columns changed.
At least for SET DEFAULT, that is clearly saner behavior.  It's somewhat
debatable whether it's an improvement for SET NULL, but it appears that
other RDBMS systems read the spec this way.  So let's do it like that.

This is a release-notable behavioral change, although considering that
our documentation already implied it was done this way, the lack of
complaints suggests few people use such cases.
2012-06-18 12:12:52 -04:00
Tom Lane
f5297bdfe4 Refer to the default foreign key match style as MATCH SIMPLE internally.
Previously we followed the SQL92 wording, "MATCH <unspecified>", but since
SQL99 there's been a less awkward way to refer to the default style.

In addition to the code changes, pg_constraint.confmatchtype now stores
this match style as 's' (SIMPLE) rather than 'u' (UNSPECIFIED).  This
doesn't affect pg_dump or psql because they use pg_get_constraintdef()
to reconstruct foreign key definitions.  But other client-side code might
examine that column directly, so this change will have to be marked as
an incompatibility in the 9.3 release notes.
2012-06-17 20:16:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
bb7520cc26 Make documentation of --help and --version options more consistent
Before, some places didn't document the short options (-? and -V),
some documented both, some documented nothing, and they were listed in
various orders.  Now this is hopefully more consistent and complete.
2012-06-18 02:46:59 +03:00
Magnus Hagander
920febdad5 Reorder basebackup options, to list pg_basebackup first
Since this is the easy way of doing it, it should be listed first. All
the old information is retained for those who want the more advanced way.

Also adds a subheading for compressing logs, that seems to have been missing
2012-06-17 21:18:02 +08:00
Robert Haas
c616d85f6b Doc corrections for pg_is_in_backup patch.
Fujii Masao
2012-06-14 14:31:05 -04:00
Robert Haas
68de499bda New SQL functons pg_backup_in_progress() and pg_backup_start_time()
Darold Gilles, reviewed by Gabriele Bartolini and others, rebased by
Marco Nenciarini.  Stylistic cleanup and OID fixes by me.
2012-06-14 13:25:43 -04:00
Tom Lane
bed88fceac Stamp HEAD as 9.3devel.
Let the hacking begin ...
2012-06-13 20:03:02 -04:00
Tom Lane
0f0fba1794 Remove release note entry for reverted patch. 2012-06-13 18:57:28 -04:00
Tom Lane
8b23db944b Fix description of SQL-standard meaning of CREATE LOCAL TEMP TABLE.
I had this slightly wrong, as noted by Noah Misch.
2012-06-13 18:47:53 -04:00
Tom Lane
c3bc76bdb0 Deprecate use of GLOBAL and LOCAL in temp table creation.
Aside from adjusting the documentation to say that these are deprecated,
we now report a warning (not an error) for use of GLOBAL, since it seems
fairly likely that we might change that to request SQL-spec-compliant temp
table behavior in the foreseeable future.  Although our handling of LOCAL
is equally nonstandard, there is no evident interest in ever implementing
SQL modules, and furthermore some other products interpret LOCAL as
behaving the same way we do.  So no expectation of change and no warning
for LOCAL; but it still seems a good idea to deprecate writing it.

Noah Misch
2012-06-13 17:48:42 -04:00
Tom Lane
93f4d7f806 Support Linux's oom_score_adj API as well as the older oom_adj API.
The simplest way to handle this is just to copy-and-paste the relevant
code block in fork_process.c, so that's what I did. (It's possible that
something more complicated would be useful to packagers who want to work
with either the old or the new API; but at this point the number of such
people is rapidly approaching zero, so let's just get the minimal thing
done.)  Update relevant documentation as well.
2012-06-13 15:35:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c0a6f9c84b Improve documentation of postgres -C option
Clarify help (s/return/print/), and explain that this option is for
use by other programs, not for user-facing use (it does not print
units).
2012-06-13 13:41:25 +03:00
Robert Haas
99b3135e33 Copy-editing of release notes.
Remove a couple of items that were actually back-patched bug fixes.
Add additional details to a couple of items which lacked a description.
Improve attributions for a couple of items I was involved with.
A few other miscellaneous corrections.
2012-06-12 09:51:48 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
7d754961f7 pg_receivexlog: Rename option --dir to --directory
getopt_long() allows abbreviating long options, so we might as well
give the option the full name, and users can abbreviate it how they
like.

Do some general polishing of the --help output at the same time.
2012-06-12 00:55:27 +03:00
Magnus Hagander
9af34cdec8 Revert behaviour of -x/--xlog to 9.1 semantics
To replace it, add -X/--xlog-method that allows the specification
of fetch or stream.

Do this to avoid unnecessary backwards-incompatiblity. Spotted and
suggested by Peter Eisentraut.
2012-06-11 14:58:35 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
a0b4c5a20a Fix pg_basebackup/pg_receivexlog for floating point timestamps
Since the replication protocol deals with TimestampTz, we need to
care for the floating point case as well in the frontend tools.

Fujii Masao, with changes from Magnus Hagander
2012-06-10 12:12:36 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
f1438cf5c6 Documentation style improvements 2012-06-08 10:29:12 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
5baf6da717 Documentation spell and markup checking 2012-06-08 00:06:20 +03:00
Magnus Hagander
1e57c2c5b2 Fix typo
Noted by Erik Rijkers
2012-06-05 14:08:56 +02:00
Magnus Hagander
778201200b Add example of archive_command to use with pg_receivexlog 2012-06-05 13:54:59 +02:00
Simon Riggs
3e4d3a32b2 Improve description of pg_stat_statements normalisation in release notes. 2012-06-01 11:49:14 +01:00
Simon Riggs
56b62cbd01 Clarify description of covering indexes in release notes 2012-06-01 11:35:27 +01:00
Simon Riggs
a6e1d7b5fb Copy editing of release notes for couple of my items. 2012-06-01 11:33:16 +01:00
Tom Lane
4bec93ac0f Stamp 9.2beta2. 2012-05-31 19:16:55 -04:00
Tom Lane
51ecf52c01 Update release notes for 9.1.4, 9.0.8, 8.4.12, 8.3.19. 2012-05-31 19:03:32 -04:00
Tom Lane
4317e0246c Rewrite --section option to decouple it from --schema-only/--data-only.
The initial implementation of pg_dump's --section option supposed that the
existing --schema-only and --data-only options could be made equivalent to
--section settings.  This is wrong, though, due to dubious but long since
set-in-stone decisions about where to dump SEQUENCE SET items, as seen in
bug report from Martin Pitt.  (And I'm not totally convinced there weren't
other bugs, either.)  Undo that coupling and instead drive --section
filtering off current-section state tracked as we scan through the TOC
list to call _tocEntryRequired().

To make sure those decisions don't shift around and hopefully save a few
cycles, run _tocEntryRequired() only once per TOC entry and save the result
in a new TOC field.  This required minor rejiggering of ACL handling but
also allows a far cleaner implementation of inhibit_data_for_failed_table.

Also, to ensure that pg_dump and pg_restore have the same behavior with
respect to the --section switches, add _tocEntryRequired() filtering to
WriteToc() and WriteDataChunks(), rather than trying to implement section
filtering in an entirely orthogonal way in dumpDumpableObject().  This
required adjusting the handling of the special ENCODING and STDSTRINGS
items, but they were pretty weird before anyway.

Minor other code review for the patch, too.
2012-05-29 23:22:14 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
2d612abd4d libpq: URI parsing fixes
Drop special handling of host component with slashes to mean
Unix-domain socket.  Specify it as separate parameter or using
percent-encoding now.

Allow omitting username, password, and port even if the corresponding
designators are present in URI.

Handle percent-encoding in query parameter keywords.

Alex Shulgin

some documentation improvements by myself
2012-05-28 22:44:34 +03:00
Magnus Hagander
16282ae688 Make pg_recievexlog by default loop on connection failures
Avoids the need for an external script in the most common
scenario. Behavior can be overridden using the -n/--noloop
commandline parameter.
2012-05-27 11:05:24 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
32cebaaed5 Clarify 9.2 release notes items about pg_stat_statements, to better
document fix of double counting and read/write count addition, per Peter
Geoghegan
2012-05-24 19:10:06 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
7672366a89 Change pg_stat_statements order of release note items, per Peter
Geoghegan
2012-05-24 17:51:56 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
eeef7bd2da Remove PL/Perl null array 9.2 release note item, per Andrew Dunstan 2012-05-24 17:36:15 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
ace397e9d2 Update SQL key word list to SQL:2011
For space reasons, drop SQL:1999 and SQL:2003.  Only keep the latest
two and SQL-92 for historical comparison.
2012-05-24 20:06:25 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
db2cd07482 Mention Peter Geoghegan as primary author of pg_stat_statements changes. 2012-05-23 10:12:44 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
13477c0197 Improve wording of 9.2 clog release note item. 2012-05-23 09:29:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
b9c895ee6f Add 9.2 release note authorship mentions for Heikki and Alexander
Korotkov, per Alexander Korotkov.
2012-05-22 22:59:31 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
92a953fbf8 Add small example about pg_archivecleanup -x option
Every time I read this I had doubts about whether the argument to the
-x option should include the dot (yes).  A small example should
clarify this.
2012-05-23 01:06:33 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
0013a665b7 Fix markup for HISTORY generation. 2012-05-22 17:36:33 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e6b7170c33 Fix reindexdb manual page to say --maintenance-db controls what is
reindexed, not vacuumed (typo).  Per report from Thomas REISS
2012-05-22 17:31:46 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
007522e6b4 9.2 release notes: GiST index improvements are for all geometric index
types, per Alexander Korotkov
2012-05-22 17:26:42 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8a46e25189 Remove reviewers from 9.2 release notes; improve attributions. 2012-05-22 17:17:15 -04:00
Robert Haas
b536458e73 Release note improvements.
Document some more things as incompatibilities, and improve wording of
another item.

Noah Misch
2012-05-22 10:20:25 -04:00
Tom Lane
e79da56b85 Adjust documentation of ALTER TABLE CLUSTER ON for more consistency.
Josh Kupershmidt
2012-05-21 12:06:56 -04:00
Tom Lane
8be950f5c0 Document that we deviate from ISO 8601 by not using 'T' on output.
Per discussion, we should explain that we follow RFC 3339 and not really
the letter of the ISO 8601 spec for timestamp output format.  Mostly
Brendan Jurd's wording, though I tweaked it to clarify that we do take 'T'
on input.  Minor additional copy-editing and markup-tweaking, too.
2012-05-21 11:56:00 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
fe2534e534 Some reference page improvements
initdb: Add -T option
oid2name: Put options in some non-random order
pg_dump: Put --section option in the right place

And some additional markup and terminology improvements.
2012-05-20 01:15:55 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
9c64f39557 Put back word that was mysteriously lost in man page conversion 2012-05-19 20:36:09 +03:00
Michael Meskes
c1ba858c6d Reworded sentence as suggested by Stephen Frost. 2012-05-19 14:44:56 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
4ad5cbedf6 Update key words table for 9.2 2012-05-17 19:27:55 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
939ec9b8a4 Update SQL features/conformance information to SQL:2011 2012-05-17 09:50:04 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
00b0c73f1f Fix a whitespace issue with the man pages
See 6ef2448796 for an explanation.  This
is the same for the new man pages.
2012-05-15 22:55:13 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
c8e086795a Remove whitespace from end of lines
pgindent and perltidy should clean up the rest.
2012-05-15 22:19:41 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
131b4d6473 Make xrefs to tables instead of assuming they appear below 2012-05-15 21:53:07 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
d36eaa2167 Update group commit release note item. 2012-05-12 08:55:07 -04:00
Tom Lane
a5985a96a8 Explain compatibility item about language names a bit more.
Since we've got an "open items" list item about this, apparently some
people are pretty worried about it.

In passing remove a lot of trailing whitespace.
2012-05-11 18:53:12 -04:00
Tom Lane
f35ebd2aa1 Update example of process titles shown by "ps".
This example was quite old: it lacked the WAL writer and autovac launcher
as well as the more recently added checkpointer.  Linux "ps" seems to show
slightly different stuff now too.
2012-05-11 18:33:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
63fecc9177 Fix contrib/citext's upgrade script to handle array and domain cases.
We previously recognized that citext wouldn't get marked as collatable
during pg_upgrade from a pre-9.1 installation, and hacked its
create-from-unpackaged script to manually perform the necessary catalog
adjustments.  However, we overlooked the fact that domains over citext,
as well as the citext[] array type, need the same adjustments.  Extend
the script to handle those cases.

Also, the documentation suggested that this was only an issue in pg_upgrade
scenarios, which is quite wrong; loading any dump containing citext from a
pre-9.1 server will also result in the type being wrongly marked.

I approached the documentation problem by changing the 9.1.2 release note
paragraphs about this issue, which is historically inaccurate.  But it
seems better than having the information scattered in multiple places, and
leaving incorrect info in the 9.1.2 notes would be bad anyway.  We'll still
need to mention the issue again in the 9.1.4 notes, but perhaps they can
just reference 9.1.2 for fix instructions.

Per report from Evan Carroll.  Back-patch into 9.1.
2012-05-11 15:22:30 -04:00
Tom Lane
817ec1bc82 Improve discussion of setting server parameters.
Rewrite description of "include_if_exists" for clarity.  Add subsection
headings to make the structure of the page a little clearer.  A couple
other minor improvements too.

Josh Kupershmidt and Tom Lane
2012-05-10 23:01:28 -04:00
Tom Lane
f70fa835e0 Stamp 9.2beta1. 2012-05-10 18:35:09 -04:00
Tom Lane
e3cdc1532c Tweak documentation wording to avoid "pdfendlink" failure.
HEAD documentation was failing to build as US PDF for me, because a link
to "CREATE CAST" was getting split across pages.  Adjust wording to
remove this rather gratuitous cross-reference.
2012-05-10 18:02:50 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5428ff4af8 Merge visibility map crash-safety into index-only scan release note
item, per Robert Haas.
2012-05-10 16:50:46 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
586d356bc5 Properly capitalize the TimeZone parameter
For better or worse, it is implemented in mixed case, so document it
as such, at least in the main listing, like DateStyle.

Josh Kupershmidt
2012-05-10 20:59:09 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
45f6fb2713 Add comma after "Previously" as suggested by Josh Kupershmidt 2012-05-10 13:47:58 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
ffda90f3af 9.2 release note updates from Peter Geoghegan 2012-05-10 13:38:14 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
53216e3992 New 9.2 SSL parameters are GUC, not libpq, per Magnus's observation. 2012-05-10 13:16:10 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
deb2c6e381 Add 9.2 release note suggestions from Heikki, 2012-05-10 13:13:14 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1d158d7f98 Python 2.2 is no longer supported
It was already on its last legs, and it turns out that it was
accidentally broken in commit 89e850e6fd
and no one cared.  So remove the rest the support for it and update
the documentation to indicate that Python 2.3 is now required.
2012-05-10 20:02:57 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
d9bb75dd37 Whitespace cleanup 2012-05-10 20:02:57 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
1908a6796a 9.2 release note adjustments from Robert Haas. 2012-05-10 13:00:18 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
d413efe9e1 Another doc fix for HTML entities. 2012-05-10 12:54:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
77bfdb11d0 Update entitiy escapes docs; must be Latin1. 2012-05-10 12:53:21 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
38cd7cc0bc Remove URL that suggested numeric HTML entities. 2012-05-10 12:33:54 -04:00
Tom Lane
47ce4c36a7 Remove unportable use of SGML character-code entity.
It'd be nice to be able to spell Jan Urbanski's name with the correct
accent marks, but we haven't yet found a way that works in everybody's
docs toolchain.  This way definitely doesn't.
2012-05-10 12:22:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1ee90397f4 Release notes adjustments from Erik Rijkers 2012-05-10 11:21:13 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
5d258fe90c Improve two 9.2 release note items. 2012-05-10 10:29:49 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
386bb92f63 Fix a couple of typos in 9.2 release notes.
Thom Brown
2012-05-10 15:42:06 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
3e8e692bbc Copy-editing 9.2 release notes.
Fix a couple of typos, add missing filename tags, and add a link to the doc
section on timezone guc.
2012-05-10 10:46:27 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
e78cc624e8 Update 9.2 SSL release note links. 2012-05-10 00:32:17 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
668f959dcb Publish draft version of Postgres 9.2 release notes. 2012-05-09 22:25:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1c882e07da Split contrib documentation into extensions and programs
Create separate appendixes for contrib extensions and other server
plugins on the one hand, and utility programs on the other.  Recast
the documentation of the latter as refentries, so that man pages are
generated.
2012-05-09 20:39:53 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
4f696030ab Update documentation to say that gmake check in contrib is supported 2012-05-09 20:37:09 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
773b5e0efa Add another URL for HTML entity codes. 2012-05-08 23:17:52 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8b77e226fb Document how to find non-ASCII characters in the release notes. 2012-05-08 22:51:32 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
db84ba65ab psql: Add variable to control keyword case in tab completion
This adds the variable COMP_KEYWORD_CASE, which controls in what case
keywords are completed.  This is partially to let users configure the
change from commit 69f4f1c357, but it
also offers more behaviors than were available before.
2012-05-08 21:06:08 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
65b110703b Document that it is the pgsql version we are matching for psqlrc
version-specific files, not the server version.
2012-05-06 21:43:55 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
0a3a674b98 Revert typo fix 768c3affd44d1dcb4e43e2e006c642524714c2a4; I was wrong. 2012-05-06 08:10:55 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
768c3affd4 Fix psql doc typo. 2012-05-05 12:00:06 -04:00
Tom Lane
71b9549d05 Overdue code review for transaction-level advisory locks patch.
Commit 62c7bd31c8 had assorted problems, most
visibly that it broke PREPARE TRANSACTION in the presence of session-level
advisory locks (which should be ignored by PREPARE), as per a recent
complaint from Stephen Rees.  More abstractly, the patch made the
LockMethodData.transactional flag not merely useless but outright
dangerous, because in point of fact that flag no longer tells you anything
at all about whether a lock is held transactionally.  This fix therefore
removes that flag altogether.  We now rely entirely on the convention
already in use in lock.c that transactional lock holds must be owned by
some ResourceOwner, while session holds are never so owned.  Setting the
locallock struct's owner link to NULL thus denotes a session hold, and
there is no redundant marker for that.

PREPARE TRANSACTION now works again when there are session-level advisory
locks, and it is also able to transfer transactional advisory locks to the
prepared transaction, but for implementation reasons it throws an error if
we hold both types of lock on a single lockable object.  Perhaps it will be
worth improving that someday.

Assorted other minor cleanup and documentation editing, as well.

Back-patch to 9.1, except that in the 9.1 branch I did not remove the
LockMethodData.transactional flag for fear of causing an ABI break for
any external code that might be examining those structs.
2012-05-04 17:44:31 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
1715ff1128 doc: Fix for too many brackets in command synopses on man pages
The default for the choice attribute of the <arg> element is "opt",
which would normally put the argument inside brackets.  But the DSSSL
stylesheets contain a hack that treats <arg> directly inside <group>
specially, so that <group><arg>-x</arg><arg>-y</arg></group> comes out
as [ -x | -y ] rather than [ [-x] | [-y] ], which it would technically
be.  But when building man pages, this doesn't work, and so the
command synopses on the man pages contain lots of extra brackets.

By putting choice="opt" or choice="plain" explicitly on every <arg>
and <group> element, we avoid any toolchain dependencies like that,
and it also makes it clearer in the source code what is meant.

In passing, make some small corrections in the documentation about
which arguments are really optional or not.
2012-05-03 22:58:00 +03:00
Bruce Momjian
ebcaa5fcde Remove BSD/OS (BSDi) port. There are no known users upgrading to
Postgres 9.2, and perhaps no existing users either.
2012-05-03 10:58:44 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
f2f9439fbf Remove dead ports
Remove the following ports:

- dgux
- nextstep
- sunos4
- svr4
- ultrix4
- univel

These are obsolete and not worth rescuing.  In most cases, there is
circumstantial evidence that they wouldn't work anymore anyway.
2012-05-01 22:11:12 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
4266509c57 Improve markup of cmdsynopsis elements
Add more markup in particular so that the command options appear
consistently in monospace in the HTML output.

On the vacuumdb reference page, remove listing all the possible
options in the synopsis.  They have become too many now; we have the
detailed options list for that.
2012-04-30 21:18:03 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
61c84b4761 Fix display of <command> elements on man pages
We had changed this from the default bold to monospace for all output
formats, but for man pages, this creates visual inconsistencies, so
revert to the default for man pages.
2012-04-30 21:18:03 +03:00
Tom Lane
809e7e21af Converge all SQL-level statistics timing values to float8 milliseconds.
This patch adjusts the core statistics views to match the decision already
taken for pg_stat_statements, that values representing elapsed time should
be represented as float8 and measured in milliseconds.  By using float8,
we are no longer tied to a specific maximum precision of timing data.
(Internally, it's still microseconds, but we could now change that without
needing changes at the SQL level.)

The columns affected are
pg_stat_bgwriter.checkpoint_write_time
pg_stat_bgwriter.checkpoint_sync_time
pg_stat_database.blk_read_time
pg_stat_database.blk_write_time
pg_stat_user_functions.total_time
pg_stat_user_functions.self_time
pg_stat_xact_user_functions.total_time
pg_stat_xact_user_functions.self_time

The first four of these are new in 9.2, so there is no compatibility issue
from changing them.  The others require a release note comment that they
are now double precision (and can show a fractional part) rather than
bigint as before; also their underlying statistics functions now match
the column definitions, instead of returning bigint microseconds.
2012-04-30 14:03:33 -04:00
Tom Lane
1dd89eadcd Rename I/O timing statistics columns to blk_read_time and blk_write_time.
This seems more consistent with the pre-existing choices for names of
other statistics columns.  Rename assorted internal identifiers to match.
2012-04-29 18:13:33 -04:00
Tom Lane
309c64745e Rename track_iotiming GUC to track_io_timing.
This spelling seems significantly more readable to me.
2012-04-29 16:23:54 -04:00
Tom Lane
5f2b089387 Further editorialization on the new documentation for statistics views.
Get rid of the per-column documentation of underlying functions, which did
far more to clutter the view descriptions than it did to be helpful, and
was rather incomplete and typo-ridden anyway.  Instead suggest that people
consult the definitions of the standard views to see the underlying
functions.

The older functions for obtaining individual facts about backends are now
somewhat obsoleted by pg_stat_get_activity, which means that they are not
documented by any standard view.  So I put that information into a separate
table.  (Maybe we should just deprecate them instead?)

In passing, fix a couple more documentation errors.
2012-04-29 15:36:04 -04:00
Tom Lane
aebe989477 Make a copy-editing pass over the new documentation for statistics views.
Fix a bunch of typos, improve markup, make wording more uniform, rearrange
some material.  No substantive changes.
2012-04-29 13:24:44 -04:00
Tom Lane
93f94e356d Adjust timing units in pg_stat_statements.
Display total time and I/O timings in milliseconds, for consistency with
the units used for timings in the core statistics views.  The columns
remain of float8 type, so that sub-msec precision is available.  (At some
point we will probably want to convert the core views to use float8 type
for the same reason, but this patch does not touch that issue.)

This is a release-note-requiring change in the meaning of the total_time
column.  The I/O timing columns are new as of 9.2, so there is no
compatibility impact from redefining them.

Do some minor copy-editing in the documentation, too.
2012-04-28 16:03:57 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
05dd9fb18d PL/Python: Update list of supported environment variables 2012-04-28 13:34:06 +03:00
Tom Lane
92df220343 Improve documentation around historical calendar rules.
Get rid of section 8.5.6 (Date/Time Internals), which appears to confuse
people more than it helps, and anyway discussion of Postgres' internal
datetime calculation methods seems pretty out of place here.  Instead,
make datatype.sgml just say that we follow the Gregorian calendar (a bit
of specification not previously present anywhere in that chapter :-()
and link to the History of Units appendix for more info.  Do some mild
editorialization on that appendix, too, to make it clearer that we are
following proleptic Gregorian calendar rules rather than anything more
historically accurate.

Per a question from Florence Cousin and subsequent discussion in
pgsql-docs.
2012-04-26 18:28:52 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
2856c51c86 Standardize indentation of XSL files
Predominant standard is two spaces, so adjust outliers to that.
2012-04-24 21:40:07 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
225d9c0638 Fix minor stylistic issue 2012-04-24 21:16:07 +03:00
Robert Haas
3ce7f18e92 Casts to or from a domain type are ignored; warn and document.
Prohibiting this outright would break dumps taken from older versions
that contain such casts, which would create far more pain than is
justified here.

Per report by Jaime Casanova and subsequent discussion.
2012-04-24 09:20:53 -04:00
Robert Haas
5d4b60f2f2 Lots of doc corrections.
Josh Kupershmidt
2012-04-23 22:43:09 -04:00
Robert Haas
9d435d57e1 Minor improvements for CHECK NO INHERIT documentation.
Fix typo spotted by Thom Brown, and improve wording in another area
where Thom spotted a typo.
2012-04-23 21:59:17 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
09ff76fcdb Recast "ONLY" column CHECK constraints as NO INHERIT
The original syntax wasn't universally loved, and it didn't allow its
usage in CREATE TABLE, only ALTER TABLE.  It now works everywhere, and
it also allows using ALTER TABLE ONLY to add an uninherited CHECK
constraint, per discussion.

The pg_constraint column has accordingly been renamed connoinherit.

This commit partly reverts some of the changes in
61d81bd28d, particularly some pg_dump and
psql bits, because now pg_get_constraintdef includes the necessary NO
INHERIT within the constraint definition.

Author: Nikhil Sontakke
Some tweaks by me
2012-04-20 23:56:57 -03:00
Peter Eisentraut
cd1f4db4ae Untabify DSSSL and XSL files and add to check-tabs target
Like with SGML files, using tabs in these files is confusing and
unnecessary.
2012-04-19 22:38:14 +03:00
Robert Haas
37e666b8b5 Doc clarification for synchronous_commit.
Fujii Masao
2012-04-18 10:11:03 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
cf714c8108 Add compatibility information for prepared transaction commands 2012-04-16 22:40:54 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
0f48e06751 PL/Python: Improve documentation of nrows() method
Clarify that nrows() is the number of rows processed, versus the
number of rows returned, which can be obtained using len.  Also add
tests about that.
2012-04-16 11:30:32 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
c03523ed3f PL/Python: Fix crash when colnames() etc. called without result set
The result object methods colnames() etc. would crash when called
after a command that did not produce a result set.  Now they throw an
exception.

discovery and initial patch by Jean-Baptiste Quenot
2012-04-15 20:23:08 +03:00
Robert Haas
ea6a2d8d47 Rename synchronous_commit='write' to 'remote_write'.
Fujii Masao, per discussion on pgsql-hackers
2012-04-14 10:53:22 -04:00
Robert Haas
4a2d7ad76f pg_size_pretty(numeric)
The output of the new pg_xlog_location_diff function is of type numeric,
since it could theoretically overflow an int8 due to signedness; this
provides a convenient way to format such values.

Fujii Masao, with some beautification by me.
2012-04-14 08:07:25 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
d4db16d303 Add description of long options for '-c', '-D', '-l' and '-s'. Per
discussion of hackers list on 2012/3/10 "missing description initdb
manual".
2012-04-14 18:40:35 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
aacc50d175 Document that VALUES can be used in WITH 2012-04-14 09:08:08 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
f3a3aac845 Fix typo
Etsuro Fujita
2012-04-14 01:06:34 +03:00
Robert Haas
cd93425cd1 Add Peter Geoghegan as additional author of pg_stat_statements. 2012-04-13 16:43:13 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
c0cc526e8b Rename bytea_agg to string_agg and add delimiter argument
Per mailing list discussion, we would like to keep the bytea functions
parallel to the text functions, so rename bytea_agg to string_agg,
which already exists for text.

Also, to satisfy the rule that we don't want aggregate functions of
the same name with a different number of arguments, add a delimiter
argument, just like string_agg for text already has.
2012-04-13 21:36:59 +03:00
Robert Haas
7167fcd21b Grammar corrections.
Christoph Berg
2012-04-13 12:47:23 -04:00
Tom Lane
81e3e4fd14 Assorted spelling corrections.
Thom Brown
2012-04-12 10:43:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
880bfc3287 Silently ignore any nonexistent schemas that are listed in search_path.
Previously we attempted to throw an error or at least warning for missing
schemas, but this was done inconsistently because of implementation
restrictions (in many cases, GUC settings are applied outside transactions
so that we can't do system catalog lookups).  Furthermore, there were
exceptions to the rule even in the beginning, and we'd been poking more
and more holes in it as time went on, because it turns out that there are
lots of use-cases for having some irrelevant items in a common search_path
value.  It seems better to just adopt a philosophy similar to what's always
been done with Unix PATH settings, wherein nonexistent or unreadable
directories are silently ignored.

This commit also fixes the documentation to point out that schemas for
which the user lacks USAGE privilege are silently ignored.  That's always
been true but was previously not documented.

This is mostly in response to Robert Haas' complaint that 9.1 started to
throw errors or warnings for missing schemas in cases where prior releases
had not.  We won't adopt such a significant behavioral change in a back
branch, so something different will be needed in 9.1.
2012-04-11 12:02:50 -04:00
Alvaro Herrera
b035cb9db7 Accept postgres:// URIs in libpq connection functions
postgres:// URIs are an attempt to "stop the bleeding" in this general
area that has been said to occur due to external projects adopting their
own syntaxes.  The syntaxes supported by this patch:

 postgres://[user[:pwd]@][unix-socket][:port[/dbname]][?param1=value1&...]
 postgres://[user[:pwd]@][net-location][:port][/dbname][?param1=value1&...]

should be enough to cover most interesting cases without having to
resort to "param=value" pairs, but those are provided for the cases that
need them regardless.

libpq documentation has been shuffled around a bit, to avoid stuffing
all the format details into the PQconnectdbParams description, which was
already a bit overwhelming.  The list of keywords has moved to its own
subsection, and the details on the URI format live in another subsection.

This includes a simple test program, as requested in discussion, to
ensure that interesting corner cases continue to work appropriately in
the future.

Author: Alexander Shulgin
Some tweaking by Álvaro Herrera, Greg Smith, Daniel Farina, Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed by Robert Haas, Alexey Klyukin (offlist), Heikki Linnakangas,
Marko Kreen, and others

Oh, it also supports postgresql:// but that's probably just an accident.
2012-04-11 04:33:51 -03:00
Tom Lane
0d9819f7e3 Measure epoch of timestamp-without-time-zone from local not UTC midnight.
This patch reverts commit 191ef2b407
and thereby restores the pre-7.3 behavior of EXTRACT(EPOCH FROM
timestamp-without-tz).  Per discussion, the more recent behavior was
misguided on a couple of grounds: it makes it hard to get a
non-timezone-aware epoch value for a timestamp, and it makes this one
case dependent on the value of the timezone GUC, which is incompatible
with having timestamp_part() labeled as immutable.

The other behavior is still available (in all releases) by explicitly
casting the timestamp to timestamp with time zone before applying EXTRACT.

This will need to be called out as an incompatible change in the 9.2
release notes.  Although having mutable behavior in a function marked
immutable is clearly a bug, we're not going to back-patch such a change.
2012-04-10 12:04:42 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
442da68f73 Point the URL to PL/py directly to the page about the procedural language.
It used to point to a top-level page that contains client-side tools as
well. It was hard to find the procedural language there.
2012-04-10 09:46:44 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
fb9bc5d9fb Fix typos in docs, some words were doubled.
Thom Brown
2012-04-10 09:31:31 +03:00
Tom Lane
c94b43ce39 Adjust various references to GEQO being non-deterministic.
It's still non-deterministic in some sense ... but given fixed settings
and identical planning problems, it will now always choose the same plan,
so we probably shouldn't tar it with that brush.  Per bug #6565 from
Guillaume Cottenceau.  Back-patch to 9.0 where the behavior was fixed.
2012-04-09 20:49:01 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
17665f6115 Re-add documentation recommendation to use gzip/gunzip for archive file
storage.
2012-04-09 14:50:48 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
75fcb935bc Update documentation to more clearly label the streaming replication option. 2012-04-09 14:40:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8213624fc9 Remove documentation mention of pglesslog, which was added in 2009
because there was only a beta for 9.0 and it does not compile on 9.1.
2012-04-09 14:12:38 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
140a4fbf1a Remove link to ODBCng project from the docs.
Thom Browne pointed out that the URL was out of date, and Devrim GÜNDÜZ
pointed out that the project isn't maintained anymore.
2012-04-09 09:47:25 +03:00